* f> * a 1 aO 
 
 ci. 
 
 
 'in" V V , , , , % AT 
 
 dL r ^«J 
 
 W' 
 
 •-■7 ^ ^, A N - 
 
 A ,. * * o , V 
 
 to « -£■ 
 
 C ^r ft ' 
 
 f% 
 
 ^ 
 
 0' 
 
 o* V 
 
 v i * t 
 
 / ft 4 S s -o <• '\ o * 
 
 w 
 
 ** 4 
 
 s -0 
 
 * . 
 
 • o- 
 
 '. "^ v* 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 •^ rtf 
 
 \ ■ 
 
 £%. 
 
 "«,V'*" f <* ' V o 
 
 *«^w 
 
 
 ^ ^flB/ 
 
Colombo, Cris' 
 
 PERSONAL NARRATIVE 
 
 FIRST VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS 
 
 FROM A MANUSCRIPT RE<?T&TLy/ DISCOVERED IN SPAIN. 
 
 ^r.mslatc^ front tfoc Spanish. 
 5 
 
 BOSTON : 
 PUBLISHED BY THOMAS B. WAIT A8JD SON, 
 
 &ND SOLD BY WAIT, GREENE AND CO. BOSTON*; (.. IND 
 
 C. CARVILL/NEW-YORK, AND CAREY AND LEA, 
 
 PHILADELPHIA. 
 

 
 DISTRICT OF MASSACHUSETTS, TO WIT: 
 
 District Clerk's Office. 
 Be it Remembered, that on the twenty-ninth day of June, A. D. 
 1827, in the fifty-first year of the Independence of the United States 
 of America, Samuel Kettell, of the said District, has deposited in 
 this office the title of a book, the right whereof he claims as Proprietor, 
 n the words following to wit : 
 
 " Personal Narrative of the First Voyage of Columbus to America. 
 From a Manuscript recently discovered in Spain. Translated from (he 
 
 Spanish." 
 
 In conformity to the act of the Congress of the United States, en- 
 titled, u An act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the 
 copies of maps, charts, and books, to the authors and proprietors of 
 such copies, during the times therein mentioned ;" and also to an act en- 
 titled, " An act, supplementary to an act, entitled, an act for the en- 
 couragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts and 
 books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies, during the times 
 therein mentioned ; and extending the benefits thereof to the arts of 
 designing, engraving and etching historical and other prints." 
 
 JOHN W. DAVlsA Cle '\f lhe P isiricl 
 1 I of Massachusetts. 
 
TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE. 
 
 The public has been already informed* respecting the 
 discovery and publication of the original of the following 
 work, but it will be proper to state the principal circum- 
 stances here. In the year 1789 the King of Spain, 
 Charles IV. conceived the design of establishing at Cadiz 
 a repository and library to contain the historical and sci- 
 entific works relating to the Marine, which were known to 
 exist in the various collections in the kingdom. For this 
 purpose he commissioned Don Martin Fernandez de Nav- 
 arrete, an officer of rank in the naval department of the 
 
 - realm, to undertake an examination of all the libraries and 
 depositories both public and private, in the kingdom, in 
 
 . order to obtain copies of works relating to the proposed 
 object. In prosecution of this plan, Don Martin began 
 the next year to explore the collection of manuscripts in 
 the royal library at Madrid, extending his researches at 
 times to the archives of the Marquisses of Santa Cruz. 
 
 * North American Review, No. LIII, and LV. 
 
IV PREFACE. 
 
 and Villa Franca, and the Duke of Medinasidonia. He 
 afterwards proceeded to examine the royal collections of 
 manuscripts at St. Isidore and the Escurial. In the 
 course of these inquiries, being in the immediate search 
 of the termination to the fabulous narrative of Lorenzo 
 Ferrer Maldonado, with a view to make some examina- 
 tions respecting its authenticity, he was directed to the 
 archives of the Duke del Infantado, where it was under- 
 stood, there was a probability that it might be found. In 
 his researches in this quarter, he met with two manu- 
 scripts which proved on examination to be the narratives 
 of the first and third voyages of Columbus. 
 
 The disturbed state of the kingdom which followed this 
 period, and the official duties which interrupted the enter- 
 prise of Don Martin, prevented these valuable discoveries 
 form being given to the public till the year 1825, when 
 they were by the order of the present King, published at 
 Madrid with many other documents, in two volumes, under 
 the title of Coleccion de los Viages y Descnbrimienios que 
 hicieron por mar los Espaholes desde fines del Siglo XV. etc. 
 of which work the following translation forms but a small 
 portion. 
 
 This performance thus casually brought to light, we 
 cannot hesitate to regard, both as respects the subject and 
 the author, as the most valuable and interesting which the 
 
PREFACE. V 
 
 researches for the above-mentioned object could have 
 offered to us. The manuscript is in the hand-writing of 
 Bartolome de las Casas, and is evidently an abridgement 
 of the original journal of Columbus, made by this author in 
 the course of his labors in compiling his History of the 
 Indies. Las Casas possessed a great number of manu- 
 scripts written by Columbus, which he made use of as 
 materials for his History; this work was brought down to 
 the year 1520, but has never been published, as the gen- 
 eral strain of the writer's representations is unfavorable to 
 the character of the Spaniards. Two original manuscripts 
 of the work exist in the library of the Spanish Royal Acad- 
 emy of History, and another in the Royal Library. These 
 have been turned to great use by the Spanish historians of 
 America, in particular Herrera, an examination of whose 
 work will render it evident that Las Casas must have made 
 copious and particular extracts into his History from the 
 journal of Columbus, which indeed appears to be the 
 groundwork of the historian's narrative as far as it 
 extends. 
 
 Although the following narration appears, for the most 
 part in the shape of an abstract by another hand, from the 
 oiiginal diary, yet the reader will perceive that the in- 
 troduction, and other extensive passages of the narrative 
 are preserved in the precise words of Columbus. These 
 will be distinguished from the rest, as the writer at such 
 
Vl PREFACE. 
 
 times speaks in his own person: the other parts, being 
 probably abridged of uninteresting particulars and repeti- 
 tions, are given in the language of the transcriber. 
 
 It will be hardly necessary to remind the reader that he 
 cannot expect to meet in this work with that regular order 
 and elaborate execution displayed in modern works upon 
 kindred subjects. A book of voyages or travels at the 
 present day is not thought likely to prove acceptable with 
 the public, unless drawn up with a lucid and methodical 
 arrangement of matter, and a proper display of taste and 
 care in the language. The authors of these writings 
 never lose sight of the fact, or rather make it their sole 
 contemplation, that the productions of their industry will 
 be judged of in the light of literary performances, and this 
 consideration demands from them the exercise of a judge- 
 ment and skill in the disposition of their matter, and se- 
 lection of their language, which it would be both vain and 
 unreasonable to look for in a performance like the follow- 
 ing;. Nothing was probably farther from the intentions or 
 thoughts of Columbus and his transcriber in executing this 
 volume, than to make a book ; and nothing could be per- 
 formed with a more settled disregard of the idea. Colum- 
 bus describes the objects which he saw, and the events 
 which occurred from day i.o day, without essaying to give 
 his narrative any greater portion of method or regularity 
 than such as was unavoidably connected with the manner 
 
PREFACE. VH 
 
 of its performance. The thoughts which strike him from 
 time to time, are entered upon the journal just as they 
 happen to occur, whether they relate to the present, past 
 or future matters of the voyage ; and when subsequent 
 events prove them erroneous, he takes no care to go back 
 to the place of their insertion to rectify his statements. 
 His comments and speculations, as well as many of his 
 descriptions, are inserted without reflecting whether any 
 part of them have been mentioned before, and often at 
 times when they do not apply to the portion of the narra- 
 tive in which they are introduced. 
 
 It cannot be expected that where so little care is exhib- 
 ited in laying out the matter of a work, any great attention 
 should be paid to the language ; it is in fact careless and 
 incorrect to a high degree. This circumstance, connect- 
 ed with the fact that the Spanish work is attended with the 
 disadvantages of an incorrect punctuation, an erroneous 
 and antiquated orthography, and other imperfections which 
 accompany ancient and decayed manuscripts, will it is 
 hoped be deemed a sufficient excuse for any errors which 
 may be discovered in the following translation. 
 
 Although the translator is sensible that the character of 
 the performance might be improved in some respects by 
 retrenching and transposing many passages, and render- 
 ed more acceptable as to language by a freer interpreta- 
 
Vlll PREFACE. 
 
 tion, yet reflecting that such a course would deprive it Or- 
 the distinct and characteristic features of the original, he 
 judged it unadvisable to attempt giving it a shape in any 
 respect different from the Spanish, or to deviate from the 
 unambitious simplicity of expression in which the original 
 narrative is given, for the purpose of embellishing his lan- 
 guage. Except, therefore, in a few cases where the dif- 
 fuseness of the writer degenerates into tautology, no lib- 
 erties have been taken with the text. Everything relating 
 to such a man as Columbus must be valuable and interest- 
 ing. His manner of relating the events in which he was 
 engaged, and describing the objects he saw, cannot be in- 
 different to us. The surprise and unmeasured admiration 
 he expresses on viewing the scenes which his discoveries 
 daily opened to his sight, strongly engage our attention. 
 His comments and speculations upon every object which 
 presented itself, though often fanciful and enthusiastical- 
 ly extravagant, yet possess a deep interest as exhibiting 
 the train of thought which guided him in his undertaking. 
 His very repetitions are not without their significance in 
 showing the strong and lively impression made upon his 
 mind by various circumstances of the voyage. All parts 
 of the narrative combine in rendering it of the highest 
 value, not only as an historical document, but as a means 
 of estimating the character of the great discoverer of 
 
 AMERICA. 
 
 Boston, July, 1827. 
 
FIRST VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS. 
 
 (lN THE NAME OF OUR LORD JESUS CHRIST. / 
 
 Whereas, Most Christian, High, Excellent and 
 Powerful Princes, King and Queen of Spain and 
 of the Islands of the Sea, our Sovereigns, this 
 present year 1492, after your Highnesses had 
 terminated the war with the Moors reigning in 
 Europe, the same having been brought to an end 
 in the great city of Granada, where on the second 
 day of January, this present year, I saw the royal 
 banners of your Highnesses planted by force of 
 arms upon the towers of the Alhambra, which is 
 the fortress of that city, and saw the Moorish 
 king come out at the gate of the city and kiss 
 the hands of your Highnesses, and of the Prince 
 my Sovereign ; and in the present month, in con- 
 sequence of the information which I had given 
 your Highnesses respecting the countries of 
 India and of a Prince, called Great Can, which 
 in our language signifies King of Kings, how, at 
 many times he, and his predecessors had sent to 
 1 
 
10 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 Rome soliciting instructers who might teach him 
 our holy faith, and the holy Father had never 
 granted his request, whereby great numbers of 
 people were lost, believing in idolatry and doc- 
 tcines of perdition.* Your Highnesses, as Cath- 
 olic Christians, and princes who love and promote 
 the holy Christian faith, and are enemies of the 
 doctrine of Mahomet, and of all idolatry and her- 
 esy, determined to send me, Christopher Colum- 
 bus, to the above-mentioned countries of India, to 
 see the said princes, people, and territories, and to 
 learn their disposition and the proper method of 
 converting them to our holy faith ; and further- 
 more directed that I should not proceed by land 
 to the East, as is customary, but by a Westerly 
 route, in which direction we have hitherto no cer- 
 tain evidence that any one has gone. So after hav- 
 ing expelled the Jews from your dominions, your 
 ^Highnesses, in the same month of January, order- 
 ed me to proceed with a sufficient armament to 
 the said regions of India, and for that purpose 
 granted me great favors, and ennobled me that 
 thenceforth 1 might call myself Don, and be High 
 Admiral of the Sea, and perpetual Viceroy and 
 Governor in all the islands and continents which 
 I might discover and acquire, or which may here- 
 after be discovered and acquired in the ocean : 
 
 * See Note I. at the end of the volume. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 1 1 
 
 and that this dignity should be inherited by my 
 eldest son, and thus descend from degree to de- 
 gree forever. Hereupon I left the city of Gran- 
 ada, on Saturday, the twelfth day of May, 1492, 
 and proceeded to Palos, a seaport, where 1 arm- 
 ed three vessels, very fit for such an enterprise, 
 and having provided myself with abundance of 
 stores and seamen, I set sail from the port, on 
 Friday, the third of August, half an hour before 
 sunrise, and steered for the Canary Islands of 
 your Highnesses, which are in the said ocean, 
 thence to take my departure and proceed till I 
 arrived at the Indies, and perform the embassy 
 of your Highnesses to the Princes there, arid dis- 
 charge the orders given me. For this purpose I 
 determined to keep an account of the voyage, and 
 to write down punctually every thing we per- 
 formed or saw from day to day, as will hereaf- 
 ter appear. Moreover, Sovereign Princes, be- 
 sides describing every night the occurrences of 
 the day, and every day those of the preceding 
 night, 1 intend to draw up a nautical chart, which 
 shall contain the several parts of the ocean and 
 land in their proper situations; and also to com- 
 pose a book to represent the whole by picture with 
 latitudes and longitudes, on all which accounts it 
 behoves me to abstain from my sleep, and make 
 many trials in navigation, which things will de- 
 mand much labor. 
 
12 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 Friday, Aug. 3d, 1492. Set sail from the bar 
 of Saltes* at 8 o'clock, and proceeded with a 
 strong breeze till sunset, sixty milest or fifteen 
 leagues S. afterwards SW. and S. by W. which 
 is the direction of the Canaries. 
 
 Saturday, Aug. 4th. Steered SW. by S. 
 
 Sunday, Aug. 5th. Sailed day and night more 
 than forty leagues. 
 
 Monday, Aug. 6th. The rudder of the car- 
 avel;}; Pinta became loose, being broken or un- 
 shipped. It was believed that this happened by 
 the contrivance of Gomez Rascon and Christo- 
 pher Quintero, who were on board the caravel, 
 because they disliked the voyage. The Admi- 
 ral says he had found them in an unfavorable 
 disposition before setting out. He was in much 
 anxietv at not being able to afford any assistance 
 in this case, but says that it somewhat quieted 
 his apprehensions to know that Martin Alonzo 
 Pinzon, Captain of the Pinta, was a man of cour- 
 age and capacity. Made a progress, day and 
 night, of twenty nine leagues. 
 
 Tuesday, Aug. 7th. The Pinta's rudder again 
 broke loose ; secured it, and made for the island 
 
 * Harbour of Palos, a little north of Cadiz. 
 
 | Italian miles, four to the league. 
 
 t A caravel is a long, single decked vessel, with three 
 masts and latine sails. The Admiral's ship, called the 
 Santa Maria, was square-rigged. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 13 
 
 of Lanzarote, one of the Canaries. Sailed, day 
 and night, twenty-five leagues. 
 
 Wednesday, Aug. 8th. There were divers 
 opinions among the pilots of the three vessels, as 
 to their true situation, and it was found that the 
 Admiral was the most correct. His object was 
 to reach the island of Grand Canary, and leave 
 there the Pinta, she being leaky, besides having 
 her rudder out of order, and take another vessel 
 there, if any one could be had. They were una- 
 ble to reach the island that day. 
 
 Thursday, Aug. 9th. The Admiral did not 
 succeed in reaching the island of Gomera till Sun- 
 day night. Martin Alonzo remained at Grand 
 Canary by command of the Admiral, he being un- 
 able to keep the other vessels company. The ^y 
 Admiral afterwards returned to Grand Canary, 
 and there with much labor repaired the Pinta, 
 being assisted by Martin Alonzo and the others ; 
 finally they sailed to Gomera. They saw a great 
 eruption of flames from the Peak of Teneriffe ; 
 which is a lofty mountain. The Pinta which be- 
 fore had carried latine sails, they altered and 
 made her square-rigged. Returned to Gomera, 
 Sunday, Sept. 2d, with the Pinta repaired. 
 
 The Admiral says, that he was assured by 
 many respectable Spaniards, inhabitants of the 
 island of Ferro, who were at Gomera with Dona 
 Inez Peraza, mother of Guillen Peraza, after- 
 
14 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 wards first Count of Gomera, that they every 
 year saw land to the west of the Canaries ; and 
 others of Gomera affirmed the same with the 
 like assurances. The Admiral here says that he 
 remembers, while he was in Portugal, in 1484, 
 there came a person to the King from the island 
 of Madeira, soliciting for a vessel to go in quest 
 of land, which he affirmed he saw every year, 
 and always of the same appearance. He also 
 says that he remembers the same was said by the 
 inhabitants of the Azores and described as in a 
 similar direction, and of the same shape and size.* 
 
 * A meteoric appearance observed to the west of the Ca- 
 naries occasioned the inhabitants of those islands to imag- 
 ine they saw a country in that direction; it bore the name 
 of the isle of Brandon or Borondon, and was laid down in all 
 the early maps. Saint Brandon or Brandam, was a Bene- 
 dictine monk of the sixth century, and according to the 
 legend concerning him was, with his companions, seven 
 years in pursuit of a western paradisic isle called Lna. The 
 inhabitants, also, of Madeira and the Azores, deceived by 
 an appearance similar to the above, entertained the belief 
 that land existed to the west of them. This belief was 
 current from the middle of the fifteenth century, and many 
 expeditions were undertaken for the discovery of these 
 countries, some of them by the orders of the king of Por- 
 tugal. Although they met with no success, the popular 
 imagination of the existence of these territories still con- 
 tinued. 
 
 Another island by the name of Aatilla was laid down in 
 their maps by the Portuguese, westward of Madeira, they 
 give the following account of it. In the year 714 when the 
 Moors conquered Spain, seven bishops accompanied by a 
 number of people sailed to the West, and discovered an 
 island, where they landed and burnt their ships, lest any of 
 the people should abandon them. They built seven cities 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 15 
 
 Having taken in wood, water, meat, and other 
 provisions, which had been provided by the men 
 which he left ashore on departing for Grand 
 
 and remained there. Several Portuguese ships afterwards 
 sailed thither and never returned home. In the time of 
 the Infant Don Henry, a ship arrived at this island, where 
 the crew went on shore, and the islanders straightway 
 carried them to their church, in order to ascertain whether 
 they were catholics, of which fact having satisfied them- 
 selves, they entreated them to remain a k\v days for their 
 sovereign, who would rejoice to see them. But those of 
 the ship fearing that the inhabitants would burn her, em- 
 barked in all haste and returned to Portugal. The sand 
 which they found upon the shore of the island was a third 
 part gold. 
 
 To the above may be added the following curious narra- 
 tion of Ebn Al Ouardi an Arabian Geographer, who died, 
 according to D'Herbelot, in 1348, or according to others, 
 in 1446. After describing Spain and Portugal, and stating 
 that these countries are bordered by the dark sea, which is 
 very dangerous, he adds that eight persons of the city of 
 Lisbon, desirous to know what was situated beyond the 
 ocean, equipped a vessel with all the necessaries for a long 
 voyage, and swore not to return till they had penetrated 
 to the extremity of the ocean, and arrived at the land oppo- 
 site. These navigators sailed eleven days, when they found 
 themselves upon a sea without bottom, where the waves 
 were high, and the winds drove them to the South: after pro- 
 ceeding on twelve days longer, they discovered an island 
 which our author calls Dgezirat alghanam, the isle of sheep, 
 because the Arabs found upon it many of these animals, 
 which they could not eat for the bitterness of their flesh, 
 but contented themselves with taking the skins. They found 
 also a spring of fresh water, a supply of which they took on 
 board and re-embarked. They sailed twelve days more 10 
 the South and discovered another island, which was inhab- 
 ited; the people came in boats and conducted them to a 
 house on the shore. They were of a red complexion, and 
 tall stature. At the end of three days there came an inter- 
 preter who spoke Arabic, he conversed with them upon the 
 
16 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 Canary to repair the Pinta, the Admiral took his 
 final departure from Gomera with the three ves- 
 sels on Thursday, Sept. Cth. 
 
 Thursday Sept. 6th. Set sail from the har- 
 bour of Gomera this morning and shaped their 
 course for the voyage. The Admiral learnt 
 bv a vessel from the island of Ferro, that there 
 were three Portuguese caravels cruising about 
 there in search of him. This circumstance prob- 
 ably originated in the envy of the King of Por- 
 tugal, as the Admiral had left him to resort to 
 Castile. It was calm the whole day and night ; 
 in the morning they found themselves between 
 Gomera and TenerhTe. 
 
 subject of their voyage, and went to give an account of 
 them to the king of the isle. The king informed them that 
 he had likewise sent his men to make discoveries in that 
 vast ocean, that they had sailed West for a month, when 
 being stopped from proceeding by the great darkness which 
 surprised them, they returned without discovering any 
 thing. The Arabs afterwards returned to Lisbon, where 
 in memory of this event one of the streets was called Al- 
 magrurim, or the wanderers, which name it long retained. 
 See the Notices et Extraits dcs Manuscrils de la Biblwiheque 
 du Roi. T. 2. p. 24. with the remarks of M. de Guignes, 
 who draws the following conclusions from the narrative. 
 That the Arabs were accustomed to make expeditions of 
 discovery far into the Atlantic Ocean. That they probably 
 approached very near the continent of America, and with a 
 little more perseverance would have arrived there. That 
 the red color of the inhabitants of the island, which is that 
 of the natives of America, gives a probability to the rela- 
 tion. That the island could not be one of the Canaries, 
 because the Arabs were acquainted with them. See 
 Note FT. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 1 7 
 
 Friday, Sept. 7th. Calm all Friday, and till 
 three o'clock P. M. on Saturday. 
 
 Saturday, Sept. 8th. At three in the afternoon 
 the wind rose from the N. E. Steered their 
 course W. encountered a strong head sea, which 
 impeded their progress. Sailed, day and night, 
 nine leagues. 
 
 Sunday, Sept. 9th. Sailed this day nineteen 
 leagues, and determined to count less than the 
 true number, that the crew might not be dis- 
 mayed if the voyage should prove long. In the 
 night sailed one hundred and twenty miles, at the 
 rate of ten miles an hour, which make thirty 
 leagues. The sailors steered badly, causing the 
 vessels to fall to leeward toward the Northeast, 
 for which the Admiral reprimanded them repeat- 
 edly. 
 
 Monday, Sept. 10th. This day and night 
 sailed sixty leagues, at the rate of ten miles an 
 hour, which are two leagues and a halt Reck- 
 oned only forty-eight leagues, that the men 
 might not be terrified if they should be long upon 
 the voyage. 
 
 Tuesday, Sept. 11th. Steered their course 
 W. and sailed above twenty leagues ; saw a large 
 fragment of the mast of a vessel, apparently of 
 a hundred and twenty tons, but could not pick 
 it up. In the n^ht sailed about twenty leagues. 
 
18 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 and reckoned only sixteen, for the cause above 
 stated. 
 
 Wednesday, Sept. 12th. This day steering 
 their course, sailed day and night thirty-three 
 leagues, and reckoned less, for the same cause. 
 
 Thursday, Sept. 13th. This day and night 
 sailed W. thirty-three-leagues, and reckoned 
 three or four less. The currents were against 
 them. At the first of the evening this day, the 
 needles varied to the N. W. and the next morn- 
 ins: about as much in the same direction. 
 
 Friday, Sept. 14th. Steered this day and night 
 W. twenty leagues ; reckoned somewhat less. 
 The crew of the Nina stated that they had seen 
 agrajao, and a tropic bird, or water-wagtail, which 
 birds never go farther than twenty-five leagues 
 from the land. 
 
 Saturday, Sept. 15th. Sailed day and night, 
 W. tvventv-seven leagues and more. In the be- 
 ginning of the night saw a remarkable bolt of fire 
 fall into the sea at the distance of four or five 
 leagues. 
 
 Sunday, Sept 16th. Sailed day and night, W. 
 thirty-nine leagues, and reckoned only thirty six. 
 Some clouds arose and it drizzled. The Admi- 
 ral here says that from this time they experien- 
 ced very pleasant weather, and that the mornings 
 were most delightful, wanting nothing but the 
 melody of the nightingales. He compares the 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 19 
 
 weather to that of Andalusia in April. Here 
 the j began to meet with large patches of weeds 
 very green, and which appeared to have been 
 recently washed away from the land; on which 
 account they all judged themselves to be near 
 some island,* though not a continent, according 
 to the opinion of the Admiral, who says, ' the 
 continent we shall find further ahead.' 
 
 Monday, Sept. 17th. Steered W. and sailed, 
 day and night, above fifty leagues ; wrote down 
 only forty-seven; the current favored them. 
 They saw a great deal of weed which proved 
 to be rock-weed, it came from the W. and they 
 met with it very frequently. They were of opin- 
 ion that land was near. The pilots took the sun's 
 amplitude, and found that the needles varied to 
 the N. W. a whole point of the compass; the 
 seamen were terrified, and dismaved without 
 saying why. The Admiral discovered the 
 cause, and ordered them to take the amplitude 
 again the next morning, when they found that 
 the needles were true; the cause was, that the 
 star moved from its place, while the needles 
 remained stationary.t At dawn they saw many 
 more weeds, apparently river weeds, and among 
 
 * They were, in fact, at this time in the neighborhood 
 of a shoal afterwards discovered. 
 
 | It is hardly necessary to remark that this explanation 
 of the phenomenon was invented bv Columbus to quiet 
 the apprehensions of his crews. 
 
20 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 them a live crab, which the Admiral kept, and 
 says that these are sure signs of land, being never 
 found eighty leagues out at sea. They found 
 the sea-water less salt since they left the Ca- 
 naries, and the air more mild. They were all 
 very cheerful, and strove which vessel should out- 
 sail the others, and be the first to discover land ; 
 they saw many tunnies, and the crew of the 
 Nina killed one. The Admiral here says that 
 these signs were from the west, ' where 1 hope 
 that high God in whose hand is all victory 
 will speedily direct us to land.' This morning 
 he says he saw a white bird called a water-wag- 
 tail, or tropic bird, which does not sleep at sea. 
 
 Tuesday, Sept. 18th. Continued their course, 
 and sailed day and night more than fifty-five 
 leagues ; wrote down only forty-eight. All 
 this time they had experienced fair weather, 
 and sailed as they would have done upon the 
 river at Seville. This day Martin Alonzo in 
 the Pinta which was a swift sailer, ran ahead 
 of the other vessels, he having informed the Ad- 
 miral that he had seen great flocks of birds 
 towards,the W. and that he expected that night 
 to reach land; for this reason he kept on ahead 
 of the others. A great mass of dark, heavy 
 clouds appeared in the north, which is a sign of 
 being near the land. 
 
 Wednesday, Sept. 19th. Continued on, and 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 21 
 
 sailed, day and night twenty-five leagues, expe- 
 riencing a calm. Wrote down twenty-two. 
 This day at ten o'clock a pelican came on board, 
 and in the evening another ; these birds are not 
 accustomed to go twenty leagues from land. It 
 drizzled without wind, which is a sure sign of 
 land. The Admiral was unwilling to remain 
 here, beating about in search of land, but he 
 held it for certain that there were islands to the 
 North and South, which in fact was the case 
 and he was sailing in the midst of them.* His 
 wish was to proceed on to the Indies, having 
 such fair weather, for if it please God, as the 
 Admiral says, we shall examine these parts upon 
 our return. Here the pilots found their places 
 upon the chart: the reckoning of the Nina 
 made her four hundred and forty leagues distant 
 from the Canaries, that of the Pinta four hundred 
 and twenty, that of the Admiral four hundred.! 
 Thursday, Sept. 20th. Steered W. by N. 
 varying with alternate changes of the wind and 
 calms ; made seven or eight leagues progress. 
 Two pelicans came on board, and afterwards 
 another, — a sign of the neighborhood of land. 
 Saw large quantities of weeds to day, though 
 
 * It does not appear what islands Las Casas refers to 
 in the above remark ; they were at this time nearly in the 
 centre of the Atlantic ocean. Breakers were discovered 
 about this spot in 1802, but no land has ever been seen 
 in the neighborhood. 
 
 | Their true distance. 
 
22 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 none was observed yesterday. Caught a bird 
 similar to agrajao ; it was a river and not a ma- 
 rine bird, with feet like those of a gull. To- 
 wards night two or three land birds came to the 
 ship, singing; they disappeared before sunrise. 
 Afterwards saw a pelican coming from W. N. W. 
 and flying to the S. W ; an evidence of land to the 
 westward, as these birds sleep on shore, and go 
 to sea in the morning in search of food, never 
 proceeding twenty leagues from the land. 
 
 Friday, Sept. 21st. Most of the day calm, 
 afterwards a little wind. Steered their course 
 day and night, sailing less than thirteen leagues. 
 In the morningfound such abundance of weeds 
 that the ocean seemed to be covered with them; 
 they came from the west. Saw a pelican ; 
 the sea smooth as a river, and the finest air in 
 the world. Saw a whale, an indication of land, 
 as they always keep near the coast. 
 
 Saturday, Sept. 22d Steered about W. N. W. 
 varying their course, and making thirty leagues 
 progress. Saw few weeds. Some pardelas* 
 were seen, and another bird. The Admiral 
 here says, 4 this head wind was very necessary to 
 me, for my crew had grown much alarmed, dread- 
 ing that they never should meet in these seas with a 
 fair wind to return to Spain.'' Part of the day 
 saw no weeds, afterwards great plenty of it. 
 
 * A bird about the size of a pigeon. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 23 
 
 Sunday, Sept. 23d. Sailed N. W. and N. W. by 
 N. and at times W. nearly twenty-two leagues. 
 Saw a turtle dove, a pelican, a river bird, and 
 other white fowl; — weeds in abundance with 
 crabs among them. The sea being smooth and 
 tranquil, the sailors murmured, saying, that they 
 had got into smooth water, where it would never 
 blow to carry them back to Spain ; but afterwards 
 the sea rose without wind, which astonished 
 them. The Admiral says on this occasion ' the 
 rising of the sea ivas very favorable to me, as it 
 happened formerly to Moses when he led the Jews 
 from Egypt.' 
 
 Monday, Sept, 24th. Continued their course 
 W. and sailed day and night fourteen leagues 
 and a half; reckoned twelve ; a pelican came 
 to the ship, and they saw many pardelas. 
 
 Tuesday, Sept. 25th. Very calm this day ; 
 afterwards the wind rose. Continued their 
 course W. till night. The Admiral held a con- 
 versation with Martin Alonzo Pmzon, captain of 
 the Pinta, respecting a chart which the Admiral 
 had sent him three days before, in which it ap- 
 pears he had marked down certain islands in 
 that sea ; # Martin Alonzo was of opinion that 
 
 * This chart drawn by Columbus, seems to have been a 
 copy of one sent to Lisbon in 1474 by Paul Toscanelli a 
 Florentine astronomer; it was a chart of the Atlantic 
 Ocean with the islands and countries of India in the west. 
 See Note I. 
 
24 FIRST VOVAGE 
 
 they were in their neighborhood, and the Ad- 
 miral replied that he thought the same, but as 
 they had not met with them, it must have been 
 owing to the currents which had carried them 
 to the NE. and that they had not made such 
 progress as the pilots stated. The Admiral di- 
 rected him to return the chart, when he traced 
 their course upon it in presence of the pilot and 
 sailors. 
 
 At sunset Martin Alonzo called out with great 
 joy from his vessel that he saw land, and de- 
 manded of the Admiral a reward for his intel- 
 ligence. The Admiral says, when he heard him 
 declare this, he fell on his knees and returned 
 thanks to God, and Martin Alonzo with his crew 
 repeated Gloria in cxcelsis Deo, as did the crew 
 of the Admiral. Those on board the Nina as- 
 cended the rigging, and all declared they saw 
 land. The Admiral also thought it was land, 
 and about twenty-five leagues distant. They 
 remained all night repeating these affirmations, 
 and the Admiral ordered their course to be 
 shifted from W. to SW. where the land appear- 
 ed to lie. They sailed that day four leagues and 
 a half W. and in the night seventeen leagues 
 SW. in all twenty-one and a half: told the crew 
 thirteen leagues, making it a point to keep them 
 from knowing how far they had sailed; in this 
 manner two reckonings were kept, the shorter 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 25 
 
 one falsified, and the other being the true account. 
 The sea was very smooth and many of the sail- 
 lors went in it to bathe, saw many dories and 
 other fish. 
 
 Wednesday, Sept. 26th. Continued their 
 course W. till the afternoon, then SW. and dis- 
 covered that what they had taken for land was 
 nothing but clouds. Sailed, day and night, thirty- 
 one leagues; reckoned to the crew twenty-four. 
 The sea was like a river, the air soft and mild. 
 Thursday, Sept. 27th. Continued their 
 course W. and sailed, day and night, twenty-four 
 leagues, reckoned to the crew twenty. Saw 
 many dories, and killed one. Saw a tropic bird. 
 
 Friday, Sept. 28th. Continued their course 
 West, and sailed, day and night with calms, four- 
 teen leagues, reckoned thirteen; met with a 
 few weeds; caught two dories, and the other 
 vessels more. 
 
 Saturday, Sept. 29th. Continued their course 
 W. and sailed twenty-four leagues ; reckoned to 
 the crew twenty-one. On account of calms made 
 little progress this day. Saw a bird called Rabi- 
 horcado, which forces the pelicans to disgorge 
 what they have swallowed, and then devours it; 
 this is its only way of providing food; it is a mar- 
 ine bird, but never alights at sea, nor goes twenty 
 leagues from land; there are many of them in 
 the Cape Verd islands. Afterwards there came 
 3 
 
26 FIRST VOYAGE. 
 
 two pelicans. The air was soft and refreshing, 
 and the Admiral says nothing was wanting but 
 the singing of the nightingale; the sea smooth 
 as a river. Three times they saw three peli- 
 cans, and a Rabihorcado. Many weeds ap- 
 peared. , 
 
 Sunday, Sept. 30th. Continued their course 
 W. and sailed day and night in calms, fourteen 
 leagues ; reckoned eleven. Four tropic-birds 
 came to the ship, which is a very clear sign of 
 land, for so many birds of one sort, together, show 
 that they are not straying about having lost 
 themselves. Twice, saw two pelicans; many 
 weeds. The constellation called Las Guardias,* 
 which at evening appeared in a westerly t di- 
 rection, was seen in the NE. the next morn- 
 ing, making no more progress in a night of nine 
 hours, this was the case every night, as says the 
 Admiral. At night the needles varied a point 
 towards the NW. in the morning they were true, 
 by which it appears that the polar star moves, 
 like the others, and the needles are always right. 
 
 Monday, Oct. 1st. Continued their course 
 W. and sailed twenty-five leagues ; reckoned to 
 the crew twenty. Experienced a heavy shower. 
 
 * Charles's Wain. 
 
 j" Probably an error for Northerly, which is (he state- 
 ment in the Biography of Columbus, by his son ; Don Fer- 
 nando, who relates this circumstance. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 27 
 
 The pilot of the Admiral began to fear this 
 morning that they were five hundred and seven- 
 ty-eight leagues West of the island of Ferro. 
 The short reckoning which the Admiral showed 
 his crew, gave five hundred and eighty-four, but 
 the true one which he kept to himself was seven 
 hundred and seven leagues. 
 
 Tuesday, Oct. 2d. Continued their course W. 
 day and night, thirty-nine leagues ; reckoned to 
 the crew thirty; the sea ever smooth and favor- 
 able. ' Many thanks be to God,'' says the Admi- 
 ral here. Weeds came from the E. towards the 
 W. the contrary to what they had before ob- 
 served. Saw many fish and took one. A white 
 bird, which appeared to be a gull, was seen. 
 
 Wednesday, Oct. 3d. Continued their accus- 
 tomed course, and sailed forty-seven leagues ; 
 reckoned to the crew forty. Many pardelas ap- 
 peared, and great quantities of weed, some of it 
 old, and some very fresh, which appeared to con- 
 tain fruit. Saw no other birds. The Admiral 
 believed they had passed the islands contained 
 in his chart. Here the Admiral says that he 
 was unwilling to stay beating up and down the 
 week before, when they had so many signs of 
 land, though he knew there were islands in that 
 quarter, because his wish was to proceed onward 
 to the Indies, and to linger on the way he thought 
 would be unwise. 
 
 Thursday, Oct. 4th. Continued their course 
 
20 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 W. Sailed day and night, sixty-three leagues, and 
 reckoned to the crew forty-six. There came to 
 the ship above forty pardelas in a flock, with two 
 pelicans ; a boy on board the caravel hit one of 
 them with a stone. A rabihorcado came to the 
 ship, and a white bird like a gull. 
 
 Friday, October 5th. Continued their course 
 and sailed eleven miles an hour; day and night ; 
 fifty-seven leagues, the wind abating in the night, 
 reckoned to the crew forty- five. Fine weather 
 and the sea smooth. ' Many thanks to GodS 
 says the Admiral. The air soft and temperate ; 
 no weeds; many pardelas were seen, and swal- 
 low-fishes in great numbers came on board. 
 
 Saturday, Oct. 6th. Continued their course 
 W. and sailed forty leagues day and night ; reck- 
 oned to the crew thirty-three. This night Mar- 
 tin Alonzo gave it as his opinion that they had 
 belter steer from W. to SW. The Admiral 
 thought from this that Martin Alonzo did not 
 wish to proceed onward to Cipango ;* but he 
 
 *Zipangri or Japan, the name given to this island by 
 Marco Polo, a Venetian, who travelled into the east during 
 the thirteenth century. The most extravagant accounts of 
 the riches of this country were given by the writers of that 
 age, and its situation being placed by the geographers of 
 the time, at the eastern extremity of India, Columbus, 
 who expected by sailing west, to arrive there, naturally 
 imagined that Cipango was the part of that country near- 
 est to the west of Europe. 
 
 Martin Behaim or Behem, a German, who afterwards 
 entered into the service of the King of Portugal, construct- 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 
 
 29 
 
 considered it best to keep on his course, as he 
 should probably reach the land sooner in that di- 
 rection, preferring to visit the continent first, and 
 then the islands. 
 
 Sunday, Oct. 7th. Continued their course W. 
 and sailed twelve miles an hour, for two hours, 
 then eight miles an hour. Sailed till an hour 
 after sunrise, twenty-three leagues; reckoned to 
 the crew eighteen. At sunrise the caravel Nina, 
 who kept ahead on account of her swiftness in 
 sailing, while all the vessels were striving to out- 
 sail one another, and gain the reward promised 
 by the King and Queen by first discovering land 
 — hoisted a flag at her mast head, and fired a lom- 
 barda* as a signal that she had discovered land, 
 for the Admiral had given orders to that effect. 
 He had also ordered that the ships should keep 
 in close company at sunrise and sunset, as the air 
 was more favorable at those times for seeinof at 
 
 *» 
 
 ed at Nuremberg in 1492, a terrestrial globe, of which a 
 representation of that part comprising the Atlantic ocean 
 may be seen in Cladera's Investigaciones Historicas. 
 Southwest of the Azores is marked down the island of An- 
 tilia. Southwest of the Cape Verd islands, near the equa- 
 tor, the island of St. Brandon. Directly West from the 
 Canaries, near the continent of India, is drawn a very 
 large island with these notices, ' Cipangu.' ' En esta isla 
 crecen las Especias ; Hay Syrenas en el mar.'' l Se adoran 
 los Idohs" &.c. : &c. A vast number of isles large and 
 small are scattered to the North, South, and West of this 
 spot. 
 
 *A sort of cannon, first brought from Lombardy. 
 
30 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 a distance. Towards evening seeing nothing of 
 the land which the Nina had made signals for, 
 and observing large flocks of birds coming from 
 the N. and making for the SW. whereby it was 
 rendered probable that they were either going 
 to land to pass the night, or abandoning the coun- 
 tries of the North, on account of the approaching 
 winter, he determined to alter his course, know- 
 ing also that the Portuguese had discovered most 
 of the islands they possessed by attending to the 
 flight of birds. The Admiral accordingly shifted 
 his course from W. to WSW. with a resolution 
 to continue two days in that direction.- This was 
 done about an hour after sunset. Sailed in the 
 night nearly five leagues, and twenty-three in the 
 day. In all twenty-eight. 
 
 Monday, Oct. 8th. Steered WSW. and sailed 
 day and night eleven or twelve leagues ; at times 
 during the night, fifteen miles an hour, if the ac- 
 count can be depended upon. Found the sea 
 like the river at Seville, ' thanks to GW,' says the 
 Admiral. The air soft as that of Seville in 
 April, and so fragrant that it was delicious to 
 breath it. The weeds appeared very fresh. 
 Many land birds, one of which they took, flying 
 towards the SW. also grajaos, ducks, and a peli- 
 can were seen. 
 
 Tuesday, Oct. 9th. Sailed SW. five leagues, 
 when the wind changed, and they stood W. by 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 31 
 
 N. four leagues. Sailed in the whole, day and 
 night, twenty leagues and a half; reckoned to 
 the crew seventeen. All night heard birds 
 passing. 
 
 Wednesday, Oct. 10th. Steered WSW. and 
 sailed at times ten miles an hour, at others 
 twelve, and at others, seven; day and night 
 made fifty-nine leagues progress; reckoned to the 
 crew but forty-four. Here the men lost all pa- 
 tience, and complained of the length of the voy- 
 age, but the Admiral encouraged them in the 
 best manner he could, representing the profits 
 they were about to acquire, and adding that it 
 was to no purpose to complain, having come so 
 far, they had nothing to do but continue on to 
 the Indies, till with the help of our Lord, they 
 should arrive there.* 
 
 * This period is near the date of the occurrence, 
 which, on the authority of Oviedo, has been related in 
 most of the modern accounts of the discovery — namely 
 that Columbus found himself so embarrassed and pressed 
 by the mutiny of his crew, who were terrified at the length 
 of the voyage, that he was obliged to enter into an agree- 
 ment with them, that in case land should not be discovered 
 within three days, he would abandon the enterprise, and 
 return to Spain. Not the slightest hint of such a circum- 
 stance is to be found in this jourual, nor is there any im- 
 aginable reason for the suppression of the fact by Colum- 
 bus, had it really occurred. Las Casas certainly would 
 not have omitted so important an item in making his ab- 
 stract, and this was evidently drawn up from the diary of 
 Columbus, written from day to day, and not from a narra- 
 tive executed after his return to Spain, in which an omis- 
 
32 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 Thursday, Oct. 11th. Steered WSW. ; and 
 encountered a heavier sea than they had met 
 with before in the whole voyage. Saw parde- 
 las and a green rush near the vessel. The crew 
 of the Pinta saw a cane and a log ; they also 
 picked up a stick which appeared to have been 
 carved with an iron tool, a piece of cane, a plant 
 which grows on land, and a board. The crew 
 of the Nina saw other signs of land, and a stalk 
 loaded with roseberries. These signs encourag- 
 ed them, and they all grew cheerful. Sailed 
 this day till sunset, twenty-seven leagues. 
 
 After sunset steered their original course W. 
 and sailed twelve miles an hour till two hours 
 after midnight, going ninety miles, which are 
 twenty-two leagues and a half; and as the Pinta 
 was the swiftest sailer, and kept ahead of the 
 Admiral, she discovered land and made the sig- 
 nals which had been ordered. The land was 
 first seen by a sailor called Rodrigo de Triana, 
 although the Admiral at ten o'clock that evening 
 standing on the quarter-deck saw a light, but so 
 small a body that he could not affirm it to be 
 
 sion of this sort might be more easily accounted for. Nei- 
 ther Herrera nor Don Fernando who give very minute re- 
 lations of the occurrences of the voyage, make any mention 
 of it. Munoz adverts to the circumstance, but appears 
 evidently inclined to disbelieve it. Robertson has admitted 
 the account into his History, but it seems, upon the whole, 
 not to be entitled to credit. 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 33 
 
 land ; calling to Pero Gutierrez, groom of the 
 King's wardrobe, he told him he saw a light, and 
 bid him look that way, which he did and saw it; 
 he did the same to Rodrigo Sanchez of Segovia, 
 whom the King and Queen had sent with the 
 squadron as comptroller, but he was unable to 
 see it from his situation. The Admiral again 
 perceived it once or twice, appearing like the 
 light of a wax candle moving up and down, which 
 some thought an indication of land. But the 
 Admiral held it for certain that land was near; 
 for which reason, after they had said the Salve 
 which the seamen are accustomed to repeat and 
 chant after their fashion, the Admiral directed 
 them to keep a strict watch upon the forecastle 
 and look out diligently for land, and to him who 
 should first discover it he promised a silken 
 jacket, besides the reward which the King and 
 Queen had offered, which was an annuity of ten 
 thousand maravedis. At two o'clock in the 
 morning, the land Was discovered, at two leagues 
 distance ; they took in sail and remained under 
 the square-sail lying to till day, which was Friday, 
 when they found themselves near a small island, 
 one of the Lucayos, called in the indian language 
 
 * The reward for the discovery was adjudged by the 
 King and Queen to be justly due to Columbus, as he was 
 the first who saw the light. The annuity of 10,000 mara- 
 vedis was therefore punctually paid him through the rest 
 •of his life . 
 
34 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 Guanahani.* Presently they descried people, 
 naked, and the Admiral landed in the boat, which 
 was armed, along with Martin Alonzo Pinzon, 
 and Vincent Yanez his brother, captain of the 
 Nina. The Admiral bore the royal standard, 
 and the two captains each a banner of the Green 
 Cross, which all the ships had carried; this con- 
 tained the initials of the names of the King and 
 Queen each side of the cross, and a crown over 
 each letter. Arrived on shore, they saw trees 
 very green, many streams of Avater, and diverse 
 sorts of fruitss. The Admiral called upon the 
 
 * The island first discovered has been hitherto generally 
 supposed to be that now called St. Salvador, or Cat Island, 
 between 24 and 2d degrees north latitude. But upon an 
 examination of the journal of Columbus, it will appear that 
 his general course from the discovery of the first land, 
 was West till he arrived at the Island of Cuba. Had this 
 route been taken from the Island of St. Salvador, the in- 
 numerable reefs and keys upon the Great Bahama Bank 
 would have obstructed his way. Nor would the course 
 which he appears to have steered, have conducted him to 
 the port of Nipe in Cuba, the part of the island first reach- 
 ed by him, had that course commenced at St. Salvador. 
 Add to this, that his description of the island does not suit 
 that place, nor, as far as can be made out with any accu- 
 racy, do the bearings and distances of the other islands from 
 the one first visited, agree with the neighborhood of the sup- 
 posed spot of the discovery. 
 
 It seems probable that the island in question is the one 
 now called Grand Turk, or Turk's Island: this opinion is 
 sustained by the description of Columbus, stating it to be flat, 
 without any lofty eminence, surrounded by a reef of rocks, 
 and with a lake in the centre, all which circumstances, es- 
 pecally the last, point out this place. The course after- 
 wards pursued by the ships on leaving it, agrees also with 
 the direction in which it lies from the others. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 35 
 
 two Captains, and the rest of the crew who land- 
 ed, as also to Rodrigo de Escovedo notary of 
 the fleet, and Rodrigo Sanchez, of Segovia, to 
 bear witness that he before all others took pos- 
 session (as in fact he did) of that island lor the 
 King and Queen his sovereigns, making the re- 
 quisite declarations, which are more at large set 
 down here in writing. Numbers of the people 
 of the island straightway collected together. 
 Here follow the precise words of the Admi- 
 ral. 4 As I saw that they were very friend- 
 ly to us, and perceived that they could be much 
 more easily converted to our holy faith by gen- 
 tle means than by force, I presented them 
 with some red caps, and strings of beads to wear 
 upon the neck, and many other trifles of small 
 value, wherewith they were much delighted, and 
 became wonderfully attached to us. Afterwards 
 they came swimming to the boats, bringing par- 
 rots, balls of cotton thread, javelins and many 
 other things which they exchanged for articles 
 we gave them, such as glass beads, and hawk's 
 bells ; which trade was carried on with the ut- 
 most good will. But they seemed on the whole 
 to me, to be a very poor people. They all go 
 completely naked, even the women, though I 
 saw but one girl. All whom I saw, were young, 
 
 Munoz, in his History of the New World, gives it as 
 his opinion that the land first discovered, was that now 
 called Wat ling's inland, but does not subjoin bis reasons 
 
36 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 not above thirty years of age, well made, with 
 fine shapes and faces ; their hair short, and 
 coarse like that of a horse's tail, combed toward 
 the forehead, except a small portion which they 
 suffer to hang down behind, and never cut. Some 
 paint themselves with black, which makes them 
 appear like those of the Canaries, neither black 
 nor white; others with white, others with red, 
 and others with such colors as they can find. 
 Some paint the face, and some the whole body; 
 others only the eyes, and others the nose. 
 Weapons they have none, nor are acquainted 
 with them, for I showed them swords whi-ch 
 they grasped by the blades, and cut themselves 
 through ignorance. They have no iron, their 
 jaVelins being without it, and nothing more than 
 sticks, though some have fish-bones or other 
 things at the ends. They are all of a good size 
 and stature, and handsomely formed. I saw 
 some with scars of wounds upon their bodies, and 
 demanded by signs the cause of them ; they an- 
 swered me in the same way, that there came peo- 
 ple from the other islands in the neighborhood 
 who endeavored to make prisoners of them, and 
 they defended themselves. I thought then, and 
 still believe, that these were from the continent. 
 It appears to me, that the people are ingenious, 
 and would be good servants ; and I am of opinion 
 that they would very readily become Christians, 
 as they appear to have no religion. They very 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 37 
 
 quickly learn such words as are spoken to them. 
 If it please our Lord, I intend at my return to 
 carry home six of them to your Highnesses, that 
 they may learn our language. I saw no beasts 
 in the island, nor any sort of animals except par- 
 rots. These are the words of the Admiral.* 
 
 Saturday, Oct. 13th. ' At day-break great 
 multitudes of men came to the shore, all young 
 and of fine shapes, very handsome ; their hair not 
 curled but straight and coarse like horse-hair, 
 and all with foreheads and heads much broader 
 than any people I had hitherto seen ; their eyes 
 were large and very beautiful ; they Avere not 
 black, but the colour of the inhabitants of the 
 Canaries, which is a very natural circumstance, 
 they being in the same latitude with the island 
 of Ferro in the Canaries. They were straight- 
 limbed without exception, and not with prominent 
 bellies but handsomely shaped. They came to 
 the ship in canoes, made of a single trunk of a 
 tree, wrought in a wonderful manner considering 
 the country ; some of them large enough to con- 
 tain forty or forty-five men, others of different 
 sizes down to those fitted to hold but a single 
 person. They rowed with an oar like a baker's 
 peel, and wonderfully swift. If they happen to 
 upset, they all jump into the sea, and swim till 
 they have righted their canoe and emptied it 
 
 * The narration is continued in Columbes's own words, 
 to Oct. 25th. 
 
38 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 with the calabashes they carry with them. They 
 came loaded with balls of cotton, parrots, javelins, 
 and other things too numerous to mention ; these 
 they exchanged for whatever we chose to give 
 them. I was very attentive to them, and strove 
 to learn if they had any gold. Seeing some of 
 them with little bits of this metal hanging at their 
 noses, 1 gathered from them by signs that by 
 going southward or steering round the island in 
 that direction, there would be found a king who 
 possessed large vessels of gold, and in great quan- 
 tities. 1 endeavored to procure them to lead the 
 way thither, but found they were unacquainted 
 with the route. I determined to stay here till 
 the evening of the next day, and then sail for the 
 SW. for according to what I could learn from 
 them, there was land at the S. as well as at the 
 SW. and NW. and those from the NW. came 
 many times and fought with them and proceeded 
 on to the SW. in search of gold and precious 
 stones. This is a large and level island, with 
 trees extremely flourishing, and streams of water; 
 there is a large lake in the middle of the island, 
 but no mountains : the whole is completely cover- 
 ed with verdure and delightful to behold. The 
 natives are an inoffensive people, and so desirous 
 to possess any thing they saw with us, that they 
 kept swimming off to the ships with whatever 
 they could find, and readily bartered for any ar- 
 ticle we saw fit to give them in return, even such 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 39 
 
 as broken platters and fragments of glass. I saw 
 in this manner sixteen balls of cotton thread 
 which weighed above twenty-five pounds, given 
 for three Portuguese ceutis* This traffic 1 for- 
 bade, and suffered no one to take their cotton 
 from them, unless 1 should order it to be procured 
 for your Highnesses, if proper quantities could 
 be met with. It grows in this island, but from 
 my short stay here I could not satisfy myself 
 fully concerning it ; the gold, also, which they 
 wear in their noses, is found here, but not to lose 
 time, I am determined to proceed onward and as- 
 certain whether I can reach Cipango. At night 
 they all went on shore with their canoes. 
 
 Sunday, Oct. 14th. In the morning, I ordered 
 the boats to be got ready, and coasted along the 
 island toward the NNE. to examine that part of 
 it, we having landed first at the eastern part. 
 Presently we discovered two or three villages, 
 and the people all came down to the shore, call- 
 ing out to us, and giving thanks to God. Some 
 brought us water, and others victuals : others see- 
 ing that I was not disposed to land, plunged into 
 the sea and swam out to us, and we perceived 
 that they interrogated us if we had come from 
 heaven. An old man came on board my boat ; 
 the others, both men and women cried with loud 
 
 * A coin worth less than a mill 
 
40 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 voices — ' Come and see the men who have come from 
 heaven. Bring them victuals and drink." 1 There 
 came many of both sexes, every one bringing 
 something, giving thanks to God, prostrating 
 themselves on the earth, and lifting up their 
 hands to heaven. They called out to us loudly 
 to come to land, but I was apprehensive on ac- 
 count of a reef of rocks, which surrounds the 
 whole island, although within there is depth of 
 water and room sufficient for all the ships of 
 Christendom, with a very narrow entrance. 
 There are some shoals withinside, but the water 
 is as smooth as a pond. It was to view these 
 parts that I set out in the morning, for I wished 
 to give a complete relation to your Highnesses, 
 as also to find where a fort might be built. I dis- 
 covered a tongue of land which appeared like an 
 island though it was not, but might be cut through 
 and made so in two days ; it contained six houses. 
 I do not however see the necessity of fortifying 
 the place, as the people here are simple in war- 
 like matters, as your Highnesses will see by those 
 seven which I have ordered to be taken and car- 
 ried to Spain in order to learn our language and 
 return, unless your Highnesses should choose to 
 have them all transported to Castile, or held 
 captive in the island. I could conquer the whole 
 of them with fifty men, and govern thern as I 
 pleased. Near the islet I have mentioned were 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 41 
 
 groves of trees, the most beautiful I have ever 
 seen, with their foliage as verdant as we see in 
 Castile in April and May. There were also many 
 streams. After having taken a survey of these 
 parts, I returned to the ship, and setting sail, dis- 
 covered such a number of islands that I knew 
 not which first to visit ; the natives whom I had 
 taken on board, informed me by signs that there 
 were so many of them that they could not be 
 numbered ; they repeated the names of more 
 than a hundred. I determined to steer for the 
 largest, which is about five leagues from San Sal- 
 vador; the others were some at a greater, and 
 some at a less distance from that island. They 
 are all very level, without mountains, exceeding- 
 ly fertile and populous, the inhabitants living at 
 war with one another, although a simple race, 
 and with delicate bodies. 
 
 'Monday, Oct. 15th. Stood off and on during 
 the night, determining not to come to anchor till 
 morning, fearing to meet with shoals ; continued 
 our course in the morning; and as the island was 
 found. to be six or seven leagues distant, and the 
 tide was against us, it was noon when we arrived 
 there.* I found that part of it towards San Sal- 
 vador extending from N. to S. five leagues, and 
 the other side which we coasted along, ran from 
 
 * Probably Grand Cayr.o 
 
42 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 E. to W. more than ten leagues. From this island 
 espying a still larger one to the W. I set sail in 
 that direction and kept on till night without reach- 
 ing the western extremity of the island, where I 
 gave it the name of Sa?ita Maria de la Concep- 
 tion* About sunset we anchored near the cape 
 which terminates the island towards the W. to en- 
 quire for gold, for the natives we had taken from 
 San Salvador told me that the people here wore 
 golden bracelets upon their arms and legs. I 
 believed pretty confidently that they had invent- 
 ed this story in order to find means to escape from 
 us, still I determined to pass none of these islands 
 without taking possession, because being once 
 taken, it would answer for all times. We an- 
 chored and remained till Tuesday, when at day- 
 break I went ashore with the boats armed. The 
 people we found naked like those of San Salva- 
 dor, and of the same disposition. They suffered 
 us to traverse the island, and gave us what we 
 asked of them. As the wind blew S.E. upon 
 the shore where the vessels lay, 1 determined 
 not to remain, and set out for the ship. A large 
 canoe being near the caravel Nina, one of the San 
 Salvador natives leaped overboard and swam to 
 her ; (another had made his escape the night 
 before,) the canoe being reached by the fugitive, 
 the natives rowed for the land too swiftly to be 
 
 * Cayco del Norte. 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 43 
 
 overtaken; having landed, some of my men 
 went ashore in pursuit of them, when they 
 abandoned the canoe and fled with precipi- 
 tation ; the canoe which they had left was 
 brought on board the Nina, where from another 
 quarter had arrived a small canoe with a single 
 man, who came to barter some cotton ; some of 
 the sailors finding him unwilling to go on board 
 the vessel, jumped into the sea and took him. I 
 was upon the quarter deck of my ship, and see- 
 ing the whole, sent for him, and gave him a red 
 cap, put some glass beads upon his arms, and two 
 hawk's bells upon his ears. 1 then ordered his 
 canoe to be returned to him, and despatched him 
 back to land. 
 
 I now set sail for the other large island to the 
 W. and gave orders for the canoe which the 
 Nina had in tow to be set adrift. I had refused 
 to receive the cotton from the native whom I 
 sent on shore, although he pressed it upon me. I 
 looked out after him and saw upon his landing 
 that the others all ran to meet him with much 
 wonder. It appeared to them that we were honest 
 people, and that the man who had escaped from 
 us had done us some injury, for which w r e kept 
 him in custody. It was in order to favor this notion 
 that I ordered the canoe to be set adrift, and gave 
 the man the presents abovementioned, that when 
 your Highnesses send another expedition to these 
 parts it may meet with-a friendly reception. All 
 
44 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 I gave the man was not worth four nlaravedis. 
 We set sail about ten o'clock, with the wind S. 
 E. and stood southerly for the island I mentioned 
 above, which is a very large one, and where ac- 
 cording to the account of the natives on board, 
 there is much gold, the inhabitants wearing it in 
 bracelets upon their arms, legs, and necks, as well 
 as in their ears and at their noses. This island 
 is nine leagues distant from Santa Maria in a 
 westerly direction. This part of it extends from 
 N.W, to S.E. and appears to be twenty-eight 
 leagues long, very level, without any mountains, 
 like San Salvador and Santa Maria, having a good 
 shore and not rocky, except a feAv ledges under 
 water, which renders it necessary to anchor at 
 some distance, although the water is very clear, 
 and the bottom may be seen. Two shots of a 
 lombarda from the land, the water is so deep that 
 it cannot be sounded ; this is the case in all these 
 islands. They are all extremely verdant and fer- 
 tile, with the air agreeable, and probably contain 
 many things of which I am ignorant, not inclining 
 to stay here, but visit other islands in search of 
 gold. And considering the indications of it among 
 the natives who wear it upon their arms and legs, 
 and having ascertained that it is the true metal 
 by showing them some pieces of it which I have 
 with me, I cannot fail, with the help of our Lord 
 to find the place which produces it. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 45 
 
 Being at sea, about midway between Santa 
 Maria and the large island, which I name Fer- 
 nandina,* Ave met a man in a canoe going from 
 Santa Maria to Fernandina ; he had with him a 
 piece of the bread which the natives make, as 
 big as one's fist, a calabash of water, a quantity 
 of reddish earth, pulverised and afterwards 
 kneaded up, and some dried leaves which are in 
 high value among them, for a quantity of it was 
 brought to me at San Salvador ; he had besides 
 a little basket made after their fashion, contain- 
 ing some glass beads, and two blancas t by all 
 which I knew he had come from San Salvador, 
 and had passed from thence to Santa Maria. He 
 came to the ship and I caused him to be taken 
 on board, as he requested it ; we took his canoe 
 also on board and took care of his things. I or- 
 dered him to be presented with bread and honey, 
 and drink, and shall carry him to Fernandina and 
 give him his property, that he may carry a good 
 report of us, so that if it please our Lord when 
 your Highnesses shall send again to these regions, 
 those who arrive here may receive honor, and 
 procure what the natives may be found to pos- 
 sess. 
 
 Tuesday, Oct. 16th. Set sail from Santa 
 Maria about noon, for Fernandina, which ap- 
 
 + Now called Inagua Chica. J Copper coins of Spain 
 
46 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 pearecl very large in the W ; sailed all the day 
 with calms, and could not arrive soon enough to 
 view the shore and select a good anchorage, 
 for great care must he taken in this particular, 
 lest the anchors be lost. Beat up and down all 
 night, and in the morning arrived at a village 
 and anchored. This was the place to which the 
 man whom we had picked up at sea, had gone, 
 when we set him on shore. He had given such 
 a favorable account of us, that all night there 
 were great numbers of canoes coming oif to us, 
 who brought us water and other things. I or- 
 dered each man to be presented with something, 
 as strings of ten or a dozen glass beads, plates 
 of brass, such as cost in Castile a maravedi 
 apiece, and thongs of leather, all which they es- 
 timated highly ; those which came on board I 
 directed should be fed with molasses. At three 
 o'clock, I sent the boat on shore for water; the 
 natives with great good will directed the men 
 where to find it, assisted them in carrying (he 
 casks full of it to the boat, and seemed to take 
 great pleasure in serving us. This is a very 
 large island, and I have resolved to coast it 
 about, for as 1 understand, in, or near the island, 
 there is a mine of gold. It is eight leagues W. 
 of Santa Maria, and the cape where we have 
 arrived, and all this coast extends from N. N. W. 
 to S. S. E. I have seen twenty leagues of if, but 
 
GF COLUMBUS. 
 
 47 
 
 not the end. Now, writing this, I set sail with 
 a southerly wind to circumnavigate the island, 
 and search till we can find Samaot, which is the 
 island or city where the gold is, according to the 
 account of those who come on board the ship, to 
 which the relation of those of San Salvador 
 and Santa Maria corresponds. These people 
 are similar to those of the islands just mention- 
 ed, and have the same language and customs j 
 with the exception that they appear somewhat 
 more civilised, showing themselves more subtle 
 in their dealings with us, bartering their cotton 
 and other articles with more profit than the 
 others had experienced. Here we saw cotton 
 cloth, and perceived the people more decent, the 
 women wearing a slight covering of cotton over 
 the nudities. The island is verdant, level and 
 fertile to a high degree ; and I doubt not that 
 grain is sowed and reaped the whole year round, 
 as well as all other productions of the place. I 
 saw many trees, very dissimilar to those of our 
 country, and many of them had branches of dif- 
 ferent sorts upon the same trunk ; and such 
 a diversity was among them that it was the 
 greatest wonder in the world to behold. Thus, 
 for instance, one brancli of a tree bore leaves 
 like those of a cane, another branch of the same 
 tree, leaves similar to those of the lentisk. In 
 this manner a single tree bears five or six differ- 
 
48 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 ent kinds. Nor is this done by grafting, for that 
 is a work of art, whereas these trees grow 
 wild, and the natives take no care about them. 
 They have no religion, and I believe that they 
 would very readily become Christians, as they 
 have a good understanding. Here the fish are 
 so dissimilar to ours that it is wonderful. Some 
 are shaped like dories, of the finest hues in the 
 world, blue, yellow, red, and every other colour, 
 some variegated with a thousand different tints, 
 so beautiful that no one on beholding them 
 could fail to express the highest wonder and ad- 
 miration. Here are also whales. Beasts, we 
 saw none, nor any creatures on land save par- 
 rots and lizards, but a boy told me he saw a 
 large snake. No sheep nor goats were seen, 
 and although our stay here has been short, it 
 being now noon, yet were there any, I could 
 hardly have failed of seeing them. The circum- 
 navigation of the island I shall describe after- 
 ward. 
 
 Wednesday Oct. 17th. At noon set sail from 
 the village where we had anchored and watered. 
 Kept on our course to sail round the island ; the 
 wind S. W. and S. My intention was to follow 
 the coast of the island to the S. E. as it runs in 
 that direction, being informed by the indians I 
 have on board, besides another whom I met with 
 here, that in such a course I should meet with 
 
OF COLUMBTS. 49 
 
 the island which they call Samoet, where gold 
 is found. I was further informed by Martin 
 Alonzo Pinzon captain of the Pinta, on board of 
 which I had sent three of the indians, that he 
 had been assured by one of them, I might sail 
 round the island much sooner by the N. VV. 
 Seeing that the wind would not enable me to 
 proceed in the direction I first contemplated, and 
 finding it favorable for the one thus recommend- 
 ed me, I steered to the N. W. and arriving at the 
 extremity of the island at two leagues distance, I 
 discovered a remarkable haven with two en- 
 trances, formed by an island at its mouth, both 
 very narrow, the inside capacious enough for a 
 hundred ships, were there sufficient depth of 
 water. I thought it advisable to examine it, and 
 therefore anchored outside, and went with the 
 boats to sound it, but found the water shallow. As 
 I had first imagined it to be the mouth of a river, 
 I had directed the casks to be carried ashore 
 for water, which being done we discovered eight 
 or ten men who straightway came up to us, and 
 directed us to a village in the neighborhood, I 
 accordingly dispatched the crews thither in 
 quest of water, part of them armed, and the 
 rest with the casks, and the place being at some 
 distance it detained me here a couple of hours. 
 In the mean time I strayed about among the 
 groves, which present the most enchanting sight 
 
50 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 ever witnessed, a degree of verdure prevailing 
 like that of May in Andalusia, the trees as differ- 
 ent from those of our country as day is from 
 night, and the same may be said of the fruit, the 
 weeds, the stones and every thing else. A few 
 of the trees however, seemed to be of a species 
 similar to some that are to be found in Castile, 
 though still with a great dissimilarity, but the 
 others so unlike, that it is impossible to find any 
 resemblance in them to those of our land. 
 The natives we found like those already de- 
 scribed, as to personal appearance and manners, 
 and naked like the rest. Whatever they pos- 
 sessed, they bartered for what we chose to give 
 them. I saw a boy of the crew purchasing jave- 
 lins of them with bits of platters and broken 
 o-lass. Those who went for water informed me 
 that they had entered their houses and found 
 them very clean and neat, with beds and cover- 
 ings of cotton nets. Their houses are all built 
 in the shape of tents, with very high chimneys. 
 None of the villages which I saw, contained more 
 than twelve or fifteen of them. Here it was re- 
 marked that the married women wore cotton 
 breeches, but the younger females were without 
 them, except a few who were as old as eighteen 
 years. Dogs were seen of a large and small size, 
 and one of the men had hanofinof at his nose a 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 51 
 
 piece of gold half as big as a castcllano* with let- 
 ters upon it. I endeavored to purchase it of them 
 in order to ascertain what sort of money it 
 wast but they refused to part with it. Having 
 taken our water on board, I set sail and pro- 
 ceeded N. W. till I had surveyed the coast to 
 the point where it begins to run from E. to W. 
 Here the indians gave me to understand that 
 this island was smaller than that of Samoet, and 
 that I had better return in order to reach it the 
 sooner. The wind died away, and then sprang 
 up from the W. N. W. which Avas contrary to 
 the course we were pursuing, we therefore hove 
 about and steered various courses through the 
 night from E. to S. standing off from the land, 
 the weather being cloudy and thick. It rained 
 violently from midnight till near day, and the 
 sky still remains clouded ; we remain off the 
 the southeast part of the island, where I expect 
 to anchor and stay till the weather grows clear, 
 when I shall steer for the other islands 1 am in 
 quest of. Every day that I have been in these 
 Inches it has rained more or less. 1 assure your 
 Highnesses that these lands are the most 
 fertile, temperate, level and beautiful countries 
 iu the world. 
 
 * Ancient .Spanish coin. 
 
 | In this, it appears, Columbus was mistaken, nothing 
 like a coin was ever found amoiifr the natives. 
 
52 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 Thursday, Oct. 18th. As soon as the sky 
 grew clear, we set sail and went as far round the 
 island as we could, anchoring when we found it 
 inconvenient to proceed, I did not however land. 
 In the morning set sail again. 
 
 Friday, Oct. 19th. In the morning we got 
 under weigh, and I ordered the Pinta to steer 
 E. and S.E. and the Nina, S.S.E. proceeding my- 
 self to the SE. the other vessels I directed to 
 keep on the courses prescribed till noon, and then 
 to rejoin me. Within three hours we descried 
 an island to the E. toward which we directed 
 our course, and arrived all three, before noon, at 
 the northern extremity, where a rocky islet and 
 reef extend toward the North, with another be- 
 tween them and the main island. The Indians 
 on board the ships called this island Saomctc. I 
 named it Isabela.* It lies westerly from the is- 
 land of Fernandina, and the coast extends from 
 the islet twelve leagues, west, to a cape which 
 I called Cabo Hennosorf it being a beautiful, 
 round headland with a bold shore free from 
 shoals. Part of the shore is rocky, but the rest 
 of it, like most of the coast here, a sandy beach. 
 Here we anchored till morning. This island is 
 
 * This appears to be the island now called Lingua 
 grande. 
 
 | Fair Cape. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 53 
 
 the most beautiful that 1 have yet seen, the trees 
 in great number, flourishing and lofty ; the land 
 is higher than the other islands, and exhibits an 
 eminence, which though it cannot be called a 
 mountain, yet adds a beauty to its appearance, 
 and gives an indication of streams of water in the 
 interior. From this part toward the northeast 
 is an extensive bay, with many large and thick 
 groves. I wished to anchor there, and land, that 
 I might examine those delightful regions, but 
 found the coast shoal, without a possibility of 
 casting anchor except at a distance from the 
 shore. The wind being favorable, I came to 
 the Cape, which I named Hermoso, where I an- 
 chored to-day. This is so beautiful a place, as 
 well as the neighboring regions, that I know not in 
 which course to proceed first; my eyes are never 
 tired with viewing such delightful verdure, and 
 of a species so new and dissimilar to that of our 
 country, and I have no doubt there are trees and 
 herbs here which would be of great value in 
 Spain, as dyeing materials, medicine, spicery, &c. 
 but I am mortified that I have no acquaintance 
 with them. Upon our arrival here we experi- 
 enced the most sweet and delightful odour from 
 the flowers or trees of the island. To-morrow 
 morning before we depart, I intend to land and 
 see what can be found in the neighborhood. 
 Here is no village, but farther within the island 
 
54 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 is one, where our Indians inform us we shall find 
 the king, and that he has much gold. I shall 
 penetrate so far as to reach the village and see 
 or speak with the king, who, as they tell us, gov- 
 erns all these islands, and goes dressed, with a 
 great deal of gold about him. I do not, however, 
 give much credit to these accounts, as I under- 
 stand the natives but imperfectly, and perceive 
 them to be so poor that a trifling quantity of 
 gold appears to them a great amount. This is- 
 land appears to me to be a separate one from 
 that of Saometo, and I even think there may be 
 others between them. I am not solicitous to ex- 
 amine particularly every thing here, which in- 
 deed could not be done in fifty years, because my 
 desire is to make all possible discoveries, and re- 
 turn to your Highnesses, if it please our Lord, in 
 April. But in truth, should I meet with gold or 
 spices in great quantity, I shall remain till I col- 
 lect as much as possible, and for this purpose I 
 am proceeding solely in quest of them. 
 
 Saturday, Oct. 20th. At sunrise we weighed 
 anchor, and stood to the NE. and E. along the 
 south side of this island, which I named Isabela 
 and the cape where we anchored, Cabo de la La- 
 guna ; in this direction I expected from the ac- 
 count of our Indians, to find the capital, and king 
 of the island. I found the coast very shallow, 
 and offering every obstacle to our navigation, and 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 55 
 
 perceiving that our course this way must be 
 very circuitous, I determined to return to the 
 westward. The wind failed us, and we were un- 
 able to get near the shore before night ; and as 
 it is very dangerous anchoring here in the dark, 
 when it is impossible to discern among so many 
 shoals and reefs whether the ground be suita- 
 able, I stood off and on all night. The other 
 vessels came to anchor, having reached the 
 shore in season. As was customary among us, 
 they made signals to me to stand in and anchor, 
 but I determined to remain at sea. 
 
 Sunday, Oct. 21st. At 10 o'clock, we arrived 
 at a cape of the island, and anchored, the other 
 vessels in company. After having dispatched a 
 meal, I went ashore, and found no habitation save 
 a single house, and that without an occupant ; we 
 had no doubt that the people had fled in terror 
 at our approach, as the house was completely 
 furnished. 1 suffered nothing to be touched, and 
 went with my captains and some of the crew to 
 view the country. This island even exceeds the 
 others in beauty and fertility. Groves of lofty 
 and flourishing trees are abundant, as also large 
 lakes, surrounded and overhung by the foliage, 
 in a most enchanting manner. Every thing look- 
 ed as green as in April in Andalusia. The melo- 
 dy of the birds was so exquisite that one was 
 never willing to part from the spot, and the flocks 
 
56 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 of parrots obscured the heavens. The diversity 
 in the appearance of the feathered tribe from 
 those of our country, is extremely curious. A 
 thousand different sorts of trees, with their fruit 
 were to be met with, and of a wonderfully deli- 
 cious odour. It was a great affliction to me to be 
 ignorant of their natures, for I am very certain 
 they are all valuable ; specimens of them and of 
 the plants I have preserved. Going round one 
 of these lakes, I saw a snake, which we killed, 
 and 1 have kept the skin for your Highnesses ; 
 upon being discovered he took to the water, 
 whither we followed him, as it was not deep, and 
 dispatched him with our lances ; he was seven 
 spans in length ; I think there are many more 
 such aboitf here. I discovered also the aloe tree, 
 and am determined to take on board the ship 
 to-morrow, ten quintals of it, as I am told it is val- 
 uable. While we were in search of some good 
 water, we came upon a village of the natives 
 about half a league from the place where the 
 ships lay; the inhabitants on discovering us aban- 
 doned their houses, and took to flight, carrying 
 off their snoods to the mountain. I ordered that 
 nothing which they had left should be taken, not 
 even the value of a pin. Presently we saw sev- 
 eral of the natives advancing towards our party, 
 and one of them came up to us, to whom we gave 
 some hawk's bells and glass beads, with which 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 57 
 
 he was delighted. We asked him in return, for 
 water, and after I had gone on board the ship, 
 the natives came down to the shore with their 
 calabashes full, and showed great pleasure in pre- 
 senting us with it. I ordered more glass beads 
 to be given them, and they promised to return 
 the next day. It is my wish to fill all the water 
 casks of the ships at this place, which being exe- 
 cuted, I shall depart immediately, if the weather 
 serve, and sail round the island, till I succeed in 
 meeting with the king, in order to see if 1 can 
 acquire any of the gold, which I hear he pos- 
 sesses. Afterwards I shall set sail for another 
 very large island which 1 believe to be Cipango, 
 according to the indications I receive from the 
 indians on board. They call the Island Colba* 
 and say there are many large ships, and sailors 
 there. This other island they name Bosio, and 
 inform me that it is very large ; the others which 
 lie in our course, I shall examine on the passage, 
 and according as I find gold or spices in abund- 
 ance, I shall determine what to do; at all events I 
 am determined to proceed on to the continent, and 
 visit the city of Guismj\ where I shall deliver the 
 
 * Cuba. 
 
 | Guisay, or Qucnsmj, the city of Heaven, and residence 
 of the Great Khan, according to Marco Polo, and other 
 writers of the early ages, who give the most splendid ac- 
 counts of this great capital of the east. See Note T 
 
58 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 letters of your Highnesses to the Great Can, and 
 demand an answer, with which I shall return. 
 
 Monday, Oct. 22d. Through the night, and 
 to-day we remained waiting here to see if the 
 king, or any others would bring us gold or any 
 thing valuable. Many of the natives visited us, 
 resembling those of the other islands, naked 
 like them, and painted white, red, black and 
 other colors; they brought javelins and clews 
 of cotton to barter, which they exchanged with 
 the sailors for bits of glass, broken cups, and 
 fragments of earthen ware. Some of them wore 
 pieces of gold at their noses; they readily gave 
 them away for hawk's bells and glass beads; 
 the amount collected in this manner, however, 
 was very inconsiderable. Any small matter 
 they received from us, they held in high estima- 
 tion, believing us to have come from heaven. We 
 took in water for the ships from a lake in the 
 neighborhood of this cape, which I have named 
 Cabo del Isleo: in this lake Martin Alonzo Pinzon, 
 captain of the Pinta, killed a snake similar to 
 that of yesterday, seven spans long. 1 ordered 
 as much of the alee to be collected as could be 
 found. 
 
 Tuesday, Oct. 23d. It is now my determina- 
 tion to depart for the island of Cuba, which I 
 believe to be Cipango, from the accounts I have 
 received here, of the multitude and riches of the 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 59 
 
 people. I have abandoned the intention of stay- 
 ing here and sailing round the island in search of 
 the king, as it would be a waste of time, and I 
 perceive there are no gold mines to be found. 
 Moreover it would be necessary to steer many 
 courses in making the circuit, and we cannot ex- 
 pect the wind to be always favorable. And as 
 we are going to places where there is great com- 
 merce, I judge it expedient not to linger on the 
 way, but to proceed and survey the lands we 
 meet with, till we arrive at that most favorable 
 for our enterprise It is my opinion that we shall 
 find much profit there in spices ; but my want of 
 knowledge in these articles occasions me the most 
 excessive regrets, inasmuch as I see a thousand 
 sorts of trees, each with its own species of fruit, 
 and as flourishing at the present time, as the 
 fields in Spain, during the months of May and 
 June ; likewise a thousand kinds of herbs and 
 flowers, of all which I remain in ignorance as to 
 their properties, with the exception of the aloe, 
 which I have directed to-day to be taken on 
 board in large quantities for the use of your High- 
 nesses. I did not set sail to-day for want of wind, 
 a dead calm and heavy rain prevailing. Yester- 
 day it rained much without cold ; the days here 
 are hot, and the nights mild like May in Anda- 
 lusia. 
 
 Wednesday Oct. 24th. At midnight weighed 
 
60 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 anchor and set sail from Cabo del Isleo of the is- 
 land of Isabela, being in the North part, where I 
 had remained preparing to depart for the island 
 of Cuba, in which place the indians tell me I shall 
 find a great trade, with abundance of gold and 
 spices, and large ships, and merchants ; they di- 
 rect me to steer toward the WSW., which is the 
 course I am pursuing. If the accounts which the 
 natives of the islands and those on board the 
 ships, have communicated to me by signs (for 
 their language 1 do not understand) may be reli- 
 ed on, this must be the island of Cipango, of 
 which we have heard so many wonderful tilings; 
 according to my geographical knowledge it must 
 be somewhere in this neighborhood. We con- 
 tinued our course WSW. till day, when the wind 
 died away, while the rain which had been falling 
 most of the night continued, we remained thus 
 with little wind till the afternoon, when it began 
 to blow finely : we crowded all sail, and kept on 
 our course till dusk, when Cabo Verde, which is in 
 the southwesterly part of the island of Fernan- 
 dina, bore NW. seven leagues distant. The 
 wind continuing to blow fresh, and not knowing 
 the distance to the island of Cuba, I determined 
 not to run for it during the night, as these islands 
 have bold shores, no bottom being obtained at 
 more than two lombarda-shots from the land, 
 add to this that they are surrounded with rocks 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 61 
 
 and shoals in abundance, and the whole renders 
 it very hazardous to anchor, except during the 
 day. 1 therefore ordered all the sails to be taken 
 in except the foresail, and kept on under that ; 
 the wind increased, and we made much pro- 
 gress, the extent of which 1 could not ascer- 
 tain. It was very cloudy with rain, finally I or- 
 dered the foresail to be taken in."* 
 
 Thursday, Oct. 25th. Sailed after sunrise 
 WSVV. till 9 o'clock, a distance of five leagues, 
 then altered their course to W., and went at the 
 rate of eight miles an hour till one o'clock ; they 
 continued on till three in the afternoon, having 
 gone forty-four miles, when they discovered land, 
 which proved to be seven or eight islands,! ex- 
 tending from north to south, five leagues distant. 
 
 Friday, Oct. 26tb. They anchored south of 
 the islands, finding the water shallow five or six 
 leagues off the shore. The indians on board told 
 them that the island of Cuba was distant from 
 thence, a voyage of a day and a half in their ca- 
 noes, which are small things, made of a log, and 
 carrying no sail. Departed for Cuba, which from 
 the indians signifying to them the abundance of 
 
 * Here the words of Columbus cease for the pres- 
 ent, and the narrative continues in the language of the 
 abridger. 
 
 t In the southern and eastern part of the Great Baha- 
 ma bank. 
 
62 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 gold and pearls there, as well as the magnitude of 
 the island, they doubted not, was Cipango.* 
 
 Saturday, Oct. 27th. They weighed anchor 
 at sunrise, and left these islands, which they 
 named Las lslas de Arena\ on account of the 
 shoals which extend out from them half a dozen 
 leagues to the south. Sailed SSW., eight miles 
 an hour, till one o'clock, having gone forty miles ; 
 by night they had proceeded twenty-eight more 
 in the same direction ; before dark they discov- 
 ered land. They kept a diligent watch through 
 the night which proved veiy rainy. They sail- 
 ed on Saturday, by sunset, seventeen leagues to 
 the SSW. 
 
 Sunday, Oct. 28th. Continued on SSW., in 
 quest of the island of Cuba, keeping close to the 
 shore. They entered a fine river, free from 
 shallows and all other obstructions, which in fact 
 is the case with all the coast here, the shore 
 being very bold. The mouth of the river had a 
 depth of water of twelve fathoms, and a breadth 
 sufficient for ships to beat in. They anchored 
 within the river, and the Admiral states that the 
 
 * The belief that Cipango was a part of the newly dis- 
 covered country, continued for some time. In a letter 
 written by Columbus to the Pope, in 1502, describing his 
 voyage, he introduces the following remark. — " This is- 
 land is Tarsis, Cethia, Ophir, Ophaz and Cipango, we 
 have named it Espanola.' 
 
 f The Sandy Islands. 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 63 
 
 prospect here exceeded in beauty anything he 
 ever saw, the river being surrounded with trees 
 of the most beautiful and luxuriant foliage of a 
 singular appearance, and covered with flowers 
 and fruits of all sorts. Birds were here in abun- 
 dance singing most delightfully. Great numbers 
 of palm trees were noticed, different from those 
 of Guinea, and ours, wanting their particular 
 manner of bark ; they were of a moderate 
 height, and bore very large leaves, which the 
 natives use for coverings to their houses. The 
 land appeared quite level. The Admiral went 
 ashore in the boat, and found two dwellings, 
 which he supposed to be those of fishermen, and 
 that the owners had fled ; he found in one of them 
 a dog unable to bark. Both houses contained 
 nets of palm, lines, horn fish-hooks, harpoons of 
 bone, and other implements for fishing, as also 
 many fire-places, and each seemed to be adapted 
 to the reception of a large number of persons. 
 The Admiral gave orders that nothing should 
 be touched, which directions were adhered to. 
 The grass was as high as it is in Andalusia in 
 April and May, and they found purslain and 
 strawberry-blite in abundance. They returned 
 on board the boat and ascended the river some 
 distance, where the Admiral says it was exceed- 
 ingly pleasant to behold the delightful verdure 
 and foliage which presented itself, not to mention 
 
154 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 the birds Jn the neighborhood ; the whole offered 
 a scene of such enchantment that it was hardly 
 possible to part from it. He declares this to be 
 the most beautiful island ever seen, abounding in 
 good harbours, and deep rivers, with a shore 
 upon which it appears that the sea never breaks 
 high, as the grass grows down to the water's 
 edge, a thing which never happens where the 
 sea is rough. Indeed a high sea they had not as 
 yet experienced among these islands. This isle, 
 he says, is full of pleasant mountains, which are 
 lofty, although not of great extent, the rest of 
 the country is high, after the manner of Sicily, 
 abounding in streams, as they understood from 
 the indians of Guanahani, which were on board 
 the ships, who informed them by signs that it 
 contained ten large rivers, and was of such 
 a size that with their canoes they could not sail 
 round it in twenty days. When the ships were 
 sailing towards the island, some of the natives 
 put off from the shore in two canoes, and per- 
 ceiving the Spaniards entering into the boat 
 and rowing towards the mouth of the river to 
 sound for an anchorage, they took to flight. 
 The indians told them there were mines of 
 gold here and pearls, and the Admiral observ- 
 ed muscles and other indications of these articles 
 in the neighborhood. They further informed 
 him that there came large ships hither from the 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 65 
 
 Great Can, and that the main land was distant 
 ten days voyage. The Admiral named this, 
 river and port San Salvador* 
 
 Monday, Oct. 29th. They weighed anchor 
 and sailed from this port towards the west, in 
 quest of the city where it appeared to be signi- 
 fied to them by the indians, that they would 
 meet with the king. A point of the islandf ex- 
 tended towards the Northwest, six leagues from 
 the place of their departure, and another^ ten 
 leagues towards the east. A league further on, 
 they discovered a river with a narrow entrance, 
 which the Admiral named Rio de la Lwm.§ 
 They continued on till evening and descried 
 another river larger than those they had yet 
 seen, which also the indians signified to them in 
 the usual manner ; on the banks they saw many 
 collections of houses, the Admiral named it Rio 
 de Mares.\\ He dispatched two boats to land in 
 order to get some communication with the peo- 
 ple, in one of them he sent an indian of those on 
 board, as they appeared at last to be contented 
 with the company of the Spaniards, and they 
 
 * The Bay of Nipe in the eastern part of Cuba. 
 f Punta de Mulas. J Punta Cabana. 
 
 § Probably Puerto de Banes. 
 |j Puerto de las Nuevitas del Principe 
 8 
 
66 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 were enabled in some degree to understand 
 them ; the people on shore, men, women and 
 children all fled at their approach, abandoning 
 their dwellings and goods, which the Admiral 
 ordered should not receive the least injury. He 
 states the houses to have been the finest he had 
 yet seen, and thinks the nearer he approaches 
 toward the continent they will continue improv- 
 ing: they were of a large size, constructed in the 
 shape of a tent, and each collection of them 
 appeared like a camp, without any order of 
 streets, but scattered here and there ; the interi- 
 ors were found very clean and neat, well furnish- 
 ed and set in order ; they were all built of fine 
 palm branches. They found here many statues 
 in the shape of women, and numerous heads 
 something like masks, well executed; whether 
 these were used as ornaments, or objects of wor- 
 ship, did not appear. Here were small fowl 
 originally wild, but now tame about the houses, 
 as also curious collections of nets, hooks, and 
 other gear for fishing, but the Spaniards, as 
 they were ordered, touched nothing. The Ad- 
 miral was of opinion that the inhabitants of the 
 coast were all fishermen, and carried what they 
 took into the interior of the island, as it is a very 
 large one, and more beautiful than words can ex- 
 press. He says that he met with trees and fruits 
 here of a most delicious odour, and that there 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 67 
 
 are undoubtedly cows and other cattle in the is- 
 land, as he saw a skull, which appeared to be 
 that of a cow. All the night they were enter- 
 tained with the melody of the birds and crickets; 
 the air was mild and soft throughout the night, 
 neither hot nor cold. In the other islands he 
 states the heat to have been excessive, but here 
 it was temperate like May. The heat of the 
 other islands he ascribes to their being level, and 
 the wind, which blows there, being from the 
 East and consequently hot. The water of the 
 rivers was found to be salt at the mouths : it was 
 not known where the indians obtained their 
 water, which was met with fresh in their houses. 
 This river was broad enough for the ships to 
 manoeuvre in on their entry or departure, and 
 the land contained many marks to serve as di- 
 rections for steering. It was seven or eight 
 fathoms deep at the mouth, and five inside. The 
 sea about here, he says appears to be ever as 
 smooth as the river at Seville, and the water 
 very favorable for the pearl fishery. Here were 
 periwinkles of a large size, but tasteless, unlike 
 those of Spain. The river and port of San Sal- 
 vador, above mentioned, he describes as marked 
 by lofty and beautiful mountains, like the Pena 
 de los cnamorados, one of them containing on its 
 summit a protuberance in the form of a hand- 
 some mosque. The other river and harbor, 
 
68 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 where they now remain, has upon the SE. two 
 mountains of a round shape, and at the WNW. 
 a fine level cape extends into the sea. 
 
 Tuesday, Oct. 30th. They left the river 
 which they had named Rio de Mares, and stand- 
 ing to the NW. discovered a cape covered with 
 palm trees, which the Admiral called Cabo de 
 P almas ;* it was fifteen leagues distant from the 
 place of their departure. The indians on board 
 the Pinta signified to the Spaniards, that beyond 
 this cape was a river,f and from this river to 
 Cuba,\ was a distance of four days voyage or 
 journey. The Captain of the Pinta declared 
 that he understood Cuba to be a city, and that 
 the land here was a continent of great size which 
 extended far to the North ; also that the king 
 of this country was at war with the Great Can, 
 whom the Indians called Cami, and his country 
 or city Fava and other names. The Admiral 
 determined to steer for this river, and dispatch 
 a present and the letter of the Spanish sove- 
 
 * Now called Alto de Juan Danue. 
 
 t Rio Maximo. 
 
 J The Spaniards, as the reader must have already per- 
 ceived, understood very imperfectly what the natives sig- 
 nified to them. Cuba was here meant to denote Ctibanacan 
 the centre of the island of Cuba, or it was actually, accord- 
 ing to others, the name of the capital province or city of 
 the island. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 69 
 
 reigns to the king: this he judged best to per- 
 form by means of a mariner he had on board, 
 who had formerly been in Guinea, and some of 
 the indians of Guanahani. The Admiral states 
 the latitude of this place to be twenty-one de- 
 grees North, if the manuscript from which I have 
 copied this be correct, and says he must proceed 
 on to the Great Can, whom he supposed was to 
 be found thereabout, or to the city of Cathay* 
 which he affirms to be a very large city, accord- 
 ing as he had learned before he sailed from 
 Spain. All the land here he describes as pleas- 
 ant and level, bordered with a deep sea. 
 
 Wednesday, Oct. 31st. All Tuesday night 
 they beat up and down, and then came to a river 
 which they could not enter for the shoals at 
 the mouth; the indians thought it as easy to 
 enter with the ships as they did with their ca- 
 noes. Proceeding onward they discovered a 
 capet extending far into the sea, and surrounded 
 with shallows ; they saw also a bay capable of 
 receiving small vessels, which they could not 
 reach, as the wind had shifted to the North, and 
 the coast ran NNW. and SE.: another cape which 
 they saw farther onward, extended still farther 
 
 * China, at that time was known by this name. 
 
 | Now called Boca de Carabelas grandes St Punta 
 I del Maternillo 
 
70 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 into the sea. For this reason and observing 
 from the appearance of the heavens that it 
 threatened to blow violently, they returned to 
 Rio de Marcs. 
 
 Thursday, Nov. 1st. At sunrise the Admiral 
 sent the boats to land to visit the houses they 
 saw there ; they found the inhabitants all fled, 
 but after some time they espied a man ; the 
 Admiral then dispatched one of his indians on 
 shore, who called out to him from a distance 
 and bade him not be fearful, as the Spaniards 
 were a friendly people, not injuring any one, nor 
 belonging to the Great Can, but on the contrary, 
 bad made many presents of their goods among the 
 inhabitants of the islands. The natives having 
 ascertained that no ill was intended them, gath- 
 ered confidence, and came in above sixteen canoes 
 to the ships, bringing cotton yarn and other 
 things, which the Admiral ordered should not be 
 taken from them, as he wished them to under- 
 stand that he was in search of nothing but gold, 
 which they call nucay. All day the canoes kept 
 passing between the ships and the shore. The 
 Admiral saw no gold among them, but remarks 
 having observed an indian with a bit of wrought 
 silver at his nostrils, which he conceived to be 
 an indication of the existence of that metal in the 
 country. The indians informed them by signs 
 that within three days there would come many 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 71 
 
 traders from the interior to purchase the goods 
 of the Spaniards, to whom they would communi- 
 cate news of the king, who as far as could be 
 learnt from the signs of the natives, was about 
 four days journey distant. They informed the 
 Spaniards also that many persons had been dis- 
 patched to inform the king respecting the Admi- 
 ral. These people were found to be of the 
 same race and manners with those already ob- 
 served, without any religion that could be dis- 
 covered ; they had never remarked the indians 
 whom they kept on board the ships to be en- 
 gaged in any sort of devotion of their own, but 
 they would upon being directed, make the sign 
 of the cross, and repeat the Salve and«/??;e Maria 
 with the hands extended towards heaven. The 
 language is the same throughout these islands, 
 and the people friends to one another, which the 
 Admiral says he believes to be the case in all 
 the neighboring parts, and that they are at war 
 with the Great Can, whom they call Cavila, and 
 his country Bafan. These people go naked like 
 the rest. The river here he describes as deep, 
 and having a bold shore at the mouth, where 
 ships may lay close to the land; the water 
 of the river salt for a league upwards when 
 it becomes very fresh. It is certain, says the 
 \dmiral, that this is the continent, and that we 
 
72 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 are in the neighborhood of Zayto and Guinsay* 
 a hundred leagues more or less distant from the 
 one or the other. 
 
 Friday, Nov. 2d. The Admiral resolved to 
 send two of the Spaniards into the country; 
 those whom he selected for this purpose were 
 Rodrigo' de Jerez, of Ayamonte, and Luis de 
 Torres, who had lived with the Adelantado of 
 Murcia, and knew Hebrew, Chaldaic, and some 
 Arabic ; he had been formerly a Jew ; to these 
 he joined two of the natives, one of those he had 
 brought from Guanahani, and another belonging 
 to the houses near the river. He gave them 
 strings of beads to purchase provisions, and di- 
 rected them to return within six days. Speci- 
 mens of spicery were intrusted to them that they 
 might judge if any thing similar existed in the 
 country. He took care to instruct them how 
 they should inquire for the king, and what they 
 were to say in informing him that the King and 
 Queen of Castile had dispatched the Admiral 
 with letters and a present for him, and to learn 
 the state of his country and gain his friendship. 
 Furthermore the envoys were instructed to ob- 
 tain a knowledge of the territory, and observe 
 the ports and rivers, with their distances from the 
 
 * Columbus being persuaded that he had arrived at the 
 continent of India, thought himself near the cities which 
 he names. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 73 
 
 place where the ships lay, &c. The Admiral 
 here took an observation, and found the latitude 
 to be twenty-one degrees ; according to his cal- 
 culation, their distance from the island of Ferro 
 was eleven hundred and forty-two leagues.* 
 He was fully persuaded that this was the con- 
 tinent. 
 
 Saturday, Nov. 3d. In the morning the Admi- 
 ral went on board his boat, and observing that 
 the mouth of the river formed an ample harbour, 
 very deep and free from rocks, with a fine beach 
 very fit for careening ships, as well as plenty of 
 wood on shore, he rowed up the stream a couple 
 of leagues to the fresh water, and going on shore, 
 ascended a hill to take a view of the country, 
 but nothing of the inhabitants was seen on ac- 
 count of the thickness of the woods, which dif- 
 fused a very odoriferous scent, leading him to 
 believe that aromatic plants abounded there. 
 The beauty of the prospect was such that he 
 declares his eyes were never tired with viewing 
 it, nor was the harmony of the feathered tribe 
 wanting. Great numbers of canoes came to the 
 ships this day for the purpose, of bartering their 
 cotton, and nets or hammocs on which they 
 sleep. 
 
 Sunday, Nov. 4th. Early in the morning the 
 Admiral went on shore in the boat to shoot birds, 
 
 * The true distance was eleven hundred and five leagues. 
 9 
 
74 FIRST V0YA6E 
 
 and at his return, Martin Alonzo Pinzon came to 
 him with two pieces of cinnamon, saying that a 
 Portuguese on board his vessel had seen an indian 
 with two large handfuls of it, but was afraid to 
 purchase it on account of the prohibition of the 
 Admiral, and furthermore that the indian had 
 some reddish things resembling nutmegs. The 
 boatswain of the Pinta declared he had seen 
 cinnamon trees. The Admiral went to the place 
 but found none. He showed some of the natives 
 pepper and cinnamon which he had brought 
 from Castile, they recognised it as he declares, 
 and intimated to him by s^gns that much of it was 
 to be found not far from thence to the southeast. 
 He likewise showed them gold and pearls, and 
 was informed by some old men that these existed 
 in great abundance in a place which they called 
 Boiiio*, being worn by the people at their necks, 
 ears, arms and legs. They had, according to the 
 same account, large ships, and carried on traffic, 
 and this was all at the southeast. They further 
 informed him that at a distance there were men 
 with one eye only, and others with faces like dogs, 
 who were man-eaters, and accustomed upon taking 
 a prisoner, to cut his throat, drink his blood, and 
 
 * Bohw, according to Las Casas, was the name which the 
 indians gave to their houses, or, as the same author suggests, 
 they might intend to signify by this name the island of Es- 
 panola which the inhabitants called Hayti. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. /5 
 
 dismember him. The Admiral then determined 
 to return to his ship and wait for the men whom 
 he had sent into the country, when he was re- 
 solved to depart in quest of the regions which 
 had been described to him, unless he should re 
 ceive such accounts from the interior as would 
 induce him to stay. He says ' these people are 
 very mild and timorous, naked as I have descri- 
 bed the others, without weapons or laws. The 
 soil is very fertile abounding with mames* a 
 root like a carrot, with a taste of chesnuts ; 
 Beans, likewise are here, very dissimilar to ours, 
 also cotton, growing spontaneously among the 
 mountains ; I am of opinion that this is gathered 
 at all seasons of the year, as 1 observed upon a 
 single tree, blossoms, pods unripe, and others burst 
 open. A thousand other productions, which are 
 doubtless of great value, I remarked, but find it 
 impossible to describe them.' 
 
 Monday, Nov. 5th. In the morning the Admi- 
 ral ordered the ships to be careened, one at a 
 time, the others remaining afloat for security, 
 although he declares the natives were very friend- 
 ly, and that they might without hazard have 
 careened them all together. While they were 
 about this, the boatswain of the Nina came to 
 him demanding a reward for having discovered 
 
 * Sweet potatoes according to some. 
 
76 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 mastick, the specimen, however, he did not ex- 
 hibit, having lost it. The Admiral promised 
 him the reward, and sent Rodrigo Sanchez and 
 Maestre Diego to examine the trees ; they 
 brought back a portion of the gum and of the 
 wood, which he preserved for the King and 
 Queen. He says that it was evidently mastick, 
 although, to be good, it should be collected at 
 the proper season ; and that there were trees in 
 that neighborhood sufficient to yield a thousand 
 quintals a year. Here too he states that he found 
 much of that sort of wood which appeared to be 
 aloe. This harbour which he called Puerto de 
 Mares, is according to his account, one of the 
 best in the world, with a fine air, and the inhab- 
 itants very gentle. Here is a rocky promontory, 
 upon which a fort might be built to defend the 
 port if this should become a place of any trade. 
 The Admiral adds ' May our Lord, in whose 
 hands are all victories, direct all things to his 
 service.' An indian informed him by signs that 
 the mastick was beneficial to them when they 
 were afflicted with pain in the stomach. 
 
 Tuesday, Nov. 6th. Last night, says the Ad- 
 miral, the two men whom I had sent into the 
 country returned, and related as follows. After 
 having travelled a dozen leagues they came 
 to a town containing about fifty houses, where 
 there were probably a thousand inhabitants. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 77 
 
 every house containing a great number ; they 
 were built in the manner of large tents. The 
 inhabitants received them after their fashion 
 with great ceremony ; the men and women 
 flocked to behold them, and they were lodged 
 in their best houses. They signified their admi- 
 ration and reverence of the strangers by touch- 
 ing them, kissing their hands and feet, and mak- 
 ing signs of wonder. They imagined them come 
 from heaven, and signified as much to them. 
 They were feasted with such food as the natives 
 had to offer. Upon their arrival at the town 
 they were led by the arms of the principal men 
 of the place, to the chief dwelling, here they 
 gave them seats, and the indians sat upon the 
 ground in a circle round them. The indians 
 who accompanied the Spaniards explained to the 
 natives the manner in which their new guests 
 lived, and gave a favorable account of their char- 
 acter. The men then left the place, and the 
 women entered, and seated themselves around 
 them in the same manner, kissing their hands and 
 feet, and examining whether they were flesh and 
 bone like themselves. They entreated them to 
 remain there as long as five days. The Span- 
 iards showed them the cinnamon, pepper and 
 other spices which they had received from the 
 Admiral, and they informed them by signs that 
 there was much of these in the neighborhood at 
 
78 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 the southeast, but they knew not of any in this 
 place. The Spaniards not discovering any great 
 number of towns here, resolved to return to the 
 ships, and had they chosen to admit the natives 
 to accompany them, might have been attended 
 back by more than five hundred men and women, 
 who were eager to bear them company, think- 
 ing they were returning to heaven. They took 
 none along with them but one of the principal 
 inhabitants with his son ; with these the Admi- 
 ral held some conversation, and showed them 
 great civilities ; the indian described to him by 
 signs many countries and islands in these parts, 
 and the Admiral thought to carry him home to 
 Spain, but says he was unable to find whether 
 the indian was willing. At night he seemed to 
 grow fearful, and wish to go on shore ; the Ad- 
 miral says, that having the ship aground he 
 thought it not advisable to oppose him, and so 
 let him return, requesting him to come back the 
 next morning, but they saw him no more. The 
 Spaniards upon their journey met with great 
 multitudes of people, men and women with fire- 
 brands in their hands and herbs to smoke after 
 their custom.* No village was seen upon the 
 
 * Las Casas in his General History of the Indies gives 
 Ihe following relation of this circumstance: ' The two Span- 
 iards met upon, their journey, great numbers of people of 
 both sexes; the men always with a firebrand in their hands 
 and certain herbs for smoking: these are dry, and fixed in 
 a leaf also dry, after the manner of those paper tubes which 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 79 
 
 road of a larger size than five houses, but all the 
 inhabitants showed them the same respect. 
 Many sorts of trees were observed, and herbs 
 and odoriferous flowers. Great numbers of birds 
 they remarked, all different from those of Spain 
 except the nightingales, who entertained them 
 with their songs, and the partridges and geese, 
 which were found in abundance. Of quadru- 
 peds they descried none except dumb dogs. 
 The soil appeared fertile and under good culti- 
 vation, producing the mames aforementioned and 
 beans very dissimilar to ours, as well as the 
 grain called panic-grass. They saw vast quanti- 
 ties of cotton, spun and manufactured, a sirHe 
 house contained above five hundred arrobas ;* 
 four thousand quintals might be collected here 
 
 the boys in Spain use at Whitsuntide: having lighted one 
 end they draw the smoke by sucking at the other, this 
 causes a drowsiness and sort of intoxication, and according 
 to their accounts relieves them from the sensation of fatigue. 
 These tubes they call by the name of tabacos. I knew 
 many Spaniards in the island of Espanola who were ad- 
 dicted to the use of them, and on being reproached with 
 it as a bad habit, replied that they could not bring them- 
 selves to give it up. I do not see what relish or benefit 
 they could find in them.' Here we*ee the origin of cigars. 
 See Charlevoix Hist, de St. Domingue Lib. I. " le Tabac 
 etoit naturel a l'isle Espagnole; les insulaires le nommoient 
 Cohiba, et appelloient Tabaco l'instrument dont ils se ser- 
 voient pour fumer. On ne doute point aujourd'hui que ce 
 ne soit la 1'origine du mot de Tabac, et e'est une erreur 
 populaire que de l'attribuer a l'isle de Tabago.' 
 
 * An arroba is twenty-five pounds. 
 
80 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 per annum. The Admiral says it appears to him 
 that they do not sow it, but that it is productive 
 the whole year round ; it is very fine with an ex- 
 ceeding long staple. Every thing which the in- 
 dians possessed they were ready to barter at a 
 very low price ; a large basket of cotton they 
 would give for a leather thong, or other trifling 
 
 & 
 
 thing which was offered them. They are an 
 inoffensive, unwarlike people, naked, except that 
 the women wear a very slight covering at the 
 loins ; their manners are very decent, and their 
 complexion not very dark, but lighter than that 
 of the inhabitants of the Canary Islands. ' I 
 have no doubt, most serene Princes ' says the 
 Admiral, 4 that were proper devout and religious 
 persons to come among them and learn their lan- 
 guage, it would be an easy matter to convert rthem 
 all to Christianity, and I hope in our Lord that 
 your Highnesses will devote yourselves with 
 much diligence to this object, and bring into the 
 church so many multitudes, inasmuch as you have 
 exterminated those who refused to confess the 
 Father Son and Holy Ghost,* so that having end- 
 ed your days (as we are all mortal) you may 
 leave your dominions in a tranquil condition, free 
 from heresy and wickedness, and meet with a 
 favorable reception before the eternal Creator. 
 
 * This refers to the Moors and Jews, as has been seen 
 in the preface of Columbus. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 81 
 
 whom may it please to grant you a long life and 
 great increase of kingdoms and dominions, with 
 the will and disposition to promote, as you always 
 have done, the holy christian religion, Amen. 
 
 This day I launched the ship, and made ready 
 to depart in the name of God, next Thursday, for 
 the SE. in quest of gold and spices, as well as 
 to discover the country.' These are the words 
 of the Admiral, who expected to sail on Thursday, 
 but the wind being contrary, detained him till the 
 twelfth day of November. 
 
 Monday, Nov. 12th. They sailed from the 
 port and river de Mares at day break : they di- 
 rected their course in search of an island which 
 the indians on board affirmed repeatedly was 
 called Babeque* where as they related by signs, 
 the inhabitants collected gold at night by torch- 
 light upon the shore, and afterwards hammered 
 it into bars. In order to reach this island they 
 directed to steer East by South. Having sailed 
 eight leagues along the coast, they discovered a 
 fiver, and four leagues further onward, another, 
 very large, exceeding in size all which they had 
 seen. The Admiral was unwilling to remain, and 
 put into either of them, for two reasons, the first 
 and principal one, because the wind and weather 
 
 * This name was given by the natives, to the coast of 
 Tierra Firme, which they also called Bohio anrl Caritaba — ■ 
 Las Casas. 
 
 10 
 
82 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 were favorable to proceed to the above-mention- 
 ed island of Babeque ; the other was, that were 
 there any large towns near the sea, they might 
 easily be discovered, but in case they were far 
 up the rivers, they could only be reached by 
 ascending the stream in small vessels, which those 
 of his fleet were not. A desire, therefore, not 
 to waste time, determined him not to explore 
 these rivers, the last of which was surrounded 
 with a well peopled country ; he named it Rio 
 del Sol* He states that the Sunday previous, 
 he had thought it Avould be well to take a few 
 of the natives from the place where the ships 
 lay, for the purpose of carrying them to Spain, 
 that they might acquire our language, and inform 
 us what their country contained, besides becom- 
 ing Christians and serving us at their return as 
 interpreters, 'for I have observed,' says he, 
 ' that these people have no religion, neither are 
 they idolaters, but are a very gentle race, with- 
 out the knowledge of any iniquity ; they neither 
 kill, nor steal, nor carry weapons, and are so 
 timid that oue of our men might put a hundred 
 of them to flight, although they will readily sport 
 and play tricks with them. They have a knowl- 
 edge that there is a God above, and are firmly 
 persuaded that we have come from heaven. 
 
 * Puerto del Padre. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 83 
 
 They very quickly learn such prayers as we re- 
 peat to them, and also to make the sign of the 
 cross. Your Highnesses should therefore adopt 
 the resolution of converting: them toChristianitv, 
 in which enterprise, I am of opinion that a very 
 short space of time would suffice to gain to our 
 holy faith multitudes of people, and to Spain, 
 great riches and immense dominions, with all 
 their inhabitants; there being, without doubt, in 
 these countries vast quantities of gold, for the 
 indians would not without cause give us such de- 
 scriptions of places where the inhabitants dug it 
 from the earth, and wore it in massy bracelets 
 at their necks, ears, legs, and arms. Here are 
 also pearls and precious stones, and an infinite 
 amount of spices. In the river de Mares which 
 1 left last evening, there is undoubtedly a great 
 deal of mastick, and the quantity might be in- 
 creased, for the trees transplanted, easily take 
 root ; they are of a lofty size, bearing leaves and 
 fruit like the lentisk; the tree, however is taller 
 and has a larger leaf than the lentisk, as is men- 
 tioned by Pliny, and as I have myself observed 
 in the island of Scio in the Archipelago. I or- 
 dered many of these trees to be tapped in or- 
 der to extract the resin, but as the weather was 
 rainy all the time I was in the river, I was una- 
 ble to procure more than a very small portion, 
 which I have preserved for vour Highnesses. It 
 
84 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 is possible also that this is not the proper 
 season for collecting it, which, it is likely, may be 
 in the spring, when they begin to put forth their 
 blossoms ; at present the fruit upon them is near- 
 ly ripe. Great quantities of cotton might be 
 raised here, and sold, as I think, profitably, with- 
 out being carried to Spain, but to the cities 
 of the Great Can, which we shall doubtless 
 discover, as well as many others belonging to 
 other sovereigns ; these may become a source 
 of profit to your Highnesses by trading thither 
 with the productions of Spain and the other 
 European countries. Here also is to be found 
 abundance of aloe, which however is not a 
 thing of very great value, but the mastick 
 assuredly is, being met with no where else 
 except in the before-mentioned island of Scio, 
 where if I remember rightly it is produced 
 to the amount of fifty thousand ducats value in 
 a year. The mouth of this river forms the best 
 harbour I have yet seen, being wide, deep and 
 free from shoals, with a fine situation for a town 
 and fortification where ships may lie close along 
 the shore, the land high, with a good air and fine 
 streams of water. Yesterday a canoe came to 
 the ship with six young men, five of them came on 
 board, whom I ordered to be detained, and have 
 them with me ; I then sent ashore to one of the 
 houses, and took seven women and three children: 
 this I did that the indians might tolerate their 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 85 
 
 captivity better with their company, for it has 
 often happened that the Portuguese have carri- 
 ed the natives from Guinea to Portugal, for the 
 purpose of learning their language, and when 
 this was done, and they returned with them to 
 Guinea, expecting by reason of the good treat- 
 ment they had showed them, and the presents 
 they had given them, to find great benefit in 
 their use, they have gone among their own peo- 
 ple and never appeared more. Others have done 
 differently, and by keeping their wives, have 
 assured themselves of their possession. Besides, 
 these women will be a great help to us in acquir- 
 ing their language, which is the same throughout 
 all these countries, the inhabitants keeping up a 
 communication among the islands by means of 
 their canoes. This is not the case in Guinea, 
 where there are a thousand different dialects, 
 one tribe not understanding another. This eve- 
 ning came on board, the husband of one of the 
 women, and father of the three children, which 
 were a boy and two girls, he intreated me to 
 let him accompany them, which I very willingly 
 granted ; the natives whom I had taken from 
 here, were all so delighted at this as to induce 
 me to think them his relations. He is a person 
 of about forty-five years of age.' All this is in 
 the exact words of the Admiral ; he also says 
 that he found the weather somewhat cold, and 
 
 «U 
 
86 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 being in the winter, thought it not advisable to 
 prosecute his discoveries any farther towards the 
 north* This day, Monday, they sailed by sun- 
 set, eighteen leagues, East by South, to a cape 
 which he named Cabo de Cnba:\ 
 
 Tuesday, Nov. 13th. All night beat up and 
 down making no progress, which was done for 
 the purpose of examining a gap between two 
 lofty mountains which they had noticed at sunset, 
 and which seemed to be a separation between 
 the land of Cuba and that of Bohio,% this the In- 
 dians on board signified to them in the usual way. 
 At daylight they stood towards the land, and 
 passed a point which appeared at night about 
 two leagues in extent ; they then entered a spa- 
 cious gulf five leagues to the SSE., and saw a 
 cape five leagues further onward where, between 
 two high mountains there was discernible a large 
 gap: whether this was a strait of the sea, they 
 could not determine; and because the Admiral 
 was anxious to proceed on to the island they 
 called Babeque, where, as he understood there 
 was much gold, and this island was to the East, 
 he put out to sea, perceiving no shelter on the 
 
 * From what he here relates, it appears that had he 
 proceeded Northerly he would undoubtedly, in two days, 
 have discovered Florida. — Las Casas. 
 
 t Puntade Mulas. 
 
 t Sierras del Cristal St Sierras del Moa. 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 87 
 
 coast from the violence of the wind, which blew 
 more strongly than ever ; they kept on their 
 course East, with the wind from the North, 
 eight miles an hour, till sunset, when they had 
 sailed fifty-six miles, which are fourteen leagues, 
 East from Cabo de Cuba. Of the coast of Bohio, 
 which was to leeward, they had viewed appar- 
 ently eighty miles, or twenty leagues, beginning 
 at the cape of the gulf above mentioned. All 
 this coast runs ESE. and WiNW. 
 
 Wednesday, Nov. 14th. Stood off and on 
 during the night, not judging it safe to sail among 
 the islands in the dark. The indians informed 
 them yesterday that the distance from Rio de 
 Mares to the island of Babcque was three days 
 voyage, this of course was to be understood of a 
 voyage in their canoes, which go about seven 
 leagues in a day. The wind was light, and 
 though their direction was East, it would not 
 allow them to steer within a point of this 
 course y these, and other hindrances which are 
 related, kept them from making any progress be- 
 fore morning. At sunrise the Admiral, in con- 
 sequence of the wind having shifted from N. to 
 NE. determined to steer for the land, and seek 
 a harbour, and in the event of not mooting with 
 one, to return to that he last quitted. Having 
 gone that night twenty-four miles East by South, 
 he stood South for the land, and arriving near. 
 
88 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 saw many harbours, inlets, and islands; the wind 
 blowing strong with a high sea, he did not dare 
 risk an entrance into either of them, but kept 
 along the coast NW. by W., still looking out for 
 a harbour : a great many were seen, but none of 
 them appeared safe; having gone in this manner 
 sixty-four miles, they came to a very deep en- 
 trance, a quarter of a mile wide, with a river, 
 forming a good haven,* here they entered and 
 found it spacious and deep, containing so many 
 islands that they could not be counted, these 
 were of a good size and lofty, covered with 
 palm and other trees of a thousand different 
 sorts. The Admiral was struck with admiration 
 at viewing so many islands of such a height, and 
 declares to the King and Queen that he believes 
 there are not higher mountains in the world than 
 those which he saw along the coast, and among 
 these islands, and that none equal them in beau- 
 ty, they being without clouds or snow. At the 
 feet of these mountains there is great depth of 
 water. He states it as his opinion that these 
 islands are the innumerable ones which in the 
 maps, are placed at the extremity of the East,t 
 and says he believes they contain great riches, 
 
 * Probably Puerto de Tanamo, in Cuba. 
 
 | In the map of Martin de Behem, drawn up in 1492, 
 and published by Mur and Cladera, a great multitude of 
 islands are laid down, at the eastern limit of India. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 89 
 
 precious stones, and spicery, and extend far to 
 the South, spreading out on each side. He 
 named this place La Mar deJVuestra Senora, and 
 the harbour near the strait which is the entrance 
 to these islands, he called Puerto del Principe, of 
 which he made no further survey than by view- 
 ing it from without, till he returned to it on the 
 Saturday of the following week, as will after- 
 wards appear. The Admiral dilates very much 
 upon the fertility, beauty and loftiness of these 
 islands, and cautions the king and queen not to be 
 surprised at the great admiration he expresses, for 
 as he assures them he does not represent a hund- 
 redth part of the truth. Some of these moun- 
 tains appeared to reach to the skies, and were 
 shaped like the points of diamonds, and others 
 very lofty with table summits. A great depth of 
 water was at their feet, so that the largest car- 
 rack,* might lie there. None of them were 
 rocky, but all covered with wood. 
 
 Thursday, Nov. 15th. The Admiral went with 
 the boats to visit the islands, of which he gives 
 a wonderful description, and says he found mas- 
 tick and great abundance of aloe. Some of the 
 islands were cultivated with the roots which 
 the indians use in making their bread. Fire was 
 found burning in several places, but they met 
 
 * A ship of the largest size. 
 11 
 
90 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 with no fresh water. A few inhabitants were 
 seen, who fled. They found the water in depth 
 from fifteen to sixteen fathoms, with a sandy 
 bottom, and no rocks, a very desirable thing to 
 mariners, as these last are very dangerous in 
 cutting the cables. 
 
 Friday, Nov. 16th. They made it a practice 
 in all those countries and islands, on going on 
 shore, to set up and leave there, a cross. The 
 Admiral went in the boat to the mouth of this port, 
 and upon a point of land, found two large trunks 
 of trees, of different sizes, laid across each other 
 in the shape of a cross, so exactly that he says a 
 carpenter could not have done the thing with more 
 precision ; having paid their adorations to this, 
 he ordered that these trunks should be taken and 
 made into a large and lofty crucifix. Canes were 
 found about the shore, but they could not dis- 
 cover where they grew. The Admiral thought 
 they had floated down some river, and were 
 washed ashore, and in this he was right. They 
 entered a cove or inlet within the entrance of 
 the port toward the South East ; here they 
 found a rocky promontory with a very bold shore, 
 where the largest carrack in the world might 
 lie close to the land, with a recess or corner in 
 which half a dozen ships might lie without an- 
 chors as in a dock. This appeared to him a conve- 
 nient situation for a fortress, in case these islands 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 91 
 
 should ever become a great mart of trade. Re- 
 turning to the ship, he found the indians on board 
 fishing for cockles, which are found of a large size 
 in these seas. He made the crew dive here and 
 search for button-shells which are the cockles in 
 Avhich pearls are found ; they succeeded in obtain- 
 ing many of them, but no pearls ; this he thought 
 was owing to the season being unfit, and was of 
 opinion that the proper time must be in JVIay and 
 June. The sailors found a creature which ap- 
 peared like a taso. They fished with nets and 
 took a fish among others resembling a hog, to- 
 tally covered with a shell of exceeding hardness, 
 being soft nowhere except at the eyes and tail. 
 The Admiral directed it to be preserved by salt- 
 ing, as a curiosity. 
 
 Saturday, Nov. 17th. The Admiral went on 
 board the boat in the morning for the purpose of 
 visiting the islands in the South West, which 
 had not been surveyed. A great number were 
 discovered, very fertile and of a beautiful appear- 
 ance, with the water very deep among them ; in 
 several of these, streams of fresh water were seen 
 running down to the sea, which were thought to 
 proceed from springs among the mountains. Pro- 
 ceeding onward, they came to a fine river of fresh 
 water, which was found to be very cool ; here was 
 also a delightful meadow, with great numbers 
 of palm trees more loftv than anv they had yet 
 
92 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 seen ; according to the Admiral's relation they 
 found nutmegs here, and large indian mice, also 
 craw-fish of a large size. Great flocks of birds 
 were seen, and they smelt a powerful odour of 
 musk, which article, they entertained no doubt, 
 was to be met with in these parts. This day 
 the two oldest of the indians which had been 
 taken at Rio de Mares, and sent on board the 
 Nina made their escape. 
 
 Sunday, Nov. 18th. The Admiral with many 
 of the crew, went in the boats to land, for th« 
 purpose of setting up the cross which had been 
 made from the logs beforementioned : this was 
 done at the entrance of Puerto del Principe, where 
 was selected a beautiful spot, clear of wood, for 
 the situation : it was a lofty elevation and afford- 
 ed an enchanting prospect. He says that the sea 
 here ebbs and flows much more than at any 
 other place he has visited in these countries ; this 
 he thinks must be ascribed to the multitude of 
 islands in the neighbourhood. The tide, he 
 informs us is the reverse of what it is among us, 
 for when the moon is SW. by S. it is low water 
 in this port. Being Sunday they remained here 
 through the day. 
 
 Monday, Nov. 19th. Set sail before sunrise, 
 but met with a calm. At noon it began to blow 
 a little from the east, and they steered NNE ; 
 at sunset Puerto del Principe bore SSW. seven 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 93 
 
 leagues distant. They came in sight of the island 
 of Babeque, which bore exactly east, at the dis- 
 tance of sixty miles. They sailed all night with 
 a light wind, making a progress of sixty miles, 
 and at ten o'clock the next day, they had com- 
 pleted a dozen more, which amount to eighteen 
 leagues in the direction of NE. by N. 
 
 Tuesday, Nov. 20th. The island or islands of 
 Babeque bore ESE., from which quarter the 
 wind blew, being of course ahead. Seeing no 
 prospect of the wind's shifting, and the sea being 
 high, the Admiral resolved to put about and re- 
 turn to Puerto del Principe, from whence they had 
 last sailed, and which was distant twenty-five 
 leagues. He was unwilling to proceed to 
 the island he had named lsabela, which 
 was about a dozen leagues off, and where he 
 might have anchored that day, for two reasons, 
 the one, because he saw two islands to the south, 
 which he wished to examine, the other because 
 he feared that the indians on board, which he had 
 taken from San Salvador or Guanahani as the 
 natives called it, might effect their escape, as that 
 island was only eight leagues distant from lsabela, 
 this he was desirous to prevent, as he wished to 
 carry them to Spain. The indians as he informs 
 us, were given to understand that in case the 
 Spaniards met with gold they intended to set 
 them at liberty. They arrived near Puerto del 
 
FIKST VOYAGE 
 
 Principe, but were unable to enter, on account of 
 the night, besides that the current carried them 
 to the North West. They then put about and 
 stood to the North East, under a strong breeze, 
 which, however, abated about the third watch of 
 the night, when they steered East by North; the 
 wind had changed to SSE., and at dawn it shifted 
 again to South. At sunrise they found Puerto del 
 Principe to bear nearly SW. by W., forty-eight 
 miles or twelve leagues distant. 
 
 Wednesday, Nov. 21st. As soon as the sun 
 had risen, they stood to the East with a Souther- 
 ly wind ; the currents being contrary, they made 
 but little progress : towards evening they had 
 gone twenty-four miles, when the wind shifted 
 to the East, and they steered South by East, and 
 by sunset sailed a dozen miles. Here the Ad- 
 miral found their latitude to be twenty-one de- 
 grees North, as at Puerto de Mares, but says he 
 shall make no further use of his quadrant, till he 
 arrives on shore, where he shall repair it. It 
 appeared to him that they were not in reality so 
 far to the North, and in this opinion he was 
 right. He was induced to think the quadrant 
 was correct by observing that the north star ap- 
 peared as high as in Castile, and if this was the 
 fact, he must have been in as high a latitude as 
 Florida, in this case what is the situation of the 
 islands he has been mentioning ? Moreover he 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 95 
 
 states that the heat was excessive, but it is clear 
 that if he had been upon the coast of Florida he 
 would not have found it hot but cold, as it is man- 
 ifest that in no part of the world is a great heat 
 experienced in such a latitude except by some 
 accidental cause, and even this I believe has 
 never been known.* This excessive heat which 
 
 * It is not easy to understand these remarks of Las 
 Casas. In this instance, as well as in the two preceding, 
 where the latitude of places has been specified, it is given 
 twenty-one degrees in the translation, although the state- 
 ment of Columbus is forty-two : as the Spanish editor re- 
 marks in a note upon the first of these passages, that the 
 quadrants in use at that time measured by double altitude, 
 and by consequence forty-two degrees of the computation 
 of Columbus are to be understood as half that number ac- 
 tual distance from the equator, it was thought proper to 
 make the alterations above stated, especially as from a 
 knowledge of the localities referred to, it appears that half 
 the equatorial distance given in the original, is the true 
 latitude of those places. From the observation, however, 
 of Columbus, respecting the appearance of the polar star, 
 one would be led to imagine that he supposed himself in 
 reality as far North as forty-two degrees, and it would seem 
 from what is observed by Las Casas — namely that in the lat- 
 itude specified by the Admiral, the excessive heat which 
 he mentions, could not have existed, — that he understood 
 the actual distance North to be as great as that expressed 
 in the Journal : it would be surprising, if this were the 
 fact, that Las Casas, who had made several voyages to 
 America, should be totally ignorant of the methods of nau- 
 tical calculation. Besides, the notion that he believed the 
 latitude mentioned, to be really what the numbers express, 
 is irreconcilable with his observation that their distance 
 from the equator would have been in the parallel of Flor- 
 ida. Now this part of the continent was early discovered, 
 and its true situation very well known when Las Casas 
 
FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 the Admiral says they suffered, indicates that 
 in these Indies and in the parts were they were 
 sailing there must be a great deal of gold. To- 
 day Martin Alonzo Pinzon, in the caravel Pinta, 
 left the other ships, without leave of the Admi- 
 ral, incited by his cupidity, upon the occasion of 
 an indian on board his vessel offering to direct 
 him whither he might find much gold. Thus he 
 abandoned them without any excuse of necessity, 
 or stress of weather, and the Admiral remarks, 
 ; he has by language and actions, occasioned me 
 many other troubles.' 
 
 Thursday, Nov. 22d. Last night, sailed South 
 by East, with an easterly wind, which, however, 
 blew very little. At the third watch it began to 
 blow from the NNE. ; they continued their 
 course southerly, to examine the land which they 
 saw in that quarter, and at sunrise found them- 
 selves as far distant from it, as they were the day 
 before, by reason of the contrary currents ; the 
 land was forty miles distant. Martin Alonzo 
 steered to the East for the island of Babeque 
 
 wrote, so that no possibility exits of his supposing it to be 
 so far North as forty-two degrees, and this writer himself 
 remarks in a note which has already been given, that two 
 days sail farther North from the coast of Cuba would have 
 carried our navigator to that country. That the polar star 
 could have been little more than half as high as it is seen 
 in Spain, it is hardly necessary to observe. It does not ap- 
 pear how the statement of the Admiral respecting its ap- 
 pearance can be accounted for. 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 97 
 
 where the indians told him there was much gold ; 
 he was in sight of the Admiral, about sixteen 
 miles off. All night the Admiral stood towards 
 the land, having taken in some of the sails, and 
 carrying a light, as he thought the Pinta was 
 steering towards him. The night was clear, and 
 there was a fine breeze which might have ena- 
 bled her to come up, had her commander been 
 so disposed. 
 
 Friday, Nov. 23. Kept on their course South 
 towards the land with a light wind ; the current 
 set so strong against them, that they made no 
 progress ahead, but found themselves at sunset, 
 where they had been in the morning. The wind 
 was ENE. and favorable for sailing to the South, 
 except that it was light. Beyond the cape which 
 they saw before them, extended out another head- 
 land toward the East, which the indians on board 
 called Bohio, and said it was very large, and con- 
 tained inhabitants with one eye in their foreheads 
 and others which they called Canibales, and 
 spoke of them with many marks of fear; as soon 
 as they saw the ships were taking that course 
 they were struck with terror, and signified that 
 the people went armed, and would devour them. 
 The Admiral declares that he believes there is 
 some truth in their representations, but thinks that 
 these people described as possessing arms, must 
 be a race of some sagacity, and that having 
 12 
 
98 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 made prisoners of some of the other Indians, 
 their friends not finding them to return, conclud- 
 ed they had eaten them. This, in fact, was the 
 opinion entertained of the Spaniards by some of 
 the natives at their first arrival. 
 
 Saturday, Nov. 24th. Sailed all night, and at 
 three o'clock in the morning, arrived at a low 
 flat island,* being the same which they had visit- 
 ed the week before in their voyage to the island 
 of Babeque. At first the Admiral was unwilling 
 to approach the shore, as it appeared to him 
 that the sea rendered it unsafe. At length he 
 proceeded to the gulf which he had named La 
 Mar de Nuestra Senora, where the multitude of 
 islands was discovered : Here he entered the 
 harbour which is situated at the entrance of the 
 strait. He says, that had he before known of 
 the existence of this harbour, and had not occu- 
 pied himself with visiting the islands in the gulf, 
 he should not have found it necessary to put 
 back, although he looks upon the time as well 
 bestowed in exploring the islands. Arrived at 
 the land, he dispatched the boat and sounded 
 the harbour, the entrance was found from six 
 to twenty fathoms deep, with a fine sandy bot- 
 tom. He then sailed up the harbour with the 
 ships, steering southwest and afterwards west, 
 the low island abovementioned bearing northerly 
 
 * Cayo de Moa. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 99 
 
 and forming with another island a port sufficient 
 to contain all the ships in Spain,* where they 
 might lie without moorings perfectly safe from 
 all winds. The entrance here is from the south- 
 east, and there is an outlet toward the west, 
 very broad and deep, so that these islands may be 
 sailed between, and examined by any one coming 
 from the north. They are at the foot of a high 
 mountaint which extends a considerable distance 
 from East to West, and is the longest and most 
 lofty among the infinite number which are to be 
 found upon this coast. A ridge of rock runs 
 along at the foot of the mountain toward the 
 entrance of the strait. Toward the Southeast, 
 and in the direction, of the low island, there is 
 another reef, but small ; between them the wa- 
 ter is very deep and the passage wide, as is 
 before remarked. Within the entrance at the 
 Southeast, they discovered a riverj very fair 
 and wide, and of greater volume than any they 
 had yet seen. The water was fresh quite to 
 the sea. It had a bar at its mouth, but a good 
 depth of eight or nine fathoms inside. The land 
 here, as elsewhere, was totally covered with 
 palm and other trees. 
 
 * This is either the harbour of Santa Catalina, or more 
 probably that of Cayo de Moa, to which it is said, the 
 description in the text exactly answers. These places are 
 in the eastern extremity of Cuba. 
 
 | Sierras de Moa. J Rio de Moa. 
 
 a ■ 
 
100 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 Sunday, Nov. 25. Before sunrise the Admi- 
 ral went in tile boat to view a cape or point of 
 land* to the Southeast of the low island, about 
 a league and a half distant, as it appeared to hitn 
 there was in that quarter some convenient river. 
 About two bow shots from the cape to the 
 Southeast, he discovered a fine stream running 
 down a mountain!" with loud murmurs. He pro- 
 ceeded towards it, and found in the stream cer- 
 tain stones which shone with spots of a golden 
 hue ;J recollecting that gold was found in the 
 river Tagus near the sea, he entertained no 
 doubt that this was the metal, and directed that 
 a collection of these stones should be made to 
 carry to the King and Queen. While they were 
 about this, the ship-boys cried out that they saw 
 pine trees; the Admiral looked towards the 
 mountain, and discovered pines of such loftiness 
 and admirable shape, that he found it impossible 
 to exaggerate in the description of them, their 
 trunks being tall and straight to a marvel. Here, 
 he perceived that there might be procured 
 masts, plank, and every such material for build- 
 ing the largest ships. Here were also oaks and 
 strawberry-trees, a convenient stream and good 
 site for saw-mills; the land was high, and the 
 
 * Punta del Mangle or del Guarico. 
 
 | Sierras de Moa. 
 
 J Piedras de Margarita, according to Las Casas. 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 101 
 
 air the most agreeable they had yet met with. 
 Many stones of a ferruginous colour were found 
 along the shore, and others which some of the 
 men said, came out of silver mines; all these 
 were brought down by the stream. They pro- 
 cured from the forest, a yard and mizen-mast for 
 the caravel Nina. Proceeding to the mouth of 
 the river, they put into a bay* at the foot of the 
 cape at the Southeast, which they found spa- 
 cious and deep, and capable of containing a hun- 
 dred ships without anchors or moorings; a finer 
 port than this they had never seen. The moun- 
 tains were remarked very lofty, with many fine 
 streams running down their sides ; all were cov- 
 ered with forests of pines and other beautiful 
 trees. Two or three other rivers were seen. 
 The whole he describes to the King and Queen 
 with much enthusiasm : the pines especially, it 
 gave him inexpressible joy to behold, as they 
 afforded the means of building any desirable 
 number of ships. He cannot represent, as he 
 affirms, the hundredth part of what he saw, and 
 declares that it pleased our Lord to go on dis- 
 covering to him, things more and more valuable; 
 and in all that had been met with, the countries, 
 their productions and inhabitants, things had 
 grown better and better. He adds that himself 
 who saw these wonders, being struck with such 
 
 ' Puerto de Jaragrua. 
 
102 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 admiration, much greater must be caused in one 
 who only hears of them, and that none would be- 
 lieve the accounts of these things, unless they 
 saw them. 
 
 Monday, Nov. 26. At sunrise they weighed 
 anchor, and set sail from the harbour of Santa 
 Catalina within the low island j they proceeded 
 along the coast with a light breeze from the 
 Southwest, towards Cabo del Pico* at the South- 
 east, and arrived at the cape late in the after- 
 noon, the wind having died away ; they espied 
 in the direction of Southeast by East, another 
 cape about sixty miles distant ; nearer the ship 
 was a third, which bore Southeast by South, 
 apparently twenty miles distant, this the Admi- 
 ral named Cabo de Campanarf they could not 
 reach it before night, as the wind failed them. 
 They sailed this day thirty-two miles, which are 
 eight leagues : in this course they saw and mark- 
 ed down, nine very remarkable harbours, which 
 the mariners affirmed to be excellent, also five 
 large rivers were seen, the ships keeping close 
 along the coast for the purpose of making a full 
 survey. The land seemed to consist entirely of 
 very lofty mountains of a delightful appearance, 
 not rocky or barren, but smooth and abounding 
 in beautiful valleys, the whole most enchantingly 
 covered with tall and flourishing; trees, among 
 
 * Punta del Mangle, or Guarico. \ Punta Vaez. 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 103 
 
 which appeared to be many pines. Beyond 
 Cabo del Pico, toward the Southeast, were a 
 couple of islets each of about two leagues in 
 circuit, and within these, three fine harbours, 
 and two large rivers. No towns were seen along 
 the coast, although there were probably many 
 in these parts, to judge from the indications they 
 met with, for wherever they went on shore, they 
 found fires burning, and other signs of inhabitants. 
 The Admiral thought the land that was seen to 
 the Southeast of Cabo de Campana, was the is- 
 land called by the indians Bofuo, as it appeared to 
 be separated from the main land. All the na- 
 tives whom they had hitherto met with seemed 
 to entertain a great dread of the people of the 
 place they called Caniba or Canima, and stated 
 that they resided in this island of Bohio, which 
 the Admiral says must be a very large one, and 
 thinks that the inhabitants plunder the lands 
 and houses of the other indians, who are very 
 cowardly and are ignorant of weapons, It is on 
 this account that he supposes the indians are 
 afraid to build their houses near the sea, in the 
 vicinity of their enemies. He relates that the 
 indians on board, when they perceived the Span- 
 iards were directing their course thither, were 
 struck speechless with terror, thinking they should 
 be devoured; these apprehensions they were una- 
 ble to shake off, but persisted in affirming that the 
 men of this country had the faces of dogs, with 
 
104 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 only one eye; this the Admiral did not believe, 
 and was of opinion that these people who made 
 prisoners of the other Indians, belonged to the 
 Great Can. 
 
 Tuesday, Nov. 27th. At sunset last night 
 they approached the cape which they had 
 named Cabo de Campana, and as the sky was 
 clear and the wind light, the Admiral thought it 
 best not to anchor, although there were five or 
 six excellent ports to leeward. This he was in- 
 cited to do by his wish to make up the time he 
 had spent in lingering about and viewing the 
 beautiful places he had passed. On this account 
 they beat up and down all night, during which 
 time the currents carried them along five or six 
 leagues to the Southeast. Beyond Cabo de 
 Campana they discovered a large strait which 
 appeared to make a division in the land, with 
 what seemed to be an island in the middle. The 
 wind being Southwest, the Admiral determined 
 to put about, and examine it. On arriving thither 
 it was found to be a large bay ;* at the South- 
 easterly extremity was a lofty promontory of a 
 square shape, which appeared like an island. t 
 The wind shifted to the North, and they stood 
 about, and steered Southeast, for the purpose of 
 making; discoveries alone; the coast. At the foot 
 of the cape called Cabo de Campana they found 
 
 * Baracoa. | Monte del Yunque. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 105 
 
 an excellent harbour* and large river; a mile 
 beyond, another river, half a league further, a 
 third river; and another half a league onward, a 
 fourth. Four additional rivers were seen with- 
 in the distance of as many leagues, the last of 
 them about twenty miles from Cabo de Campana, 
 to the S.E. The most of these had safe en- 
 trances of great breadth and depth, and form ex- 
 cellent harbours for large ships, being free from 
 rocks, shoals and reefs. Standing along the 
 coast they discovered at the SE. of the last river 
 a large town,t which exceeded in size any they 
 had hitherto seen; a vast multitude of people 
 came down to the sea shore shouting loudly ; they 
 were all naked and had javelins in their hands. 
 The Admiral desired to have some conversation 
 with them, and ordered the sails to be lowered ; 
 they came to anchor and the boats were dis- 
 patched on shore with such preparation and or- 
 der, that the indians should neither receive any 
 injury, nor cause any to the Spaniards. Some 
 trifles were sent in the boats for distribution 
 among them. Those on shore made a show of 
 attempting to prohibit the landing of the Span- 
 iards, but perceiving the boats fearlessly ap- 
 proaching the land they retired to a distance. 
 The Spaniards thinking that a small number of 
 
 t Puerto del Maravi. t Baraooa 
 
 13 
 
106 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 the crew might approach thera without causing 
 any fear, three of their number advanced to- 
 wards the indians, calling out to them in the In- 
 dian language, (which they had learnt in some 
 degree from those on board) not to be afraid, not- 
 withstanding this they took to flight, leaving not 
 a soul behind. The Spaniards proceeded to the 
 houses, which were built of straw, after the man- 
 ner of the others, but found neither inhabitants 
 nor furniture. They returned to the ships and 
 set sail at noon for a pleasant cape,* which they 
 saw at the East, about eight leagues distant. 
 Having sailed half a league in the bay, they de- 
 scried toward the South a very singular har- 
 bour.! The country at the SE. presented a most 
 delightful view, descending in an open plain from 
 the mountains. Large towns, and the smoke of 
 many fires were seen, and the land appeared to 
 be well cultivated. These determined the Ad- 
 miral to put into the harbour above mentioned, 
 and attempt some intercourse Avilh the people. 
 This harbour he declares to be far superior to all 
 he had yet seen, for the populousness and beauty 
 of the country in the neighborhood, and the 
 fineness of the air. He speaks in terms of ad- 
 miration of the beauty of the fields and the 
 forests, among which were pines and palm- 
 
 * Ponta deMaifi. t Puerto de Baracoa. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 107 
 
 trees. The plain before-mentioned extended to 
 the SE., with an undulating surface and many 
 streams crossing it which run down from the 
 mountains, altogether forming the most beautiful 
 prospect in the world. Having anchored, the 
 Admiral went in the boat to sound the harbour, 
 which was of a circular shape, and at the mouth 
 of it toward the South he found the entrance of 
 a stream, wide enough to admit a galley ; this 
 was so situated as not to be seen before arriving 
 close to the spot. At a distance of the length 
 of the boat within, there were found eight fath- 
 oms depth of water. Proceeding up the stream 
 he was astonished to perceive the fresh and lux- 
 uriant verdure of the trees, the clearness of the 
 water, the variety of the birds, and the beauty 
 of the whole prospect, and declares he was never 
 willing to leave the place. He observed to the 
 crew who accompanied him that a thousand 
 tongues would be insufficient to inform the King 
 and Queen of what they saw there, or a thou- 
 sand hands to describe them, and that he ap- 
 peared to be under the influence of enchantment. 
 He was desirous that other persons of prudence 
 and credit should be witnesses of them, and says 
 he is certain their descriptions will not fall short 
 of his. He adds these words, ' it is indubitable 
 sovereign Princes, that in such countries there 
 must be fhing= of infinite vnlue. and the profits 
 
108 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 that may be acquired here I am not able to de- 
 scribe. 1 am unwilling to remain long in any 
 port, but desire to visit all the lands in this quar- 
 ter, that I may give a relation of them to your 
 Highnesses. The language of this people neither 
 I nor any of my company understand, and we are 
 perpetually making mistakes in our conversation 
 with one another. I place little confidence in 
 the indians I have on board, as they have sev- 
 eral times attempted to escape. Henceforth, 
 with the permission of our Lord, I shall use my 
 exertions, and have the language taught to some 
 of our people, for I perceive that thus far the 
 dialect is the same throughout. Thus we shall 
 acquire a knowledge of all that is valuable here, 
 and shall endeavour to convert to Christianity 
 these people, which may be easily done as they 
 are not idolators, but are without any religion. 
 Your Highnesses may order a city and fortress 
 to be built here, and possess the country. And 
 I assure your Highnesses that, to my thinking, 
 there are not under the sun better lands, consid- 
 ering the fertility of the soil, the temperature of 
 the air and the abundance of fine streams of wa- 
 ter, which are not pestilent, like the rivers of 
 Guinea, for, praised be our Lord, there has not 
 as yet been one among all my crews brought 
 upon his bed by sickness, or even afflicted with 
 so much as a headache, excepting an old man who 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 109 
 
 was troubled for two days with the stone, a dis- 
 order which he has possessed all his life. Please 
 God your Highnesses may send learned men 
 hither, who may ascertain the truth of all 1 de- 
 scribe. And as I have before spoken of a situa- 
 tion for a town and fortress at the Rio de Mares, 
 where there is a fine port and a pleasant country 
 in the neighborhood, I repeat what I then affirm- 
 ed in recommendation of that place ; but it is 
 certain that neither that situation, nor the Mar de 
 JVucstra Senora can, in any degree be compared 
 to this, for here are undoubtedly large towns^ 
 multitudes of people, and things of great value. 
 All these countries which I have seen, and which 
 I expect to discover, before my return to Castile, 
 will, in my opinion offer a vast trade to Europe, 
 and especially to Spain, to which they must all 
 necessarily be subject. Your Highnesses ought 
 not to suffer any trade to be carried on, nor a for- 
 eign foot to be set upon these shores except by 
 catholic Christians, as the object and sum of the 
 present undertaking has been the increase and 
 glory of the Christian religion.' All these are the 
 words of the Admiral. 
 
 They proceeded up the river, w r hich they 
 found to possess several branches, and then row- 
 ing round the harbour they saw at the mouth of 
 the river several delightful groves, and a very 
 fine canoe made of a log, as large as a fusta of 
 
1 10 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 twelve oars, it was hauled up under a shed 
 constructed with wood and covered with palm 
 leaves in such a manner that it was completely 
 sheltered from the rain and sun. The Admiral 
 declares this to he an excellent place for a town 
 and fort on account of the advantages of the har- 
 bour, streams and soil, and the plenty of wood, 
 and pleasantness of the country. 
 
 Wednesday, Nov. 28th. They remained in 
 port all day on account of the rain, although the 
 wind blowing from the S W., they might have 
 sailed along the coast. But as the thickness of 
 the weather would have hindered the view of 
 the land, the Admiral thought best to remain, 
 especially considering the danger in not being ac- 
 quainted with the coast. The crews went on 
 shore to wash their clothes, and some of them 
 went a distance into the country ; they found 
 large villages with the houses empty, the natives 
 having fled. They discovered another river, 
 larger than that at the harbour. 
 
 Thursday, Nov. 29th. As it continued to rain 
 and the sky was completely covered with clouds, 
 they did not set sail. Some of the Spaniards 
 went to visit a town toward the NW., and found 
 in the houses neither inhabitants nor furniture. 
 On the way they met with an old man who was 
 unable to escape, him they took, assuring him of 
 their friendly disposition, and after presenting 
 
OP COLUMBUS. Ill 
 
 him with some trifles, allowed him to depart. 
 The Admiral was desirous of seeing him, in order 
 that he might give him some clothes, and have 
 some conversation with him, for he was much 
 delighted with the country and judged it to be 
 very populous. They found a cake cf wax* in 
 one of the houses, which they preserved for the 
 King and Queen, and the Admiral was of opin- 
 ion that where wax was found there must be a 
 great many other valuable commodities. In one 
 of the houses was likewise found a man's head 
 hanging from a beam in a small covered bas- 
 ket ; the like they found in a house in one of 
 the other villages. The Admiral thought these 
 were heads of the principal men, as the houses 
 in which they were met with were of a very 
 large size, and that the persons to whom they 
 belonged were relations. 
 
 Friday, Nov. 30th. They could not put to sea, 
 the wind being from the E. and contrary. The 
 Admiral sent eight men armed, with two of the 
 indians on board, to explore the country, and ob- 
 tain some communication with the inhabitants. 
 They came to many houses without finding.withiu 
 them, person or thing, the inhabitants having fled. 
 At length they discovered four young men dig- 
 ging in the fields, who- perceiving the Spaniards, 
 
 * This according to Las Cnsas must have come from 
 .Vucatan. 
 
1 12 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 took to flight, and could not be overtaken. Thev 
 travelled a considerable distance and saw a great 
 many villages ; the land was very fertile and the 
 whole under cultivation. Large streams of wa- 
 ter were seen, and in the neighborhood of one, 
 they saw a canoe very finely built of a single log, 
 it was ninety-five spans in length, and capable of 
 carrying a hundred and fifty men. 
 
 Saturday, Dec. 1st. They remained still in port, 
 the wind continuing ahead with rain in abun- 
 dance. At the entrance of this harbour, which 
 was named Puerto Santo* they set up a cross in 
 the solid rock ; the point where this was done 
 is in the southern part near the mouth, and who- 
 ever wishes to sail into the port, should keep 
 near the northwesterly point rather than the 
 other, the depth at the foot of each being twelve 
 fathoms close to the shore, and free from ob- 
 structions; but at the entrance of the harbour 
 near the southeasterly point there is a shoal 
 which rises above the water, and so far from the 
 shore that a vessel may pass between the point 
 and it, in case of necessity. Round about the 
 shoal irnd the point there is a depth of twelve and 
 fifteen fathoms. Coming in, it is requisite to 
 
 steer SW. 
 
 Sunday, Dec. 2d. The wind still contrary, 
 
 they could not depart, although every night there 
 * Baracoa. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 113 
 
 blew a land-breeze. The Admiral states that 
 there would be no danger of driving ashore in 
 this harbour, in the most violent storms, by rea- 
 son of the shoal at the entrance. In the mouth 
 of the river a ship's boy found some stones which 
 seemed to contain gold, these were preserved for 
 the King and Queen. A lombarda shot from 
 this place were large rivers. 
 
 Monday, Dec. 3d. Still detained in port by 
 the weather. The Admiral resolved to visit a 
 fine cape which he saw a mile distant from the 
 harbour at the SE. He accordingly went with 
 the boats and some of the crew armed. At the 
 foot of the cape he found the mouth of a pleasant 
 river ;* they rowed to the SE. to enter it, and 
 found it a hundred paces wide : the depth at the 
 mouth was a fathom, but within increased to 
 twelve, and there was room enough for all the 
 ships in Spain. Passing a branch of the stream, 
 they proceeded to the SE. and came to a creek 
 or cove, in which they saw five large canoes, very 
 handsomely wrought, like fustas. At the foot 
 of the mountain they found the land all under 
 cultivation. The woods were very thick, and in 
 passing through them, they came to a shed very 
 well built and tightly covered, so that neither 
 sun nor rain could penetrate it : under it they 
 
 * Rio Boma- 
 14 
 
1 14 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 found a canoe made like the others, from a log, 
 as large as a Justa of sixteen oars, it was well 
 shaped, and very handsomely carved. They 
 ascended a mountain and observed the country 
 very level. Many productions were observed 
 such as gourds and the like, and the fields offer- 
 ed a delightful prospect. They came suddenly 
 upon a large town, and all the inhabitants upon 
 perceiving them immediately fled. The indian 
 who accompanied the Spaniards called out to 
 them not to fear, for they were friends. The 
 Admiral caused them to be presented with 
 hawk's bells, brass rings and strings of green and 
 yellow glass-beads, with the which they were 
 highly delighted. Having ascertained that they 
 possessed no gold nor any precious commodity, 
 the Spaniards returned to their boats. The 
 country was found very populous, but the most of 
 the inhabitants fled through fear. The Admiral 
 declares to the King and Queen that these peo- 
 ple are such cowards that ten men might put 
 ten thousand of them to flight. They carry no 
 weapons save sticks with the ends a little hard- 
 ened in the fire, these were very easily obtain- 
 ed from them. Arrived at the boats, two men 
 weve sent off to a place where the Admiral 
 thought he had seen a large bee-hive. Before 
 their return, many Indians came to the boats 
 where the Admiral was with his crew, and one 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 115 
 
 of them jumper] into the river and came to the 
 stern of the Admiral's boat where he made a 
 long speech, nothing of which was understood, 
 except that the other indians held up their hands 
 to heaven from time to time, and uttered loud 
 cries. The Admiral was of opinion that they 
 were assuring him of the pleasure which his ar- 
 rival gave them, but presently observed that the 
 indian on board changed colour* and trembled 
 exceedingly, entreating the Admiral by signs to 
 leave the river, for the natives were about to 
 kill them all. He then took a cross-bow from 
 one of the Spaniards and held it out towards the 
 indian, and uttered a speech which the Admiral 
 understood to be a menace of hostility against 
 them. He also seized a sword, and drawing it 
 from the scabbard showed it to them, using the 
 same language, which being heard by those on 
 shore they all took to flight. The indian contin- 
 ued trembling and overpowered with fear, al- 
 though a stout, well made fellow. The Admiral 
 determined not to leave the river, but rowed for 
 the shore toward a place where he saw many 
 people, all of them naked, and stained red, some 
 with tufts of feathers in their heads, and all hav- 
 ing javelins. ' I approached them' says he, ' and 
 gave them some pieces of bread, demanding their 
 
 * In the Spanish 'turned as yellow as wax.' 
 
116 
 
 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 javelins, which they gave me for a hawk's bell to 
 one, a little brass ring to another and a few beads 
 to another. In this manner they were all paci- 
 fied, and came to the boats offering their articles 
 for any thing we chose to give them in return. 
 A turtle had been killed, and the shell lay in 
 pieces in the boat ; the ship-boys purchased the 
 javelins of the indians with it, at the rate of a 
 handful of them for a scale. These people are 
 like the others I have seen, and imagine we 
 have come from heaven. They are ready to 
 barter any thing they possess for whatever we 
 choose to give them, without objecting to the 
 small value of it; and if they had spices or gold, 
 I believe it would be the same. I saw here a 
 handsome house of a moderate size, with two 
 doors, as all the others are; I entered it and 
 found a very singular contrivance in the manner 
 of alcoves, which I cannot describe ; from the 
 ceiling hung cockle shells and other things. I 
 took it to be a temple, and called the indians, de- 
 manding of them by signs whether they offered 
 up their devotions there, to which they replied 
 in the negative, and one of them climbed up, and 
 gave me the ornaments which were hanging 
 about ; some of them I accepted.' 
 
 Tuesday, Dec. 4th. They set sail with a light 
 wind, and left this harbour, which received the 
 name of Puerto Santo. At two leagues distance 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 117 
 
 they saw a fine river, mentioned yesterday.* 
 Kept along the coast, and found it, after having 
 passed a cape, to run ESE. and WN W., to a 
 cape which they named Cabo Lindo\: this is five 
 leagues E. by S. from another called Cabo del 
 Monte, and a league and a half from the last is a 
 river somewhat narrow, which appears to have 
 a safe end deep entrance. Three miles from 
 that, they saw another river, very large and 
 which to appearance came from a distance, it 
 was about a hundred paces wide, and eight 
 fathoms deep, with a good entrance free from 
 shoals ; the water was fresh to the sea ; these 
 facts were learned by dispatching a boat to sound 
 and examine it : the river appeared to bring as 
 great a volume of water to the sea, as any they 
 had seen, and probably had many towns on its 
 banks. Beyond Cabo Undo there was a bay of 
 considerable extent. 
 
 Wednesday, Dec. 5th. All last night they lay 
 to off Cabo Lindo, in order to examine the 
 land which extended to the east, and at sunrise 
 discovered another capef in that direction, 
 two leagues and a half distant, which having 
 passed, they found the coast began to tend to- 
 ward the south and southwest§ and presently dis- 
 
 * Rio Boma. f Punta del Frajle. 
 
 J Punta de los Azules. 
 
 § This is the eastern extremity of Cuba, called Punta 
 de Maici. 
 
118 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 covered a lofty and handsome cape in that direc- 
 tion, about seven leagues from the last. The 
 Admiral was inclined to steer that waj, but his 
 desire to visit the island of Babeque, which ac* 
 cording to the indians was to the northeast, re- 
 strained him. The wind, however, blowing from 
 the Northeast hindered him from steering that 
 way ; preceeding onward, therefore, he descri- 
 ed land in the southeast* which appeared to be 
 quite a large island, and according to the infor- 
 mation of the indians was very populous, and 
 called Bohio. The inhabitants of Cuba or Juana, 
 and those of the other islands entertained a great 
 dread of these people, imagining them to be 
 man-eaters. Other surprising relations the in- 
 dians communicated by signs to the Spaniards, of 
 which the Admiral does not avow his belief, but 
 thinks the indians of Bohio to be a more inge- 
 nious and artful race than the others, as they 
 were accustomed to make prisoners of them. — 
 The wind being northeast and inclining toward 
 the north he determined to leave Cuba or Jutman 
 which hitherto he had taken for a continent by 
 its size, having sailed along the coast a hundred 
 and twenty leagues. He therefore left the shore 
 and steered southeast by east, as the land last 
 discovered appeared in that direction. He took 
 
 * Espanola. 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 119 
 
 this course because the wind always came round 
 from the north to northeast, and from thence to 
 east and southeast. It blew hard and they car- 
 ried all sail, having a smooth sea, and a current 
 favoring them, so that from morning to one 
 o'clock in the afternoon they sailed eight miles 
 an hour, for nearly six hours ; the nights are stat- 
 ed to be here nearly fifteen hours long. After 
 this, they went ten miles an hour, and by sunset 
 had made a progress of eighty-eight miles, which 
 are twenty-two leagues, all to the southeast. As 
 night was coming on the caravel Nina, being a 
 swift sailer, was dispatched ahead to look out 
 for a harbor ; she came to the mouth of one* 
 which resembled the bay of Cadiz, and it being 
 dark, they sent the boat to sound it ; the boat 
 carried a light, and before the Admiral could 
 come up with the Nina, who was beating up and 
 down, waiting for the boat to make her a signal 
 to enter, the light disappeared. Upon this she 
 stood off to sea, making a light for the Admiral, 
 and coming up they related what had happened. 
 Presently the light on board the boat again ap- 
 peared, when the Nina stood in for the land; 
 the Admiral was not able to follow, but remained 
 beating about all night. 
 
 Thursday, Dec. 6th. At day break he fonnd 
 himself four leagues from the harbour, which he 
 
 * St. Nicholas in Espanola, 
 
120 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 named Puerto Maria, and saw a fine cape which 
 bore south by west ; to this he gave the name of 
 Cabo del Estrella* it was twenty eight miles dis- 
 tant, and appeared to be the southern extremity 
 of the island. There appeared land in the eastt 
 like an island of a moderate size, about forty 
 miles distant. Another handsome and finely 
 shaped headland was seen bearing east by south, 
 at a distance of fifty-four miles, this he called 
 Cabo del Elefante.\ Another bore east south- 
 east, twenty-eight miles off, which he named 
 Cabo de Cinquin. A large opening or bay which 
 seemed to be a river § was observed about twen- 
 ty miles distant in the direction of southeast by 
 east. There appeared to be between the two 
 last mentioned capes a very wide channel|| which 
 the sailors said separated an island from the main 
 land; this island he named Torluga. The land 
 here appeared lofty, and not mountainous but 
 even and level like the finest arable tracts. The 
 whole or great part of it seemed under cultiva- 
 tion, and the plantations resembled the wheat 
 fields in the plain of Cordova in the month of 
 May. Many fires were seen during the night? 
 
 * This is cape St. Nicholas. | A continuation of the coast. 
 % Punta Palmista. § Puerto Escudo. 
 
 j| Channel of Tortuga. 
 
GP COLUMBUS. 121 
 
 and by day, a great number of smokes, which to 
 appearance were signals giving notice of some 
 people with whom they were at war. The 
 whole coast runs to the east. In the evening 
 the Admiral entered the abovementioned har- 
 
 J) 
 
 bor, which he named Puerto de San Nicolas, it 
 being the day of that saint : he was astonished on 
 entering, to observe the goodness and beauty of 
 the harbour, and although he had highly praised 
 the ports of Cuba, he declares that this is not 
 inferior to any of them, but rather exceeds, and 
 differs from them all. The entrance has a 
 width of a league and a half, where a vessel 
 should steer SSE. there being sufficient room 
 to steer in any direction. It extends in this 
 manner to the SSE. two leagues : Here is a 
 fine beach with a river, and trees of a thou- 
 sand sorts all loaded with fruit, which the Ad- 
 miral took for spices and nutmegs, but being un- 
 ripe he could not get any knowledge of them. 
 T he water in this harbour is of a surprising depth* 
 they not being able to reach bottom at a short 
 distance from the shore with a line of forty fath- 
 oms ; in other parts they found fifteen fathom?, 
 and a clear bottom ; not a shoal is to be seen 
 throughout the harbour, and the shore is so bold 
 that an oar's length from it the water is five 
 fathoms deep. Here is room sufficient for a 
 thousand carracks to sail about in. At the SSE. 
 15 
 
122 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 the harbour offers a recess opening towards the 
 NE., of about half a league in depth, and pre- 
 serving the same breadth throughout its whole 
 extent. This is shut in after such a manner, 
 that within it the main entrance of the harbour 
 cannot be seen. The depth of the water is 
 every where eleven fathoms, with a fine clean 
 sand at the bottom ; the shore is bold, having 
 eight fathoms water within a few feet distance. 
 Here is a fine dry air, and the shore around free 
 from wood. The land appeared the most rocky 
 of any they had seen ; the trees small, and many 
 similar to those of Spain, as evergreen oaks, and 
 strawberry trees; the same they remarked of 
 the herbs. Since they had been in this part of 
 the world, they had not experienced so cool a 
 temperature of the air as they found at this 
 place. A beautiful plain lay opposite the en- 
 trance of the harbour, through the midst of 
 which flowed the river mentioned above. The 
 neighbourhood, the Admiral thought to be ex- 
 tremely populous, from the number and size of 
 the canoes which were seen ; some of them 
 were as large as a fusta of fifteen oars. The 
 indians all took to flight on perceiving the ships. 
 Those whom the Spaniards had on board grew 
 so earnest to return to their homes that the Ad- 
 miral says he had some intention of carrying 
 them thither at his departure from this place, 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 123 
 
 and that they were mistrustful of him for not 
 taking his route that way. For this reason he 
 declares that he put no trust in any of their rep- 
 resentations, nor they in his. They appeared to 
 have the greatest fear imaginable of the people 
 of this island. The Admiral found that if he 
 wished to obtain any communication with those 
 on shore, it would be necessary to wait here 
 some days, which he was unwilling to do, as he 
 could not depend upon the weather, and wished 
 to make further discoveries. He hoped in our 
 Lord that he should be able through the me- 
 dium of the indians on board, to have some con- 
 versation with them upon his return ; and may 
 it please the Almighty, says he that I may find 
 some good traffic in gold before that time. 
 
 Friday, Dec. 7th. At daybreak, they set sail 
 and left the port of San Nicolas with a south- 
 westerly wiud, and stood on their course two 
 leagues to the NE. towards a cape which forms 
 the carenero, when a bay was seen to the SE. 
 and Cabo de la Estrella to the SW. twenty-four 
 miles distant. From thence they proceeded to 
 the east, along the coast, about forty-eight miles 
 to Cabo Cinquin, twenty miles of which course 
 they had gone E. by N. They found the land 
 high and the water deep, close to the shore 
 twenty and thirty fathoms, and a lombarda shot 
 distant, no bottom ; all which was proved by 
 
124 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 actual experiment of the Admiral through the day. 
 He remarks that if the space between the bay 
 abovementioned and the harbour of San Nicolas 
 were cut through, it would form an island of three 
 or four miles in circuit. The land, as before, very 
 high and a trees not large but like evergreen 
 oaks and strawberry trees, the country closely 
 resembling Castile. Two leagues before arriv- 
 ing at Cabo Cinquin, they discovered an opening 
 like a gap in the mountain* within which was 
 seen a very large valley, covered apparently with 
 barley, a sign that this valley abounded with 
 settlements ; at the back of it were lofty and 
 extensive mountains. Arrived at Cabo de Cinquin 
 they found Cabo de Tortuga to bear NE., thirty- 
 two miles distant. About a lombarda-shot from 
 Cabo de Cinquin, there is a rock rising above the 
 water, very easily noticed. At this place Cabo 
 del Elefante bore E. by S., seventy miles distant, 
 the land all very lofty. Six leagues further on- 
 ward was a bay,t within which they discovered 
 extensive valleys and fields, with very high 
 mountains, the whole country appearing like 
 Castile. At eight miles distance they found a 
 river, which was narrow although deep, and 
 might easily admit a carrack, the mouth without 
 banks or shallows. Sixteen miles further along they 
 
 * Bahia Mosquito. t Puerto Escudo, 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 125 
 
 came to a harbour,* both broad, and of such a 
 depth that no bottom was obtained at the en- 
 trance, and the water was fifteen fathom sdeep 
 a few feet from the shore ; it extended about a 
 mile into the land. As the sky was very cloudy 
 and threatened rain, an unfavourable state upon 
 a coast, especially a strange one, the Admiral 
 determined to put in here, although it was no 
 later in the day than one o'clock, and a strong wind 
 blew astern. This harbour he named Puerto 
 de la Conception, and entering, landed near a 
 small stream which flowed through fields and 
 plains of wonderful beauty. They carried nets 
 with them for fishing, and while rowing to the 
 land, a skate similar to those of Spain, leaped 
 into the boat ; this was the first instance of their 
 meeting with a fish which resembled those of 
 their own country. Many of these were taken 
 by the sailors, as well as soles, and other fish 
 like the Spanish. Going some distance round 
 the country they observed the soil all under cul- 
 tivation, and heard the songs of the nightingale 
 and many other Spanish birds. They met five 
 indians who immediately fled. A myrtle-tree 
 was seen, and other trees and plants like those of 
 Castile, which, in fact, the whole country resem- 
 bles. 
 
 x Bahia Mosquito. 
 
126 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 Saturday, Dec 8th. It rained very hard, with 
 a strong north wind. The harbour was found 
 secure from all winds exGept the north, which 
 causes a great surf, driving the vessels from their 
 moorings. At midnight the wind shifted to the 
 NE., and afterward to the E., from which quar- 
 ters the harbour is well sheltered by the island 
 of Tortuga, which lies off against it, thirty-six 
 miles distant.* 
 
 Sunday, Dec. 9th. This day it continued to 
 rain and the weather seemed wintry like Octo- 
 ber in Castile. No settlement except a single 
 house was seen at the Port of San Nicolas; this 
 was a handsome one, and better constructed than 
 those they had observed in other parts. This 
 is a very large island, says the Admiral, and will 
 undoubtedly measure two hundred leagues in 
 circuit; the land is all cultivated to high degree, 
 and the towns are probably at a distance back 
 in the country, the inhabitants fleeing at the ap- 
 proach of the strangers, carrying their property 
 with them, and making signals by smoke about 
 the country, as in a state of war. The harbour 
 here is about a thousand paces or quarter of a 
 league wide at the mouth, without either bank or 
 shoal, but exceedingly deep to the edge of the 
 shore : it extends within about three thousand 
 
 * So in the text, but the true distance is only eleven 
 miles. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 127 
 
 paces, with a fine clear bottom ; any ship may 
 enter it and anchor without the least hazard. 
 Here are two small streams, and opposite the 
 mouth of the harbour, several plains the most 
 beautiful in the world, and resembling those of 
 Castile, except that they surpass them. On this 
 account the Admiral name.d the island, Espanola. 
 
 Monday, Dec. 10th. The wind blew strong 
 from the NE., and they dragged their anchors with 
 half the length of the cable, at which the Admi- 
 ral wondered, and ordered the cables to be veer- 
 ed out. Perceiving that the weather was unfa- 
 vorable for his setting sail, he dispatched on 
 shore six men, well armed and equipped, for the 
 purpose of penetrating into the country and ob- 
 taining some communication with the natives. 
 They went and returned without seeing any of 
 the inhabitants, or any dwellings save a few huts. 
 They met with some narrow paths, and places 
 where fires had been made. The country ap- 
 peared the finest in the world, and they found 
 mastick trees in abundance, but this was not the 
 season for collecting it, as the gum does not 
 concrete. 
 
 Tuesday, Dec. 11th. The wind blowing E. 
 and NE., they did not set sail. Directly oppo- 
 site the harbour, as stated above, lies the island 
 of Tortuga ; this appears of a very large size, 
 and the coast runs in the same direction as the 
 
128 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 island of Espanola, the distance between them 
 being at the most, ten leagues,* that is to say, 
 from Cabo de Cinquin to the extremity of Tor- 
 tuga, after which the coast tends to the South. 
 The Admiral was desirous of proceeding along 
 the channel between these two islands, in order 
 to take a survey of Espanola, which affords the 
 finest view in the world. The indians also in- 
 formed him that this was the course he must 
 take to reach the island of Babeque, which they 
 described as very large, with rivers, valleys, and 
 lofty mountains. The island of Bohio, they 
 stated, was larger than that of Juana, which the 
 inhabitants called Cuba, and was not surrounded 
 by water, but as nearly as could be understood 
 from them, was a continent, and situated behind 
 Espanola, which they called Caritaba. The in- 
 habitants of all these islands live in great fear of 
 the people of Ca?iiba, and the Admiral here re- 
 peats as he has done in many places, that Can- 
 iba means no other than the people of the Great 
 Can, who live somewhere in this neighborhood, 
 and come in their vessels and make prisoners of 
 the indians, who not returning, their countrymen 
 imagine their enemies have devoured them. 
 Each day, as the Admiral remarks, they improv- 
 ed in their communications with the indians on 
 
 * Error, as noted above. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 129 
 
 board, and conversed with them without such 
 misunderstandings as formerly. They sent on 
 shore and found a great many mastick trees, but 
 the gum would not harden ; the Admiral thought 
 that this might be effected by water, and ob- 
 serves that in the island of Scio it is gathered in 
 March, but these countries being warmer, it 
 might probably be done in January. Many fish 
 like those of Castile were taken, such as dace, 
 salmon, poor-jacks, dories, pampanos, skates, car- 
 vinas and shrimps: pilchards were also seen. 
 Vast quantities of aloe were met with on shore. 
 Wednesday, Dec. 12th. They were still una- 
 ble to set sail, as the wind remained contrary. A 
 large cross was set up at the entrance of the 
 harbour, upon a beautiful spot upon the western 
 side, 'as an indication' in the words of the Admi- 
 ral, ' that your Highnesses possess the country, 
 and principally for a token of Jesus Christ our 
 Lord, and the honor of Christianity.' This being 
 done, three sailors went into the woods to view 
 the nighborhood and presently heard a sound of 
 the indians, a crowd of whom they shortly after 
 discovered completely naked ; they pursued and 
 called out after them, but -they all took to flight. 
 Having been directed by the Admiral to take some 
 of the natives if possible, as he wished to show 
 them some good offices, and dissipate their fear, 
 
 thinking from the fine appearance of the country 
 16 
 
130 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 that something valuable might be obtained here, 
 the Spaniards kept on in the pursuit, and succeed- 
 ed in capturing a female, handsome, and to ap- 
 pearance quite young; her they brought to the 
 ships where the Admiral conversed with her by 
 the interpretation of his own indians, as their lan- 
 guage was the same. He likewise caused her to 
 be clothed, and presenting her with glass beads, 
 hawk's bells and rings of brass, dismissed her 
 home with every civility. Some of the crew 
 were sent with her, as also three of the indians, 
 for the purpose of communicating with the in- 
 habitants. The sailors who carried her ashore 
 told the Admiral that she showed much reluc- 
 tance to leave the ship, and seemed inclined to 
 remain with the females on board, whom they 
 had taken at Puerto de Mares and Juana. The 
 indians with whom she was first in company, 
 came in a canoe, and when they came to the en- 
 trance of the harbour and perceived the ships, 
 abandoned their canoe, and fled towards the 
 houses, whither she now directed the Spaniards. 
 This woman wore a bit of gold at her nose, which 
 was an indication that it was to be found in the 
 island. 
 
 Thursday, Dec. 13th. The three men whom 
 the Admiral had dispatched into the country with 
 the woman, returned, not having gone to the in- 
 dian town, by reason either of the distance, or 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 131 
 
 their fear. They affirmed that the next day 
 there would come many of the inhabitants to the 
 ships, as they would be encouraged by the ac- 
 counts which the woman must give them. The 
 Admiral, as he was desirous of ascertaining 
 whether there was any thing valuable here, 
 which he was inclined to believe, on account of 
 the beauty and fertility of the country, and wish- 
 ing to do every thing for the service of the King 
 and Queen, resolved to send again to the town, 
 confiding in the relation which the female must 
 have given them of the friendly disposition of the 
 Spaniards; for which purpose he selected nine 
 persons from the crew, and dispatched them well 
 armed and fitted for the enterprise, with one of 
 his indians. They set out, and proceeded to the 
 town,* which they found in an extensive valley, 
 four leagues and half to the SE. It was desert- 
 ed, as the inhabitants, perceiving the approach of 
 the Spaniards, had all fled, leaving every thing 
 behind them. The town consisted of a thousand 
 houses, and more than three thousand inhabitants. 
 The indian who accompanied the Spaniards ran 
 after the fugitives, calling out to them not to fear, 
 for the strangers were not from Cariba, but from 
 heaven, and gave many fine things to those whom 
 
 * Known afterwards by the name of Gros Morne, on the 
 bank of the Rio de los tres Rws, which runs into the sea 
 half a mile west of Port au Paix. 
 
132 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 they met. This had such an effect upon them, 
 that they took courage, and came in a body of 
 above a thousand to the Spaniards, putting their 
 hands upon their heads, which is a manifestation 
 of great reverence and friendship ; they stood 
 trembling before them until the Spaniards by ma- 
 ny assurances dissipated their apprehensions. 
 The men further related that having overcome 
 their dread, they went to their houses, and each 
 one came bringing food for their guests ; this con- 
 sisted of fish, and bread made of niames* which 
 are roots resembling large radishes, cultivated 
 throughout the country by the natives, and form- 
 ing their principal subsistence ; these they pre- 
 pare by baking and roasting; and the bread thus 
 made so nearly resembles chesnuts in taste, that 
 it might easily be mistaken for a preparation of 
 that fruit. The indian who accompanied the 
 Spaniards understanding that the Admiral wish- 
 ed to obtain a parrot, told this, as they were led 
 to suppose, to the inhabitants, who brought great 
 numbers of them immediately to their guests, and 
 gave them as many as they desired, without de- 
 manding any thing in return. They entreated 
 them not to return that night, and promised them 
 many things which they had in the mountains. 
 
 * Niames, names or ajes, a sort of sweet potatoes having 
 the taste of chesnuts. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 133 
 
 While they were together with the Spaniards 
 they espied a great multitude of people with the 
 husband of the woman whom they had taken 
 and entertained, this female they were carrying 
 upon their shoulders, and came to return thanks 
 to the Spaniards for the civilities which she had 
 received, from the Admiral, and the presents he 
 had given her. These people according to the 
 relation of the men, were the handsomest, and 
 best disposed, of any they had yet seen. The 
 Admiral says he knows not how they could be 
 better disposed than those of the other islands, 
 assuring us that he had found them of the very 
 best disposition. As to beauty, the men stated 
 that they exceeded the others beyond compari- 
 son, both males and females, being of a much 
 lighter colour, and that two young females were 
 seen as white as could be found in Spain. More- 
 over they affirmed that the most beautiful and 
 excellent territories in Castile, could not equal 
 those of this country; to which indeed, the Ad- 
 miral bore testimony, both in those he had be- 
 fore visited, and in those of the present place, 
 although he was informed that the land which 
 he saw about the harbour was nothing in com- 
 parison with the valley where the town stood; 
 to which the plain of Cordova was no more equal 
 than the night was to the day. The country, 
 according to their relation was cultivated every 
 
134 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 where, and a large and wide river* capable of 
 watering the whole territory, passed through the 
 valley. The trees were flourishing and full of 
 fruit, the plants very tall and luxuriant ; the paths 
 wide and commodious. The temperature like 
 April in Castile; the nightingale and other birds 
 were singing as at that season in Spain, and pro- 
 ducing, as they said, the most delightful melody 
 in the world. Crickets and frogs in abundance 
 were heard; the fish were like the Spanish. 
 Many mastick and aloe trees were seen, as also 
 cotton shrubs. No gold was found, which was 
 not surprising, they had been here so short a 
 lime. The Admiral here ascertained the length 
 of the day and night, and found that from sun- 
 rise to sunset there passed twenty glasses of half 
 an hour each, although he says there may be some 
 defect in the calculation from the glass not being 
 turned quickly enough, or the contrary. He 
 states further that he took an observation with 
 the quadrant and found the latitude to be seven- 
 teen degrees/!" 
 
 Friday, Dec. 14th. They left the port of Con- 
 ccpcion with a land breeze, which, however, soon 
 died away; the same they had experienced 
 every day they remained there. Afterwards 
 
 *Rio de los Tres Rios or Trois Rivieres. 
 
 |An error, either in writing or transcribing the journal ; 
 the true latitude is twenty degrees. 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 135 
 
 the wind sprung up from the east, and they 
 stood to the NNE. which course brought them 
 to the island of Tortuga. They descried a point 
 of this island, which they named Punt a Pierna ; 
 it was to the ENE. of the extremity of the isl- 
 and, about a dozen miles distant. They also dis- 
 covered another point to the NE., about sixteen 
 miles off, this they called Punta Lanzada, it was 
 forty-four miles, or eleven leagues from the ex- 
 tremity of the island, towards the ENE. Along 
 the coast there were several extensive beaches. 
 The whole island is high, but not mountainous, 
 and the land offers a beautiful prospect; it is 
 moreover populous like Espanola, and the coun- 
 try under such an extensive cultivation that it 
 appears like the plain of Cordova. Finding the 
 Avind unfavorable for proceeding to the island of 
 Baneque* the Admiral concluded to return to 
 Puerto de la Conception. There was a river 
 two leagues east of the harbour, which he was 
 unable to reach. 
 
 Saturday, Dec. 15th. Left the harbour again, 
 to proceed on their course ; but on putting to sea, 
 found a strong easterly wind ahead, upon which 
 they stood for Tortuga, and arriving at the isl- 
 and, stood about and steered towards the river, 
 which they saw the day before and could not 
 
 'This he has hitherto called liabeqnr . 
 
136 FIKST VOYAGE 
 
 reach, but were again unable to arrive there. 
 They came to anchor half a league to leeward, 
 at a beach with a good anchorage. The Admi- 
 ral went with the boats to view the river, and 
 entering an inlet near, found it was not the mouth. 
 Returning, he discovered it at last with only a 
 fathom's depth of water, and a strong current. 
 Here he entered with the intention of visiting 
 the settlements which the men he had sent into 
 the country, had seen in this quarter. The end 
 of a rope was carried on shore, and the boats 
 towed up against the stream the distance of two 
 lombarda-shots, not being able to proceed any 
 further from the velocity of the current. Some 
 houses were seen, and the valley where the 
 town was situated; a river, which was the one 
 they had entered, ran through the valley, and 
 the Admiral declares that he never witnessed a 
 more beautiful prospect. At the mouth of the 
 river they met some of the inhabitants, who im- 
 mediately fled. The Admiral states that these 
 people must have been very subject to incursions 
 from their enemies, as they displayed such a de- 
 gree of fear. Wherever the Spaniards came, 
 the inhabitants were observed to make signals 
 by smoke, all over the country, more especially 
 in Espanola and Tortuga. He named this val- 
 ley, Valledel Paraiso, (Vale of Paradise) and the 
 river, Guadalquivir, it being as wide as the river 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 137 
 
 of that name at Cordova ; the banks were rocky, 
 but pleasant and easy to travel. 
 
 Sunday, Dec. 16th. At midnight, set sail with 
 a light land breeze, and put to sea. At three 
 o'clock, it shifted to the East, when they stood 
 close upon the wind, and at a distance from the 
 land, half way between Espanola and Tortuga, 
 met with a canoe containing an indian, at which 
 the admiral was surprised, wondering how he 
 could keep the sea under so strong a wind. They 
 took him with his canoe on board, and feasted 
 him, presenting him with glass beads, hawk's 
 bells and brass rings. The ships then steered to 
 land towards a village* near the shore about six- 
 teen miles distant, where they anchored, finding 
 a good place near the village. This appeared to 
 be a new settlement ; the houses being all of re- 
 cent construction. The indian went on shore 
 with his canoe, giving a favorable account of the 
 Spaniards to his countrymen; they were already 
 prepossessed in their favor, from the information 
 they had received of the inhabitants of the town 
 which had been before visited by them. Present- 
 ly there came to the shore more than five hun- 
 dred people, and shortly after, their king. They 
 assembled upon the beach, close to which the 
 ships were anchored. Ere long they came in 
 
 * Port Paix, 
 
 17 
 
138 r FIRST VOYAGK 
 
 crowds on board, but brought nothing with them, 
 except that a few wore bits of very fine gold at 
 their ears and noses; these they very readily 
 gave to the Spaniards. The Admiral ordered 
 every civility to be shown them, 'because' as lie 
 observes ' these are the best and most gentle peo- 
 ple in the world, and especially, as I hope strong- 
 ly in our Lord, that your Highnesses will under- 
 take to convert them to Christianity, and that 
 they may become your subjects, in which light, 
 indeed J already regard them.' They saw the 
 knig on the beach, and the natives around him, 
 oifering their respects. The admiral sent him a 
 present, which he received in great state. He 
 appeared to be a youth of about twenty-one 
 years, and was attended by an aged tutor and 
 other counsellors who gave him their advice, and 
 answered the questions put to them. The king 
 himself spoke -but little. One of the indians be- 
 longing to the ships conversed with him, and in- 
 formed him that the Spaniards had come from 
 heaven, and were going to the island of Bnnequc, 
 in search of jjold. He answered that this was 
 well, and in that island there was much of the 
 same metal. To the alguacil of the Admiral 
 who carried the present, he described the course 
 to be taken, and informed him that in two days 
 lie might arrive there ; he further added that if 
 the Spaniards were in want of any thing which 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 139 
 
 his country furnished, he would give it them with 
 much good will. The people here were all na- 
 ked, king as well as subjects, the females with- 
 out displaying any symptoms of bashl'ulness. Both 
 sexes were handsomer than any they had hither- 
 to seen, their colour light, and if clothed and 
 guarded from the sun and air would be nearly as 
 fair as the inhabitants of Spain; the temperature 
 of the air being cool and pleasant to a high de- 
 gree. The land is very lofty, covered with 
 plains and vallejs, and the highest mountains are 
 arable. No part of Castile could produce a ter- 
 ritory comparable to this in beauty and fertility. 
 The whole island and that of Tortuga, are cov- 
 ered with cultivated helds like the plains of Cor- 
 dova. In these they raise ajes, which are slips 
 set iu the ground, at the foot of which grow roots 
 like carrots; they grate these to powder, knead 
 up and make into bread of a very pleasant taste 
 like chesnuts: the stalk is set out anew, and pro- 
 duces another root, and this is repeated four or 
 five times. The largest and most excellent that 
 had been met with any where (the Admiral says 
 they are also found in Guinea) were those of this 
 island, being of the size of a man's leg. The in- 
 habitants here according to the statement of the 
 Admiral, were of a stout size and courageous 
 temper, very different from the timid islanders of 
 the other parts; agreeable in their intercourse 
 
140 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 and without any religion. The trees grew with 
 such luxuriance that their leaves were rather 
 black than green. It was wonderfully enchanting 
 to view the valleys, the streams of fine water ? 
 the fields of the bread root, the pastures fit for 
 flocks of all descriptions, (although they possess- 
 ed none,) the grounds adapted for gardens, and 
 for every thing a man could desire. In the evening 
 the king came on board ; the Admiral showed him 
 every honor and informed him that he was a sub- 
 ject of the King and Queen of Castile, who were 
 the greatest princes in the world; neither the in- 
 dians of the ship, who acted as interpreters, nor 
 the king himself, believed this, but continued in 
 the notion that the strangers came from heaven, 
 Where they imagined the kingdom of Castile was 
 situated, and not upon this earth. Food of the 
 Spaniards was given to the king, of which he ate 
 a mouthful and gave the rest to his tutor and 
 counsellors, and the others about him. 'Your 
 Highnesses may rest assured,' says the Admiral, 
 ' that these countries are so extensive, so excel- 
 lent and fertile, especially the island of Espanola, 
 that no person is competent to describe them, 
 and no one would believe what was said of them, 
 without ocular proof. And your Highnesses may 
 entertain no doubt that they are as much your 
 own as the territory of Castile, for nothing is 
 wanting to this purpose, but a settlement here. 
 
OP COLUMBUS, 141 
 
 and orders what to perform. With the men I 
 have with me, which are not in great number, I 
 can traverse these islands without opposition, for 
 I have seen three of my crew go on shore, and a 
 whole multitude of the indians take to flight with- 
 out offering to resist them. They are all naked, 
 and neither possess weapons nor know any thing 
 about them. So timid are they, that a thousand 
 of them would not oppose three of us. Thus 
 they are very well fitted to be governed and set 
 to work to till the land, and do whatever is ne- 
 cessary 3 they may be also taught to build houses 
 and wear clothes, and adopt our customs.' 
 
 Monday, Dec. 17th. At night it blew hard 
 from the ENE., but the sea was not much agi- 
 tated in consequence, by reason of the island of 
 Tortuga which lay off against them and afforded 
 a shelter. They remained at anchor all day, 
 and the sailors were sent with nets to fish. The 
 indians took great pleasure in their intercourse 
 with the Spaniards, and brought them certain 
 arrows which belonged to the people of Caniba, 
 or the Canibales : these were stalks of cane, 
 pointed at the ends with large sticks, which 
 were sharp and hardened in the fire. They 
 were exhibited by two indians who had lost 
 portions of flesh from their bodies ; these they 
 informed the Admiral, the canibales had eaten, 
 which he did not believe. Some of the Span- 
 
142 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 iards were sent on shore to the town, and for 
 strings of beads bought some pieces of gold 
 beaten out into thin plates. They saw a native 
 whom the Admiral took for the governor of the 
 district, and whom the indians call cacique ; he 
 had a plate of gold as large as the hand, which 
 he appeared desirous of bartering ; this he car- 
 ried to his house and procured to be cut into 
 pieces, which he traded away one by one ; the 
 whole disposed of, he informed them by signs 
 that he had sent for more, which would be 
 brought the next day. These things, says the 
 Admiral, with the manners of the people, their 
 practice of communicating their advice, and their 
 gentleness of behavior, show them to be more 
 ingenious and of a better understanding than the 
 others we have seen. In the evening came a 
 canoe with forty men from Tortuga, on whose 
 arrival at land, all the indians on shore sat down 
 in signal of friendship, and most of those in the 
 canoe landed. The Cacique stood up and with 
 a speech apparently consisting of threats, sent 
 them back to their canoe and threw water at 
 them; also taking up stones from the beach he 
 threw them into the sea; and after they had all 
 with ready obedience gone into the canoe, he 
 put a stone into the hand of the alguacil whom 
 the Admiral had sent to land with the notary and 
 others, that he might throw it at the canoe, 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 143 
 
 which he declined doing. The canoe immedi- 
 ately returned home. The cacique made every 
 demonstration of favour to the Admiral, and 
 told him that at Tortuga there was more gold 
 than in Espanola, it being nearer to Bamque. 
 The Admiral gives it as his opinion that neither 
 in Espanola nor Tortuga are there mines of 
 gold, but that it is brought from Baneque, and that 
 these people get but little, because they have 
 nothing to give in exchange for it, their country 
 being so extensive that the inhabitants are not 
 obliged to practice much labour for their subsis- 
 tence, nor to procure clothing, as they go naked. 
 He believed himself now near the spot where the 
 gold was found, and that our Lord was about to 
 direct him thither. He learnt that from hence 
 to Baneque* was four days' voyage, amounting 
 perhaps, to thirty or forty leagues, which dis- 
 tance they might sail with a good wind in a single 
 day. 
 
 Tuesday, Dec. 18th. They remained at the 
 anchorage through the day, not having a wind, 
 and because the Cacique had told them he had 
 gold to bring. The Admiral says he did not 
 much regard the amount of this metal which he 
 was likely to obtain here, but wished to know 
 
 * This place was never found. Perhaps the island of 
 Jamaica was meant. 
 
144 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 whence it came, as there were no mines in the 
 island. In the morning lie ordered the ships to 
 be dressed out with their flags and arms for a 
 festival, in honor of the Annunciation of the Bless- 
 ed Virgin, and fired many salutes. The king of 
 the island left his home, which was about five 
 leagues, off, and came to the town near the ships 
 at three o'clock ; there were some of the Span- 
 iards on shore whom the Admiral had sent to 
 ascertain whether the indians had brought their 
 gold. These informed, that above two hundred 
 men came with the king, four of them carrying 
 him upon a sort of bier. The Admiral being at 
 his meal in the cabin, the king with all his at- 
 tendants came to the ship, and observes, ' Your 
 Highnesses would have been pleased to witness 
 the honor and reverence they showed him, naked 
 as they are. On coming on board and finding 
 me at table in the cabin he came in the most re- 
 spectful manner and sat down by me, and would 
 not suffer me to rise, or to leave off* eating. I 
 thought he would be pleased with some of our 
 viands, and accordingly ordered a portion to be 
 placed before him, which he ate. Upon enter- 
 ing the cabin he made a sign with the hand for 
 his people to remain without, which they did 
 with the greatest readiness and respect in the 
 world, and all sat down upon deck, except two 
 men of mature age, whom I took for his coun- 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 145 
 
 sellors ; these came and sat down at his feet, and 
 the king would take a small mouthful of the vic- 
 tuals and give the rest to his attendants who ate 
 it; the same he did with the drink which was 
 offered him, putting it to his mouth, and then 
 passing it to the others ; all this was done with 
 great state, and very few words, which as near 
 as I could understand what he said, were uttered 
 in a very sensible manner, his two attendants 
 watching his countenance, conversing with him, 
 and answering for him with the greatest degree 
 of veneration. The meal finished, an attendant 
 brought me a girdle shaped like those of Castile, 
 but of different workmanship, this he presented 
 to me and I accepted, as well as two pieces of 
 gold, beaten very thin, of which metal I am in- 
 clined to think they possess very little, although 
 they are in the neighborhood of the place where 
 it is produced in abundance. I saw that he was 
 pleased with the hanging over my bed, and made 
 him a present of it, with some fine amber beads 
 which I wore upon my neck, and some red shoes 
 and a flask of orange-flower water; with these 
 gifts he was wonderfully delighted, and both he 
 and his counsellors appeared to feel much regret 
 that we could not understand one anothers' 
 language. By all I could gather from him, he 
 informed me that if I desired anything of his, the 
 whole island was at my service. I then produced 
 18 
 
146 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 a gold excelentc,* upon which the images of your 
 Highnesses were stamped, and showed it to him, 
 letting him know, as I had done before, that your 
 Highnesses reigned over the first kingdom in the 
 world, and that there were no where so great 
 princes. I also exhibited to him the royal stand- 
 ards and the banners of the cross, which he much 
 admired, and spoke with his counsellors respect- 
 ing the great power of your Highnesses who had 
 sent me such a distance from heaven, to these 
 parts. Many other things passed, of which I 
 understood nothing, save that they manifested 
 great wonder.' 
 
 As it grew late he desired to return to land, 
 whither the Admiral dispatched him in the boat 
 with great honor, firing a salute. Arrived on shore 
 he ascended his bier and went up into the island 
 accompanied by the whole multitude ; his son was 
 carried behind him upon the shoulders of one of 
 the most honorable men. Wherever the indians 
 met with any of the sailors, they gave them food 
 and showed them great respect. One of them 
 encountered the troop accompanying the king 
 home, and stated that he saw the presents the 
 Admiral had given, carried before the king, each 
 separate article by one of the principal men, as 
 was judged from the appearance. The king's 
 
 * Spanish coin. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 147 
 
 son followed his father with an equal train of at- 
 tendants, as also a brother of the king in the same 
 manner, except that he went on foot, being led 
 by the arms by two honorable men. This per- 
 son came to the ship after the king had left her, 
 and the Admiral made him a few presents, learn- 
 ing now, that the king was called in the language 
 of the indians Cacique. This day little gold was 
 obtained, but the Admiral was given to under- 
 stand by an old man, that there were many is- 
 lands in the neighbourhood, at the distance of a 
 hundred leagues and more, as near as he could 
 gather, where much gold was obtained, and that 
 in some of them it was found in such plenty that 
 the inhabitants collected and boulted it with 
 sieves, after which they melted and beat it into 
 bars and many other shapes which were describ- 
 ed by signs. One of the islands was said to be 
 totally composed of gold. The old man pointed 
 out the direction in which these countries lay, 
 and the Admiral determined to proceed thither. 
 He remarks that if this person had not been one 
 of the principal men of the king, he should have 
 taken and carried him along with him, or had he 
 understood his language would have intreated 
 him to that effect, and thinks as he was so well 
 pleased with the Spaniards, that he would very 
 willingly have accompanied them; nevertheless, 
 as he considered these people to belong to the 
 
148 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 sovereigns of Castile he was unwilling to offend 
 them. A lofty cross was set up in the square 
 or centre of the village, in which work the indians 
 assisted much, and repeated, as the Admiral says, 
 prayers and adorations, from which circumstance 
 he hopes in our Lord that these islands will all 
 become christian. 
 
 Wednesday, Dec. 19th. They set sail at night 
 to leave the gulf formed by the island of Tortu- 
 ga and Espanola. Upon the approach of day the 
 wind shifted to the E., for which reason they 
 were unable through the day to get out from be- 
 tween the islands ; night coming on they found it 
 impossible to reach a harbour* they saw near. In 
 the neighbourhood of that place they espied four 
 capes, and a bay and river, also another large 
 bayt where there was a village, in the rear of 
 which they saw a valley among several very high 
 mountains; these mountains were covered with 
 trees, which the Admiral judged to be pines. 
 At the back of the capes which he called Los 
 dos Hermanos, there was a mountain very large 
 and high,which runs from NE. to S W. ESE. from 
 another cape named Cabo de Torres^, there was 
 a little isle which he called Saint Thomas, the 
 next day being the anniversary of that saint. He 
 
 * Puerto de la Granja. | Port Margot. 
 
 J Punta de Limbe. 
 
OP COLUMBU9. 149 
 
 judged that this whole country abounded in capes 
 and excellent harbours, from what he could ob- 
 serve at sea. West of the isle abovementioned, 
 was a cape running far into the sea, lofty in some 
 parts and in others low, from this circumstance 
 he named it Cabo alto y baxo* Seventy miles 
 E. by S. from Camino de Torres was a mountain 
 loftier than any other, which extended into the 
 sea ; it appeared like an island, on account of a 
 gap towards the land; he called it Monte Cari- 
 bata, as the district around was named Caribata ; 
 it was a beautiful height without clouds or snow, 
 but covered with flourishing trees. The weather 
 here, with respect to the air and temperature 
 was like March in Castile, and the trees and 
 herbs as in May in that country. The nights 
 were fourteen hours long. 
 
 Thursday, Dec. 20th. At sunset this day they 
 entered a harbourt between the island of St. 
 Thomas and Cabo de Caribata ; here they an- 
 chored. The harbour was found a very good 
 one, and capacious enough to hold all the ships 
 in Christendom. The entrance appeared imprac- 
 ticable from without, on account of several 
 ledges of rocks which run from the mountain 
 nearly to the island ; these are scattered about 
 in an irregular manner, some near the land and 
 
 * Point and Isle Margot, t Bahia de Acul. 
 
150 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 others off at sea, which renders it necessary to 
 take great care in sailing in, the channels being 
 very narrow, although deep, having seven fath- 
 oms water, and within the rocks twelve fathoms. 
 A ship might lie here moored with any sort of 
 rope, and be safe from all winds. Near the 
 mouth of the harbour was a plantation of canes 
 at the west of a little sandy islet, which w s 
 overgrovui with trees, and at the foot of which 
 were seven fathoms water. The harbour is safe 
 from all the storms which can blow. From this 
 place appeared a wide and cultivated valley 
 which descended to the sea from the SE., and 
 was totally shut in by exceedingly tall mountains 
 which seemed to rise to heaven; these presented 
 the most delightful view, being covered wi:h 
 luxuriant trees. No doubt there are mountains 
 here loftier than the island of Teneritfe which 
 is held to be the highest in the world, Mere is 
 another isle,* a league from that of St. Thomas, 
 and within it another, all having fine harbours, 
 but where it is necessary to look out for the 
 shoals. Villages were seen, and smokes made by 
 the inhabitants. 
 
 Friday, Dec. 21. The Admiral went with the 
 boats to examine the harbour, and after having 
 surveyed it declares that it is equalled by none 
 
 * Isla de Ratas. 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 151 
 
 which he has seen elsewhere. He excuses him- 
 self, saying that he has been so abundant in his 
 praises of the others, that he has nothing left to 
 say for this, and adds that he fears to be taken 
 for an extravagant exaggerator of the truth, but 
 is encouraged by the reflexion that he has in 
 company, mariners of experience who will con- 
 firm his account. He repeats that the commen- 
 dations he has bestowed upon the other ports 
 are true, and the superiority he has assigned this, 
 he affirms to be true likewise, adding ' I have 
 followed the seas for twenty-three years, without 
 being on shore any space of time worth account- 
 ing, and have seen all the East and West, and 
 been to the North where England is situated, 
 and even to Guinea, but in none of these coun- 
 tries are to be found ports of such excellence as 
 are to be met with here ; and as I go on making 
 discoveries they show themselves better and bet- 
 ter, as I find by carefully examining my journal : 
 and I again affirm that this is superior to them 
 all, and large enough to contain all the ships in 
 the world, and so well sheltered that a ship might 
 ride with safety, although moored with the rot- 
 tenest rope in the world.' From the entrance 
 to the bottom of the harbour is a distance of 
 five leagues.* Fields were seen under cultiva- 
 
 * Error, five miles. 
 
152 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 tion, indeed this was the case every where. 
 Two men were dispatched from the boats, and 
 ordered to ascend a height and look out after 
 the villages of the inhabitants, as none were seen 
 from the sea, although it was judged there were 
 some in the neighborhood, by a canoe with In- 
 dians having come last night about ten o'clock, 
 to gaze at the ships, these men the Admiral pre- 
 sented with some trifles which pleased them 
 greatly. The two Spaniards returned, informing 
 that they had discovered a large town* at a little 
 distance from the sea ; the Admiral ordered the 
 boats to row that way, and presently espied sev- 
 eral indians coming down to the shore ; they 
 seemed to be fearful of the Spaniards, and the 
 Admiral directed the boats to be stopped and 
 the indians on board to speak to those on land 
 and tell them they were friends, upon which the 
 natives came close to the water's edge and the 
 boats proceeded to land ; the inhabitants now 
 banished all their fears and came down in such 
 numbers as to cover the beach, making a thou- 
 sand civilities to the Spaniards, men, women, and 
 children. They ran here and there bringing 
 bread made of niames, which they name ajes, 
 this was very white and good; they also brought 
 water in calabashes and earthen vessels, shaped 
 
 t Acul. 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 153 
 
 like the pitchers of Castile. Whatever thing they 
 were in possession of, and knew the Spaniards 
 wanted, they offered with great pleasure and the 
 utmost liberality. The Admiral remarks 'These 
 could not be deemed gifts of mean value, al- 
 though their intrinsic worth was small, because 
 every thing was given with the greatest gene- 
 rosity ; a piece of gold was offered with as willing 
 readiness as a calabash of water, and it is easy 
 to perceive when a thing is given with a good 
 will. These people have neither staves, jave- 
 lins nor any other weapons, and this I have re- 
 marked of all the inhabitants of this isl- 
 and, which appears to me to be very large. 
 They are all as naked as they were born, both 
 men and women, whereas in Juana, and the 
 other islands the females wear a small covering 
 of cotton at the waist, especially those above a 
 dozen years, but neither old nor young practise it 
 here. In other places we have found the inhab- 
 itants anxious to conceal their women from us, 
 but here they display no such jealousy. The 
 females at this place possess fine shapes, and 
 were the first to give thanks to heaven upon 
 our arrival, and bring us offerings, especially 
 bread of ajes and five or six sorts of fruits.' 
 These last the Admiral caused to be preserved 
 for the King and Queen. The same treatment 
 they had received from the women in other 
 19 
 
154 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 parts before the men took care to keep them out 
 of sight. The Admiral gave strict orders that 
 the utmost attention should be paid, not to give 
 offence to the natives in any thing, and that no 
 article should be taken from them without his 
 permission ; in this manner they were paid for 
 every thing they gave the Spaniards. The Ad- 
 miral remarks that he believes no one ever met 
 with a people of such a liberal and generous dispo- 
 sition, which was exercised to such a degree that 
 they were ready to rob themselves of every ar- 
 ticle of property to oblige their guests, flocking 
 to them with offerings wherever they arrived. 
 He sent six of his men to examine the town 
 which had been seen, to these the indians show- 
 ed every honour they could invent, and presented 
 such things as they had, not doubting in the least 
 that the Admiral and all his crew had come from 
 heaven, which also the indians on board still con- 
 tinued to think, notwithstanding what the Span- 
 iards had told them. The men being gone to 
 the town, there came several canoes from a sov- 
 ereign in the neighborhood, to request the Ad- 
 miral on leaving this place to visit his town. 
 The Admiral perceiving great crowds of people 
 waiting for him upon a point of land, proceeded 
 thither, when there came down to the shore 
 immense multitudes, men, women and children 
 crying out for him not to leave them, but remain 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 155 
 
 there. The ambassadors of the prince above- 
 mentioned, were all this time waiting with their 
 canoes, lest he should go away without comply- 
 ing with their invitation. The Admiral then set 
 off, and arriving near the place where the prince 
 was waiting to receive him, this sovereign order- 
 ed all his people to seat themselves upon the 
 ground, he then dispatched men with provisions 
 to the boats which, seeing that the Spaniards 
 accepted, the greater part of the indians ran off 
 to the town which, was probably near, and came 
 back, bringing more, along with parrots and other 
 things, which they offered with surprising liberal- 
 ity. Although they demanded nothing in return? 
 the Admiral gave them glass beads, hawk's bells, 
 and brass rings, as he thought it but just that pay- 
 ment should be made them, and in particular as 
 he says, because he looked upon them as chris- 
 tians, and more the subjects of the King and 
 Queen, than the people of Castile. Pie adds 
 that nothing is wanting but to know their lanouaire 
 and give them orders, as they will perform every 
 tiling commanded them without making the least 
 opposition. He then left the place to return to 
 the ships, the indians all calling out, men, women 
 and children, and entreating him to remain among 
 them. Several canoes full of men followed the 
 boats to the ships, these the Admiral treated 
 with much civility and gave them food and other 
 
156 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 presents. Great numbers came from the shore 
 swimming about the ship, which was above half 
 a league from the land. While the Admiral was 
 upon his visit there came another prince from 
 the westerly part of the island, and not finding 
 him, he returned. The Admiral sent some men 
 to visit and obtain information from him ; these 
 he received very graciously, and conducted to- 
 ward his town where he intended to give them 
 some large pieces of gold ; they went along with 
 him till they came to a wide river, which the 
 indians passed by swimming, but the Spaniards 
 being unable to cross it, returned back. All 
 this neighborhood abounds in mountains so lofty 
 that they seem to reach to the skies ; The Peak of 
 TenerifTe is nothing in comparison with them, 
 either for height or beauty. These are all cov- 
 ered with wood and vegetation in a delightful 
 manner, and inclose among them many beautiful 
 plains. At the South of this harbour is a plain 
 so extensive that the eye cannot reach the end, 
 it is probably fifteen or twenty leagues in extent, 
 without the interruption of a single eminence \ 
 it contains a river and is inhabited and cultivated 
 throughout, being at present as green and flour- 
 ishing, as the fields in Castile in May or June, 
 although the nights are here fourteen hours 
 long, and this country so far to the North. The 
 harbour here is well sheltered from every 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 157 
 
 wind that can blow, being deep and well shut in. 
 Ships may also lie here in perfect safety from 
 any incursion during the night from without ; for 
 although the entrance has a width of more than 
 two leagues, it is confined by a couple of rocky 
 ledges nearly on a level with the water, leaving 
 a very narrow passage which seems almost the 
 work of art. In the mouth of the harbour there 
 are seven fathoms depth of water, this continues 
 to a level islet which has a beach and is covered 
 with trees. The entrance is to the West, where 
 a ship may sail in without fear, coming close to 
 the rock. Towards the NW. are three islands 
 and a large river, a league from the cape of this 
 harbour. This being St. Thomas's day, the Ad- 
 miral named the harbour The Port of the Sea oj 
 St. Thomas, calling it a sea, from its size. 
 
 Saturday, Dec. 22d. At daybreak they set sail 
 to go in search of the islands where, as the indians 
 told them, there was much gold, and in some of 
 them more gold than earth; but found the weath- 
 er unfavorable and returned to their anchorage, 
 when the boat was dispatched with nets for fish- 
 ing. The sovereign of the country* who resided 
 in the neighborhood sent a large canoe full of 
 men, with one of his principal attendants request- 
 
 *This was Guacanagari, sovereign of Marien, where 
 Columbus built a fort, and left a party of his men at his re- 
 turn to Spain. 
 
158 rrRST voyage 
 
 ing the Admiral to come with the ships to his ter- 
 ritory, promising him any thing he had. He sent 
 by this messenger a girdle to which was attached 
 instead of a pouch, a mask having the nose, tongue, 
 and ears of beaten gold. The indians in the ca- 
 noe, meeting the boat, gave the girdle to a ship's 
 boy, and proceeded on board the ship with their 
 embassy. Some time passed before they could 
 be understood, the indians on board not compre- 
 hending them, as their language was somewhat 
 different from that of the others; finally they 
 made out to express themselves by signs, and made 
 known their invitation. The Admiral determined 
 to accept it, and came to a resolution to sail the 
 next day, which Avas Sunday, although he was not 
 accustomed to put to sea on that day ; this arose 
 from devotion and not from any superstitious scru- 
 ples. Besides, entertaining a hope that these 
 people, by the willingness they manifested, would 
 become christians, and subjects of Castile, and al- 
 ready looking upon them in that light, he was de- 
 sirous of doing every thing to oblige them. Be- 
 fore quitting this place he sent six of his men to a 
 very large town, three leagues to the West, the 
 prince of that place having visited the Admiral 
 the preceding day and told him that he had sev- 
 eral pieces of gold. With these men he sent his 
 secretary, whom he charged to take care that 
 the Spaniards did nothing wrong to the indians. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 159 
 
 for these were so liberal, and the Spaniards so im- 
 measurably greedy, that they were not satisfied 
 with receiving the most valuable of what the in- 
 habitants possessed, in exchange for a leather 
 thong, a bit of glass or earthen ware, or other 
 worthless trifle, and sometimes for nothing at all, 
 which, however, the admiral had always prohibit- 
 ed. Although the articles which the indians offer- 
 ed were of little value, except the gold, yet the 
 Admiral considering the readiness with which 
 they parted with them, as giving a piece of gold 
 for half a dozen strings of glass beads, ordered 
 that nothing should be taken from them without 
 paying for it. The Spaniards arriving at the 
 town, the prince took the secretary by the hand, 
 and led him, accompanied by a great multitude of 
 people, to his house, where victuals were set be- 
 fore the Spaniards, and large quantities of cotton 
 cloth and balls of yarn brought them. Late in 
 the evening the Spaniards returned, the prince 
 presenting them with three fat geese and some 
 bits of gold ; a great number of the indians accom- 
 panied them back, and insisted upon carrying 
 their goods for them across the rivers and miry 
 places. The Admiral made the prince some 
 presents, at which he and all his people showed 
 the greatest pleasure, and thought themselves 
 happy in gazing upon the Spaniards, whom they 
 believed to have come from heaven. This dav 
 
160 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 more than a hundred and twenty canoes came to 
 the ships, all filled with people, and every one 
 bringing something, in particular bread, fish, and 
 water in earthen pitchers, as also a kind of seed 
 which serves very well for a spice ; of this they 
 put a grain in a cup of water and drink it. The 
 indians on board the ships affirmed that it was very 
 wholesome. 
 
 Sunday, Dec. 23d. The want of wind com- 
 pelled them to remain here still, and the Admiral 
 dispatched the boats with his secretary to the 
 prince from whom he had received the invitation 
 the day before. While they were gone he sent, 
 two of his indians to visit the towns in the neigh- 
 borhood, these returned bringing a prince of the 
 country with them, and the information that 
 gold was to be had in that island in as great 
 plenty as could be desired, the people coming 
 thither from other parts to obtain it. More 
 persons arrived who confirmed this account, 
 and showed the manner of collecting it; this the 
 Admiral understood with difficulty, but still 
 held it for certain that the metal must exist in 
 abundance in these parts, where on finding the 
 spot it might be got for little or nothing. He 
 remarks that he is confirmed in this opinion by 
 having in the three days he has been here, re- 
 ceived many large pieces, and cannot believe it is 
 brought hither from other places. He utters 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 161 
 
 these words ' Our Lord, in whose hands are all 
 things, be my help, and order every thing for his 
 service.' More than a thousand of the inhabitants 
 visited the ships, every one bringing something; 
 their custom was on arriving within half a bow- 
 shot, to stand up in their canoes holding out their 
 offerings in their hands, and exclaiming ' Take ! 
 Take !' Besides these there came above five hun- 
 dred, swimming for want of canoes, the ships be- 
 ing anchored near a league from the shore. Five 
 princes with all their families came among the 
 rest to visit the Spaniards, to all whom the Ad- 
 miral made presents, esteeming every thing given 
 them well bestowed. 'Our Lord in his mercy,' 
 says he ' direct me where I may find the gold 
 mine, as 1 have many here who profess to be 
 acquainted with it.' At night the boats return- 
 ed and informed that they had gone a great dis- 
 tance, and at the mountain of Caribatan had met 
 with canoes full of people, coming from the place 
 where the Spaniards were going, to visit the Admi- 
 ral ; these turned back and accompanied the Span- 
 iards to the town,* which they found the largest 
 and most regular with respect to the streets, of 
 any that had been seen: it was situated nearly three 
 leagues to the southeast of Punta Santa.'t The 
 canoes rowing faster than the boats, slipped ahead 
 
 * Guarico. t San Honorato. 
 
 20 
 
162 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 and carried the intelligence of their arrival to the 
 Cacique as they called him. Hitherto the Admi- 
 ral had been unable to learn whether this was 
 the name of a king or a governor. They have 
 another name for their chief people, which is 
 Nitayno ;* whether this signified governor, no- 
 bleman, or judge, could not be ascertained. The 
 Cacique came out to meet the Spaniards in the 
 public square of the town, which was a fine neat 
 place ; here more than two thousand men assem- 
 bled, every one bringing victuals for the stran- 
 gers. The king showed them great honor, and 
 gave each man a portion of such cotton cloth as 
 the women wear, adding some parrots and pieces 
 of gold for the Admiral ; the people also gave 
 the Spaniards cotton cloths and other things, re- 
 ceiving whatever trifles were offered them in re- 
 turn, which they valued as highly as if they es- 
 teemed them relics. At evening when they 
 wished to return, the king entreated them to 
 stay till morning, and all the peoj la joined in the 
 solicitation. Finding them determined to set out, 
 a great number accompanied them, carrying for 
 them upon their shoulders the articles which the 
 Spaniards had acquired there; they thus attend- 
 
 *A Nitayno was a grandee next in rank to the king. 
 
 Las Casas. 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 163 
 
 ed them to the boats, which were left at the 
 mouth of the river. 
 
 Monday, Dec. 21th. Before sunrise they 
 weighed anchor, and put to sea with a land 
 breeze. Among the indians who came on board 
 yesterday, and informed them there was gold in 
 the island, naming the places where it was found, 
 there was one who seemed to display an uncom- 
 mon degree of liking for the Spaniards; him the 
 Admiral caressed, and prevailed upon to go along 
 with him, and direct the way to the gold mines. 
 This man was accompanied by another, his com- 
 panion or relation, and both these, among other 
 places they spoke of, where the gold was obtained, 
 named Cipango which they called Civao, and said 
 it was very far to the East, possessing vast quan- 
 tities of gold, and that the Cacique of the country 
 had his banners made of plates of that metal. 
 The Admiral in this place says, i Your highnesses 
 may be assured that there is not upon earth a 
 better or gentler people, at which you may re- 
 joice, for they will easily become christians and 
 learn our customs. A finer country or people can- 
 not exist, and the territory is so extensive and the 
 people so numerous, that I know not how to give 
 a description of them, as 1 have spoken so highly 
 of the people and country of Juana which the 
 inhabitants call Cuba. But there is a difference 
 between these two countries as great as between 
 
164 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 day and night. I think no one who has seen these 
 parts, can say less in their commendation than I 
 have said. I repeat that it is a matter of won- 
 der to see the things we have met with, and the 
 multitudes of people in this island, which I call 
 Espanola, and the indians Bohio ; they are sin- 
 gularly pleasant in their intercourse and con- 
 versation with us, and not like the others, who 
 when they speak appear to be uttering menaces; 
 their shapes are fine, both men and women, and 
 their colour not black, although they paint them- 
 selves, the most of them red, others of a dark 
 hue, and others of still different colours, all which, 
 I understand, is done to keep the sun from in- 
 juring them. The houses and towns are very 
 handsome, and the inhabitants live in each set- 
 tlement under the rule of a sovereign or judge, 
 to whom they pay implicit obedience. These 
 magistrates are persons of excellent manners, and 
 great reserve, and give their orders by a sign with 
 the hand, which is understood by all with surpri- 
 sing quickness. 
 
 In order to enter this port, called The Sea of 
 St. Thomas,* it is necessary to stand for a small 
 level island at the entrance, which was named 
 La jUmiga, and coming within a stone's throw, to 
 pass to the westward of the island, keeping close 
 
 * Bahia de Acu\. 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 165 
 
 to the shore, as a large reef comes out from the 
 west, which extends a lombarda-shot towards the 
 island ; in the channel are at the shoalest parts, 
 seven fathoms, with a gravelly bottom, and with- 
 in is room sufficient for all the ships in the world, 
 where they may lie without moorings. There 
 are two or three shoals without, and other large 
 shoals and a reef are to the east, extending to- 
 wards the island La Amiga, and far into the sea, 
 coming two leagues towards the cape ; but among 
 these there appeared a channel two lombarda- 
 shots from La Amiga, and at the foot of Mount 
 Caribatan, a spacious and excellent harbour.* 
 
 Tuesday, Dec. 25th. Christmas. Last night 
 they kept along the coast with a light wind, from 
 the sea of St. Thomas to the headland named 
 Punta Santa, and at the end of the first watch, 
 about eleven o'clock, being off this point about a 
 league distant, the Admiral laid down to sleep, 
 having taken no rest for two days and a night 
 past. As the sea was calm, the man at the helm 
 left his place to a boy, and went off to sleep like- 
 wise, contrary to the express orders of the Ad- 
 miral, who had throughout the voyage, forbid- 
 en, in calm or storm, the helm to be intrusted 
 to a boy. The Admiral was free from any 
 dread of rocks or shoals, as the Sunday before, 
 
 * Port Francois. 
 
 ,\ 
 
166 FITtST VOYAGE 
 
 when he sent the boats to the king, they had 
 passed three leagues and a half to the east of 
 Pimta Santa, and the sailors had surveyed the 
 whole coast for three leagues beyond that point, 
 and ascertained where the ships might pass, a 
 thing never done before in the whole voyage. 
 But as it pleased our Lord, at midnight, it being 
 a dead calm, and the sea perfectly motionless, as 
 in a cup, the whole crew, seeing the Admiral had 
 retired, went off to sleep, leaving the ship in the 
 care of the boy abovementioned, when the cur- 
 rent carried her imperceptibly toward the shoals 
 in the neighborhood, upon which she struck with 
 a noise that might be heard a league off. The 
 boy at the helm hearing the roar of the sea, and 
 feeling the current beating at the rudder, cried 
 out, at which the Admiral awoke, and sprang 
 upon deck before any of the sailors perceived 
 that they had run aground; presently the mas- 
 ter, whose watch it was, came up, and the Admi- 
 ral ordered him and others who quickly made 
 their appearance, to hoist out the boat and car- 
 ry an anchor astern; the boat being hoisted out, 
 the master and many others went into her, as the 
 Admiral supposed to fulfil the order. Instead of 
 doing this, they rowed off to the caravel, which 
 was about half a league to windward. Those 
 on board, however, with great propriety and jus- 
 tice refused to receive them, and sent them back, 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 167 
 
 dispatching also their own boat, which arrived 
 first at the ship. Meantime the Admiral finding 
 his men deserting him, and the ship down upon 
 her side, with the water leaving her, saw no oth- 
 er remedy but to cut away the mast, and throw 
 overboard every thing they could spare, hoping 
 that this would lighten and set her afloat, but in 
 spite of all, the water continued to ebb, and the 
 ship to lie down towards the sea, which fortunate- 
 ly continued smooth, and presently she opened 
 between the ribs. The Admiral proceeded to 
 the caravel to dispose of his crew, and as a slight 
 breeze blew from the land, and much of the night 
 remained, they lay to till day, not knowing how far 
 the shoals extended; at day break he proceeded 
 inside of the shoal to the ship, having first sent the 
 boat to land with Diego de Arana, of Cordova, al- 
 guazil of the fleet, and Pedro Gutierrez, page of 
 the royal wardrobe, to carry the news of his mis- 
 fortune to the king, who had sent him the invita- 
 tion the Saturday before, and whose residence 
 was about a league and a half beyond the shoal 
 where the ship lay. This person, as they stated, 
 upon hearing the information, shed tears, and 
 dispatched all the people of the town with large 
 canoes to unload the ship; with their assistance 
 the decks were cleared in a very short time, so 
 great was the diligence of the king and his men. 
 He, with his brothers and relations came to the 
 
168 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 shore, and look every care that all the goods 
 should be safely brought to land, and carefully 
 preserved. From time to time he sent his rela- 
 tions to the Admiral weeping, and consoling him, 
 and entreating him not to be afflicted at his loss, 
 for he would give him all he had. The Admiral 
 here observes to the King and Queen, that in no 
 part of Castile would more strict care have been 
 taken of his goods, not the smallest trifle was 
 lost. The king ordered several houses to be 
 cleared for the purpose of stowing the goods. 
 Here a guard was set over them who watched 
 throughout the night. * The people as well as 
 the king shed tears in abundace,' says the Admi- 
 ral. ' They are a very loving race, and without 
 covetousness ; they are adapted to any use, and I 
 declare to your Highnesses that there is not a 
 better country nor a better people in the world 
 than these. They love their neighbors as they 
 do themselves, and their language is the smooth- 
 est and sweetest in the world, being always ut- 
 tered with smiles. They all, both men and wo- 
 men go totally naked, but your Highnesses may 
 be assured that they possess many commendable 
 customs; their king is served with great rever- 
 ence, and every thing is practised with such de- 
 cency that it is highly pleasing to witness it. 
 They have great memories and curiosity, and 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 169 
 
 are very eager in their inquiries as to the nature 
 and use of all they see.' 
 
 Wednesday, Dec. 26th. At sunrise the king 
 of the country visited the Admiral on board the 
 Nina, and with tears in his eyes, intreated him 
 not to indulge in any grief, for he would give him 
 all he had ; that he had already assigned the 
 Spaniards on shore two large houses, and if neces- 
 sary, would, grant others, and as many canoes as 
 could be used in bringing the goods and crew to 
 land, which, in fact, he had done the day before, 
 without the smallest trifle being purloined, ' so 
 honest and free from covctousness are they,' 
 says the Admiral, ' and their king pre-eminent 
 in virtue.' While the Admiral was conversing 
 with him, a canoe arrived from another place, 
 with indians bringing pieces of gold, which they 
 wanted to exchange for a hawk's-bell, these be- 
 ing held in special value among them ; before the 
 canoe reached the vessel, the indians called out, 
 showing the gold, and crying chuq, chuq* for the 
 hawk's-bells, and seemed ready to go mad after 
 them; the other canoes setting off, they request- 
 ed the Admiral to preserve a hawk's-bell for 
 them, and they would bring him in return four 
 pieces of gold as big as his hand. This intelli- 
 gence gave him great joy, and there presently 
 
 *Take ? take, 
 21 
 
170 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 came a sailor from the land and informed the 
 Admiral that the Spaniards were carrying on a 
 great traffic with the indians, purchasing bits of 
 gold worth more than two castellanos, for a strap 
 of leather, and that this was nothing to what it 
 would be within a month. The King was much 
 rejoiced to see the Admiral in good spirits, and 
 discovering that he was anxious to obtain gold, 
 he informed him by signs that he knew where, 
 in that neighborhood, a great deal of it might 
 be had, and that the Admiral might be of good 
 cheer, for he would give him as much as he 
 wanted. He gave him a further account of it, 
 and told him it existed in Cipango, which they 
 called Civao, in such abundance that it was held 
 in no esteem. It was understood in the same 
 way, that it was brought hither from that place, 
 although in the island of Espanola, and in the 
 district of Caribata there were also great quan- 
 tities. The king took a meal on board the cara- 
 vel, and then went on shore accompanied by the 
 Admiral, whom he treated with every honor, 
 feasting him with several sorts of ajcs, shrimps, 
 game and other viands, with bread which they 
 call cazavi. Afterwards he conducted him into 
 an arbour near his house, where they were at- 
 tended by more than a thousand persons. The 
 king had on a shirt and a pair of gloves, which 
 he had received from the Admiral, these last he 
 
 / 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 171 
 
 particularly admired. In his manner of taking 
 food he showed a decency and neatness well 
 worthy of his rank; after finishing his repast, at 
 which he continued long, certain herbs were 
 brought him, with which he rubbed his hands 
 for a considerable time, which was done as the 
 Admiral thought, to soften them ; water was then 
 fetched him for washing. -The meal completed, 
 he went down to the shore with the Admiral, 
 who sent for a Turkish bow and some arrows, 
 these he gave to one of the crew who was expert 
 in their use, and the exhibition of them much as- 
 tonished the king, who knew nothing of weapons, 
 his people neither using nor possessing them, 
 although some discourse had been held here, 
 about the people of Caniba whom they call 
 Caribes, these, they stated, were accustomed to 
 come and attack them with bows and arrows ; 
 it was ascertained that these last were not head- 
 ed with iron, for neither iron nor steel are 
 known in these parts, nor any other metal, ex- 
 cept gold and copper; the Admiral saw little 
 of the copper. The king was then given to 
 understand by signs that the sovereigns of . Cas- 
 tile would send people to fight against the Ca- 
 ribes, and bring them ail prisoners with their 
 hands tied. By order of the Admiral, a lorn- 
 bar Aa and an espingarda were fired, and the ef- 
 fect of their shot struck the king with new won- 
 der, frightening the indians to such a degree that 
 
172 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 they all fell upon the ground. Afterwards a 
 large mask was brought, with great pieces of 
 gold, at the ears, eyes, and other places ; this the 
 king gave the Admiral, along with other jewels 
 of the same metal, which he placed upon his head 
 and neck ; many other presents were made to 
 the Spaniards. All these things had a great ef- 
 fect upon the Admiral in assuaging his grief for 
 the loss of the ship, and he began to be convinc- 
 ed that our Lord had permitted the shipwreck 
 in order that he might choose this place for a set- 
 tlement. ' And to this end,' says he, so many fa- 
 vorable things offered, that it cannot be called a 
 disaster, but a great piece of good fortune, for if 
 Ave had not run aground, we should have kept off 
 without anchoring here, the place being in a 
 large bay withinside of two or three shoals. 
 Neither should I otherwise have been induced 
 to leave any men in these parts during the voy- 
 age, nor if I had, could I have spared them the 
 proper provisions and materials for their for- 
 tification. Many of my crew have solicited me 
 for permission to remain, and I have to-day or- 
 dered the construction of a fort, with a tower 
 and ditch, all to be well built, not that 1 deem 
 such a fortification necessary as a defence against 
 the inhabitants, as I have already stated that 
 with my present crew, I could subjugate the 
 whole island, which I believe to be larger than 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 173 
 
 the kingdom of Portugal, and twice as populous, 
 but that I judge it proper, as the territory is at 
 such a distance from our country, and that the 
 natives may understand the genius of the people 
 of your Highnesses, and what they are able to 
 perform, so that they may be held in obedience 
 by fear as well as love. For this purpose I 
 have directed that there shall be provided a 
 store of timber for the construction of the fort, 
 with provision of bread and wine for more than 
 a year, seed for planting, the long-boat of the 
 ship, a calker, a carpenter, a gunner, a cooper, 
 and many other persons, among the number of 
 those who have earnestly desired to serve your 
 Highnesses and oblige me by remaining here, 
 and searching for the gold mine. To the under- 
 taking which I have mentioned, things seem to 
 have concurred very opportunely, in particular 
 the ship's running aground in such a manner that 
 it was not perceived till she had stuck fast, and 
 this at a time when there was neither wave nor 
 wind.' The Admiral relates many other things 
 by way of showing that it was a piece of good 
 fortune, and the determined will of God that the 
 ship should be wrecked there, that the Span- 
 iards might remain, for as he states, had it not 
 been for the treacherous conduct of the master 
 and crew, (who were most or all of them his 
 countrymen) in not carrying the anchor astern 
 
174 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 to haul the ship off, as they were ordered, she 
 would not have been wrecked, and thereby they 
 should have failed of the knowledge of the coun- 
 try which they obtained during the stay, by the 
 men whom he intended to leave there. His cus- 
 tom was to go on making discoveries, and not 
 to stay in any one place above a day, unless com- 
 pelled by the wind, as his ship was a dull sailer, 
 and unfit fur the purpose of discovery. He lays 
 the blame of this upon the people of Palos, in 
 not having complied with their agreement to 
 furnish the King and Queen with suitable vessels 
 for the expedition. The Admiral concludes by 
 observing that every piece of the ship was 
 saved, there not being lost so much as a thong, 
 board, or nail, she being as complete as when she 
 first sailed, except what was caused by cutting 
 her to get out the casks and merchandize ; all 
 these were carried on shore and well secured, 
 as above said. He adds that he hopes to find 
 at his return from Castile, a ton of gold collected 
 by them in trading with the natives, and that 
 they will have succeeded in discovering the mine 
 and the spices, and all these in such abundance 
 that before three years the King and Queen may 
 undertake the recovery of the Holy Sepulchre. 
 ' For I have before protested to your Highness- 
 es,' says he, ' that the profits of this enterprise 
 shall be employed in the conquest of Jerusalem, 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 175 
 
 at which your Highnesses smiled and said you 
 were pleased, and had the same inclination.' 
 
 Thursday, Dec. 27th. At sunrise the king 
 came on board, and told the Admiral that he 
 had sent for gold, and wished he could cover him 
 all over with it before his departure, or rather, 
 that he would not depart at all. He took a meal 
 with the Admiral in company with a brother and 
 relation of the king, in a very private manner; 
 they stated that they wished to go to Castile 
 with him. While they were on board, there 
 arrived accounts that the caravel Pinta was in a 
 river at the end of the island, the Cacique dis- 
 patched a canoe thither, in which the Admiral 
 ordered a Spaniard to embark. The cacique 
 displayed a degree of affection towards the Ad- 
 miral that appeared wonderful. The utmost 
 diligence was exerted in preparing for their re- 
 turn to Castile. 
 
 Friday, Dec. 28th. In order to see to the 
 construction of the fort, the Admiral went on 
 shore. It seemed that the king espied him as he 
 was embarking, for he entered his house in 
 haste and sent one of his brothers to receive him. 
 The Admiral was conducted to one of the dwell- 
 ings given to the Spaniards, which was the 
 largest and best in the place. Here there was 
 prepared a seat made of the inner bark of the 
 palm tree, upon which they caused the Admiral 
 
176 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 to sit, the king's brother then sent an attendant 
 informing him that the Admiral was there, as if 
 he was ignorant of it ; the Admiral imagined that 
 this was done to show him so much the more 
 honor. The attendant having delivered his mes- 
 sage, the king ran to the Admiral, carrying a 
 great plate of gold in his hand, which he placed 
 about his neck. He remained a night on shore, 
 considering what was to be done. 
 
 Saturday, Dec. 29th. At sunrise there came 
 on board the caravel a nephew of the king, quite 
 a youth, but a person of good understanding and 
 courage ; and as the Admiral's constant object 
 was to find the place where the gold was pro- 
 duced, he made it a practice to question every 
 one about it by signs, as they could converse in 
 this manner. This young man informed him that 
 at the distance of four days' voyage to the east, 
 was an isle called Guarionex, and others called 
 JWacorix, Jllayonic, Fuma, Cibao, and Coroay* and 
 that they contained abundance of gold. The 
 names of these places the Admiral wrote 
 down, and it afterwards came to the knowl- 
 edge of the king's brother, that the youth had 
 given this information, whereupon some al- 
 tercation ensued between them, as near as the 
 Admiral could make out. He had at other times 
 
 * These, according to Las Casas, were the names of dis- 
 tricts in the island of Espanola, and not separate isles. 
 
op colTjmbus. 177 
 
 understood that the king was exerting himself to 
 prevent his learning where the gold was produ- 
 ced, lest he should go thither after it. 'But 
 there is such a quantity of it, and in so many pja- 
 ces in the island of Espanola' says the Admiral, 
 i that it is a matter of wonder.' At night the 
 king sent him a great golden mask, begging for a 
 wash-basin and ewer; th.e Admiral supposed that 
 he wished for these, to have others made like 
 them. The request was complied with. 
 
 Sunday, Dec. 30th. The Admiral went to dine 
 on shore, and found that there had arrived five 
 kings, who were subject to Guacanagari the king 
 abovementioned. All these wore their crowns 
 and went in great state, and the Admiral remarks 
 to the King and Queen, that their Highnesses 
 would have been highly pleased to observe their 
 manners. Guacanagari came to receive him on 
 landing, and led him by the arm to the house 
 where he was entertained the day before ; here 
 was an elevated space and seats, upon which he 
 made him sit down; he then took his own crown 
 from his head and placed it upon that of the Ad- 
 miral, who in return took from his neck a splen- 
 did collar made of very beautiful beads, and put 
 it upon that of the king, also divesting himself of 
 a cloak of fine scarlet cloth, which he had put on 
 that day, he clothed the king with it. He then 
 
 sent for a pair of buskins which he put upon his 
 22 
 
178 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 feet, and a large silver ring upon his finger, hav- 
 ing heard that the Indians had seen a sailor with 
 a ring of that metal, and had tried hard to obtain 
 it. The king was greatly pleased with these 
 gifts, and two of the other chiefs came to the 
 Admiral and gave him each a great plate of gold. 
 While they were here, an indian arrived saying he 
 had two days since left the caravel Pinta in a har- 
 bour at the East. The Admiral returned to his 
 vessel, and Vincent Yanez, the captain, told him that 
 he had seen rhubarb, and that it was to be found at 
 the island Amiga, at the entrance of the harbour 
 which was Lamed Mar de Santo Tome, six leagues 
 from thence, and that he had recognized both 
 the root and the branches. The description giv- 
 en of the rhubarb is that it sends forth flowers, 
 and berries which appear like green mulberries 
 half dried, the stalk near the root is of a fine yel- 
 low colour, and the root itself like a large pear. 
 
 Monday, Dec. 31st. This day was occupied 
 in taking on board water and wood for their re- 
 turn to Spain. The Admiral's object in hasten- 
 ing thither was to carry the intelligence as speed- 
 ily as possible to the King and Queen, that ships 
 might be dispatched to complete the discoveries, 
 a vast deal remaining to be done in this way. 
 He was, however, unwilling to depart before he 
 had examined all this coast towards the east, but 
 being with a single vessel, he thought it not pru- 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 179 
 
 dent to expose himself to the dangers attendant 
 upon such an enterprise. He complains that all 
 these troubles were occasioned by the Pinta's 
 having forsaken him. 
 
 Tuesday, Jan. 1st, 1493. At midnight the 
 boat was sent to the island Amiga for rhubarb* 
 and returned the next evening with a frail of it, 
 not having procured more for want of a spade to 
 dig with : what was obtained he preserved to 
 show the King and Queen. The canoe which 
 had been dispatched in quest of the Pinta, re- 
 turned without seeing her. The sailor who went 
 in the canoe stated, that at twenty leagues dis- 
 tance they met a king, who wore upon his head 
 two great plates of gold, and as soon as the in- 
 dians whom he accompanied in the canoe spoke 
 to him, he took them off. The Admiral be- 
 lieved that Gitacanagari had prohibited all the 
 others from selling gold to the Spaniards, that it 
 might all pass through his hands. He had that 
 day sent many canoes to collect it. The Admi- 
 ral already knew the places, as above stated, 
 where it was so plenty as not to be valued. The 
 spicery* as the Admiral says, is also abundant, 
 and more valuable than pepper or grains of par- 
 adise. He left orders with those that remained, 
 to collect as much of it as possible. 
 
 *Indiaij peppet 
 
180 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 Wednesday, Jan. 2d. He went on shore in 
 the morning, to take leave of Guacanagari. He 
 gave him one of his own shirts, and conversing 
 with him about the Caribes, who made war up- 
 on the people of the island, he determined to give 
 him an experiment of the force of fire-arms; for 
 this purpose a lombarda was ordered to be load- 
 ed, and fired against the side of the ship which 
 was on shore; the shot passed through her and 
 struck the sea at a distance. He also gave him 
 a representation of a battle between parties of 
 the crew, armed, informing the Cacique that he 
 need not fear the Caribes, even if they should at- 
 tack him. All this was done, as he informs us, 
 to strike a terror into the inhabitants, and make 
 them friendly to the Spaniards left behind. He 
 took the king and his attendants along with him 
 to his house to dine. At parting he gave a strict 
 charge to Diego de Arana, Pedro Gutierrez and 
 Rodrigo Escovedo, whom he constituted his lieu- 
 tenants over the force of the settlement, that ev- 
 ery thing should be well grounded and regulated 
 for the service of God and their Highnesses. 
 The Cacique displayed great afifection towards 
 the Admiral, and indulged a deep sorrow at sep- 
 arating from him, especially when he saw him 
 about to embark. One of the indians told the 
 Admiral that he had ordered his statue to be 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 181 
 
 made of gold as large as life, and that it was to 
 be finished in ten days. He went on board with 
 the intention of setting sail, but the wind did not 
 permit it. 
 
 He left in this island of Espanola, which the 
 indians called Bohio, a fort and thirty-nine men, 
 whom he states to have been great friends of 
 king Guacanagari. Over these he placed Diego 
 de Arana, a native of Cordova, Pedro Gutierrez, 
 groom of the king's wardrobe, and Rodrigo de 
 Escovedo, a native of Seville, and nephew of 
 Fray Rodrigo Perez, with all the powers the 
 King and Queen had delegated to him. He left 
 them all the goods which had been sent for traf- 
 ficking, being a great amount, and every thing 
 belonging to the ship which had been wrecked; 
 the goods he directed should be traded away for 
 gold. To these were added biscuit and wine for 
 a year, and the long-boat of the ship, in order 
 that they might, (being mariners for the most 
 part) at convenient opportunities, undertake the 
 discovery of the gold mine, and a place proper 
 for building a city, as this port did not suit him, 
 and especially because the gold came from the 
 east, and the further east they were, the nearer 
 to Spain ; he also left them seed for sowing, his 
 secretary and alguacil, a ship-carpenter and calk- 
 er, a good gunner and engineer, a cooper, a sur- 
 geon and a tailor, all seamen. 
 
182 PIRS*T VOYAGE 
 
 Thurday, Jan. 3d. He did not set sail to-day, 
 because the indians belonging to the ships re- 
 mained on shore. At night three of them arri- 
 ved, and reported that the remainder with their 
 wives were coming. The sea was somewhat 
 rough, not suffering the boat to lie at the shore. 
 The Admiral determined to sail, by the grace of 
 God, the next morning. He says that if he had 
 had the caravel Pinta with him, he should have 
 been certain of obtaining a ton of gold, for in 
 that case he should have ventured to coaet along 
 these islands, which being alone, he dared not do 
 lest an accident should befal him and hinder his 
 returning to Castile and informing the King and 
 Queen of the discoveries he had made. Even 
 had he been certain that the Pinta would arrive 
 safe thither, with Martin Alonzo Pinzon, he 
 should not have indulged his wish of surveying 
 further these parts, as he feared that he might 
 give a false relation to the King and Queen, in 
 order to escape the punishment which he merit- 
 ed for his misconduct in abandoning the Admiral 
 without leave, and thereby hinder the benefits 
 consequent upon the discovery. He trusted that 
 our J^ord would grant him a favorable passage, 
 and a remedy for all evils. 
 
 Friday, Jan 4th. At sunrise they weighed an- 
 chor and stood out of the harbour with a light 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 183 
 
 wind; they steered to the NW. passing the shoal 
 by a channel much narrower than that by which 
 they had entered. These are very good entran- 
 ces to sail in to Villa de JVavidad* and contain 
 from three to nine fathoms depth of water, ex- 
 tending from NW. to SE. Here are shoals 
 which reach from Cabo Santo to Cabo de Sierpe 
 above six leagues, and extend three leagues into 
 the sea. A league from Cabo Santo there are no 
 more than eight fathoms water, and within this- 
 cape towards the east, are many shoals with nav- 
 igable channels. All this coast runs NW. and SE., 
 and has a beach throughout its whole extent; 
 the land is very level for a space of four leagues 
 from the shore, when it becomes diversified with 
 lofty mountains, the whole very populous and 
 abounding with large towns. They continued 
 along the coast to the east in the direction of a 
 very tall mountain, finely shaped like a tent, and 
 which appeared to be an island, but was found to 
 be connected with a low tract of the country. 
 This the Admiral named Monte Cristi, it is situa- 
 ted exactly east of Cabo Santo at the distance of 
 eighteen leagues ;t they were unable to reach it 
 this day within six leagues, the wind being light. 
 
 *The name given by Columbus to the fort and settlement 
 here, he having arrived on Christmas day. 
 
 tThe true distance is ten leagues! 
 
184 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 They found four low sandy islets ,* with a reef 
 extending to the N W. and SE. Within is a large 
 gulf which reaches from the mountain above- 
 mentioned, three leagues to the SW. It is 
 throughout very shallow, and abounding with 
 banks, and along the coast are many streams not 
 navigable, although the sailor whom the Admiral 
 sent in the canoe after the Pinta, related that he 
 saw a rivert which ships might enter. They an- 
 chored here in nineteen fathoms water, at the dis- 
 tance of three leagues from Monte Cristi, where 
 they remained all night, having kept off from 
 land to avoid the numerous shoals hereabouts. 
 The Admiral here gives directions for sailing to 
 Villa de Navidad, but as the coast is now known, 
 it was not thought advisable to copy them. He 
 concludes that Cipango must be in this island, 
 and that it contains great store of gold, spicesj 
 mastick and rhubarb. 
 
 Saturday, Jan 5th. Just before sunrise, they 
 set sail with a land-breeze, which afterwards 
 shifted to the east. They espied near Monte 
 Cristi within an islet, a good harbour where they 
 mio;ht anchor that might. Standing to the ESE., 
 and afterwards to the SSE., they sailed six 
 leagues towards that place and found seventeen 
 fathoms' water with a good bottom; they contin- 
 
 * Les Sept Freres. f &* Tapion 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 185 
 
 ued on three leagues farther with the same 
 depth. Afterwards the depth diminished to 
 twelve fathoms towards the highest part of the 
 mountain, off against Avhich they found nine fath- 
 oms, the bottom being all a fine sand. Keeping 
 on in this direction, they arrived between the 
 mountain and the islet, where they found a fine 
 harbour of smooth water, having three fathoms 
 and a half depth. Here they anchored, and the 
 Admiral landed in a boat. They found on shore, 
 fire burning and other indications that fishermen 
 had been there. Many stones of variegated col- 
 ours were seen; these were similar to those 
 found in San Salvador, and were fit from their 
 beauty to be used in the construction of churches, 
 or royal edifices. Trunk's of the mastick tree 
 were also met with. This eminence called Mon- 
 te Cristi, says the Admiral, appears at a distance 
 like an island; it is lofty, finely shaped, and ac- 
 cessible in every part. The country around is 
 flat and consists of very beautiful fields. From 
 this mountain they discovered a cape toward the 
 east, twenty-four miles distant, which was named 
 Cabo del Becerro. Within this distance lie sev- 
 eral reefs, which extend a couple of leagues to- 
 ward the sea; they appear to contain some 
 channels which may be entered, but this should 
 be done by day, with the boat sent ahead to sound. 
 
 The shore within, for four leagues east of the 
 23 
 
18t) FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 mountain, is a fine beach, and the country back, 
 level and beautiful; the rest of the distance, the 
 land is very lofty, with tall mountains of a delight- 
 ful appearance and under cultivation. In the in- 
 terior is a chain of mountains, the finest they had 
 seen, and which closely resembles the Sierra of 
 Cordova. At a greater distance towards the 
 south and SE., are other very high mountains, 
 with verdant and beautiful valleys of great extent. 
 The whole abounds in streams of water and 
 offers views of such variety that the thousandth 
 part could not be described. Towards the east 
 about a hundred miles distant, appears an emin- 
 ence which is like Monte Cristi in size and shape ; 
 from thence to the NE. the land is lower. 
 
 Sunday, Jan. 6th. The harbour was found to 
 oifer a good shelter against all winds except the 
 N. and NE., which however, the Admiral says, 
 are not common here, and even from these, a 
 safety may be obtained behind the islet. The 
 depth is from three to four fathoms. At sunrise 
 they set sail and proceeded along the coast, 
 which runs to the East. Many reefs of sand 
 and rocks are scattered along its extent, of which 
 it is necessary to take heed; within them are 
 very good harbours, with entrances by channels 
 between the shoals. In the afternoon the wind 
 blowing strong from the E. a sailor was sent 
 to the mast-head to look out for the shallows, 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 187 
 
 when he discovered the caravel Pinta bearing 
 down upon them before the wind ; no good an- 
 chorage being found in the neighborhood, the 
 Admiral hove about and stood back for Monte 
 Cristi from which they had gone ten leagues; 
 the Pinta kept him company, and Martin Alonzo 
 Pinzon came on board the Nina to make his ex- 
 cuses, saying he had parted against his will; he 
 offered several reasons for his conduct, which the 
 Admiral says were all totally false, as he was actu- 
 ated solely by his haughtiness and avidity in 
 abandoning him. He confesses himself unable to 
 learn the cause of the unfavorable disposition 
 Avhich this man had manifested towards him 
 throughout the voyage ; but the immediate oc- 
 casion of his deserting him, was the information 
 he got from an indian which the Admiral had 
 placed on board his vessel, that in an isiand 
 called Baneque he would find abundance of gold, 
 and knowing his vessel to be light and a swift 
 sailer he did not hesitate to abandon him as be- 
 fore related. The Admiral concealed his re- 
 sentment, that he might not aid the machinations 
 of Satan in impeding the voyage, as he had hith- 
 erto done. It was ascertained that Martin Al- 
 onzo, on arriving at Baneque, had not found any 
 gold, and had thence returned to the coast of 
 Espanola, where from the information of the 
 indians he expected to discover the mine. He 
 
188 
 
 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 coasted along the island for a distance of fifteen 
 leagues approaching near Villa de la Navidad, 
 in which progress he spent above twenty days* 
 from this account it appeared that the reports 
 given by the indians, of his being seen in the 
 neighborhood, upon the strength of which 
 king Guacanagari sent the canoe after him, were 
 correct. The Admiral states that in this time 
 he obtained much gold by trading, buying for a 
 thong of leather, pieces as big as the two fingers, 
 and at times as big as the hand. Of the metal 
 thus acquired, he kept half himself, and divided 
 the rest among his crew. The Admiral makes 
 this remark, ' Thus I perceive, Sovereign 
 Princes, that it was a providence of our Lord 
 in suffering the ship to be cast away here, it 
 being the best place in the whole island for a 
 settlement, and nearest to the gold mines.' He 
 adds that he had learnt of another island behind 
 that ofjuana toward the South, in which there 
 was a still greater quantity of gold, and where it 
 was found in grains of the size of a bean. In 
 Espanola they are met with in the mines as large 
 as kernels of wheat.* This first mentioned isle 
 was called by the indians Yamaycf From these 
 places to the main land, the distance was de- 
 
 * Las Casas states that he has seen lumps of gold found 
 in this last island, which would weigh eight pounds. 
 
 | Jamaica*, 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 189 
 
 scribed as ten days voyage in a canoe, which 
 might be sixty or seventy leagues. It was said 
 that the people of the continent wore clothing, 
 and the Admiral says he was informed by many 
 persons of an island towards the East inhabited 
 solely by women. 
 
 Monday, Jan. 7th. The Admiral's caravel 
 having a leak, he this day ordered her to be 
 calked, and sent the sailors ashore for wood. 
 They found many mastick and aloe trees. 
 
 Tuesday, Jan. 8th. The wind blowing hard 
 from the E. and SE., he did not sail to day, but 
 continued providing wood, water, and other ne- 
 cessaries for the voyage. It was the Admiral's 
 wish to coast along the whole island of Espanola, 
 which he might have done upon his course 
 homeward, but as he considered that the cap- 
 tains of the two caravels were brothers, namely 
 Martin Alonzo Pinzon, and Vincent Yanez, and 
 that they had a party attached to them, the 
 whole of whom had displayed great haugh- 
 tiness and avarice, disobeying his commands, re- 
 gardless of the honors he had conferred upon 
 them, all which misdemeanors as well as the 
 treachery of Martin Alonzo, in deserting him, 
 he had winked at, without complaining, in order 
 not to throw impediments in the way of the 
 voyage — he thought it best to return home as 
 quickly as possible. He adds, that he possessed 
 
190 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 many faithful men among his crews, but resolved 
 to put up with the behavior of the refractory 
 ones, and not at such an unfavorable season un- 
 dertake their punishment. The Admiral went 
 in the boat to a river which was situated a 
 league to the SSW. from Monte Cristi, and 
 where the sailors got the water for the vessels. 
 This river* was found wide and of a great depth 
 at the mouth. The sand at the bottom, he says, 
 was full of fine gold dust, and he imagined that it 
 was worn thus in its passage down the river. 
 Many large grains were found of the size of 
 lentils, and the finer sort was in great abundance. 
 The tide being up, he ascended the river a 
 stone's throw, in order to reach the fresh water, 
 here they filled the casks, and returning to the 
 caravel, found bits of gold between the hoops. 
 The Admiral named this river Rio del Oro, (Riv- 
 er of Gold) it has a narrow and shoal entrance, 
 but immediately within there is great depth. Its 
 distance from Villa de la Navidad is seventeen 
 leagues,t within this extent are many other 
 streams and in particular three, which from their 
 superior size, the Admiral thought must contain 
 more gold than the one he visited. This last is 
 
 * St. Yago 
 
 t The true distance is only eight leagues. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 19 1 
 
 nearly as large as the Guadalquivir at Cordova, and 
 is not twenty leagues from the mines.* The Ad- 
 miral concludes by saying that he thought it not 
 necessary to take on board any of the golden 
 sand, as their Highnesses had it within their 
 reach at the port of Navidad, and especially be- 
 cause he wished to return with all speed, and 
 communicate the news of his discoveries, and 
 get rid of the disagreeable society of his refrac- 
 tory crew. 
 
 W ednesday, Jan. 9th. At midnight they set 
 sail with a Southeasterly wind, and steered to 
 the ENE., in the evening they arrived and an- 
 chored under the shelter of a cape sixty milesf 
 East of Monte Cristi, this he named Punta Roxa.% 
 Here were extensive shoals, on which account 
 they did not leave the place through the night. 
 The land from Monte Cristi to the place where 
 they anchored, was high but level, with beautiful 
 fields, at a distance back appeared a chain of 
 fine mountains running from E. to W., covered 
 with cultivation and presenting a most enchant- 
 ing view; streams of water were also in abun^ 
 dance. All along the coast there are great mul- 
 
 * There were mines within four leagues, according to 
 Las Casas. 
 
 t Forty-two miles according to other accounts. 
 
 J Punta Isabelica. 
 
192 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 litudes of turtle, of which the sailors took some 
 at Monte Cristi, as they came on shore to lay 
 their eggs. They were as big as a buckler of 
 the largest size. The Admiral relates, that 
 when on his visit to the Rio del Oro yesterday, 
 he saw three mermaids standing high out of the 
 water, they had faces something similar to those of 
 human beings, but were not so handsome as it was 
 customary to represent them : he adds that he has 
 formerly seen them in Guinea, upon the Pepper 
 coast.* This night, he says, he intends to set 
 sail in the name of our Lord, without suffering 
 
 * These mermaids (serenas) were perhaps, as the Span- 
 ish editor suggests, Manaties, which Oviedo in his Natural 
 History of the Indies thus describes. ' The Manati is a 
 large sea-animal, exceeding the shark in size, and of an 
 ugly appearance, resembling one of those wine bags, used 
 for containing must in Medina del Campo and Arevalo. 
 Its head and eyes are like those of a calf, and it has a 
 pair of large stumps in the place of arms, which it uses 
 for swimming. The creature is very tame, and is accus- 
 tomed to approach near the shore, where if it espies any 
 herbs growing near the water, it feeds upon them. They 
 are shot with cross-bows, &.c. Cap. 85. — see also Herrera. 
 I. 5. 5. Gomara C. 31. and Charlevoix, Hist, de St. Do- 
 mingue, Liv. I. who describes this animal as furnished with 
 paps, with which it suckles its young. They give some 
 relations about its having been tamed. The last author 
 remarks, ' Le premier qui s'est imagine que ce poisson 
 pouvoit bien etre la Sirene des Anciens fut Christophe 
 Celomb, lequel donnoit volontiers dans tout le merveilleux 
 qui pouvoit rendre ses decouvertes plus celebres.' It must 
 be confessed that if Columbus took a Manati for a Mermaid, 
 he could not have failed to notice its deficiency in one 
 distinguishing quality ascribed to this fabulous being, for as 
 Gomara observes ' tan feo es, que mas ser no piiede." 1 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 193 
 
 himself to be detained here longer by any thing; 
 having accomplished the main object of his en- 
 terprise ; and as he is anxious to free himself 
 from the troubles which Martin Alonzo causes 
 him, and inform the King and Queen of his voy- 
 age and performances, ' after which' says he 'I 
 shall no more suffer the practices of worthless 
 and malignant persons who behave with such 
 disobedience and want of respect to one who has 
 shown them so distinguished favors.' 
 
 Thursday, Jan. 10th. They set sail from their 
 anchorage, and at sunset came to a river* 
 which the Admiral named Rio de Gracia, its 
 distance was three leagues to the SE. They 
 anchored at its mouth, finding a convenient spot 
 on the Eastern side. There is a bank at the 
 entrance, having but two fathoms water, and the 
 channel very narrow. Within is a harbour well 
 inclosed, but abounding in worms, from which the 
 caravel Pinta had suffered severely, she having 
 been, while absent from the Admiral, sixteen 
 days here, trading for gold, the thing Martin Al- 
 onzo was in quest of. It was ascertained that 
 this man having learnt from the indians that the 
 Admiral was upon the coast, and he could not 
 miss him, he resolved to return to his company, 
 having endeavored to procure all his crew to swear 
 that they had been there but six days; but his 
 
 * Rio Chuzona Chico, 
 
 24 
 
194 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 villainy, says the Admiral, was so apparent, that 
 it could not be concealed. He had made regu- 
 lations that the half of all the gold discovered, 
 or obtained by baiter, should be his property; 
 and at leaving this place took six of the indians, 
 four men and two girls, on board his vessel by 
 force ; these the Admiral ordered to be clothed, 
 and sent to their homes, ' which' he says i is for 
 the service of your Highnesses, for they are all 
 your Highnesses subjects, especially those of this 
 island, where the people should receive all favor 
 and respect from us, as the place contains so 
 many tine countries with gold and spicery, and 
 the settlement which has been made.' 
 
 Friday, Jan. 11th. At midnight they sailed from 
 Rio de Gracia with a land-breeze, proceeding 
 four leagues to the E. toward a cape which the 
 Admiral named Belprado. SE. from this, at 
 a distance, according to his account, of eight 
 leagues, is a mountain which he called Monte de 
 Plata* E. by S., eighteen leagues distant, is a 
 cape which he named Cabo del Angel. Between 
 th*3 and Monte de Plata is a guli',t bordered by 
 a most charming country, consisting of lofty and 
 beautiful fields extending far into th^ land. At 
 a distance back is a chain of mountains running 
 from E. to W., very tall and presenting a beau- 
 
 * Silver Mountain. It is very lofty, and always covered 
 with a white cloyd, which gives it a silvery appearance. 
 
 fPort of St. Jago. 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 195 
 
 tiful view. At the foot of the mountain above- 
 mentioned is an excellent harbour* having four- 
 teen fathoms depth at the mouth. The moun- 
 tain is lofty and handsome, covered with settle- 
 ments, and, in the Admiral's opinion contains fine 
 streams of water and much gold. Four leagues 
 E. by S. of Cabo del Angel is a point which he 
 called Punta del Hierro.'t Four leagues farther 
 on is another, named by him, Punta Scca.1[. 
 Another called Cabo Redondo,§ six leagues be- 
 yond that. East from this last, is another, which 
 he named Cabo Frances, beyond which is a bay|j 
 but which did not appear a good anchoring 
 place. A league from the bay is a cape called 
 Cabo del Buen tiempo, and another league S. by 
 E. from this, a cape which he named Tajado. 
 To the South another was seen, apparently 
 fifteen leagues distant. They made a great pro- 
 gress this day, as both the wind and the currents 
 were favorable. Not daring to anchor for fear 
 of the shoals, they lay to all night. 
 
 Saturday, Jan. 12th. At day-break they 
 stood to the East with a fresh breeze, and sailed 
 by sunrise twenty miles, the following two hours 
 twenty-four miles, when they discovered land 
 
 * Port Plate. |Punta Macuris. 
 
 J Punta Sesua. § Cabo dela Roca. 
 
 II Bahia Escocesa. 
 
196 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 the South* forty-eight miles distant. They 
 found they had gone in the night, twenty-eight 
 miles to the NNE. Standing for the land they 
 discovered a cape which was named Cabo de 
 Padre y Hijo^ as it has toward the East two cliffs 
 of unequal size. Two leagues to the East, an open- 
 ing was descried between two large mountains, 
 which proved to be a fine large harbour with a 
 good entrance. Being so early, they did not 
 enter, not wishing to lose time, as the wind then 
 blew from the NN W., although for the most 
 part they had found it to blow from the E. 
 Continuing their course E. they came to a cape 
 which the Admiral called Cabo del Enamorado\. 
 (the lover's cape) it was of craggy rock and very 
 high, at a distance of thirty-two miles E. of the 
 harbour abovementioned, named by him Puerto 
 Sacro. From this place they discovered anoth- 
 er promontory§ loftier and handsomer than the 
 last, of a round shape, and all of rock, like Cape 
 St. Vincent in Portugal; it was twelve miles E. 
 of Cabo Knamorado. Arrived off this last, they 
 discovered between these two headlands a very 
 large bay|| of three leagues in breadth, with a 
 
 * The peninsula of Samana. 
 f Cape of the Father and Son. 
 \ Cabo Cabron. §Cabo Samana. 
 
 || Baye de Samana. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 197 
 
 little isle in the middle. They found the water 
 deep in the mouth near the shore, where they 
 anchored in twelve fathoms, and sent the boat 
 for water, and to converse with the inhabitants, 
 but they all fled. The Admiral stopped here 
 wishing to ascertain if this land was part of Es- 
 panola. He was astonished at the great size of 
 the island. 
 
 Sunday, Jan. 13th. They did not sail, as no 
 land breeze blew. The Admiral wished to go 
 in search of a better harbour, as this was some- 
 what unsheltered, and he was desirous of wit- 
 nessing the conjunction of the sun, moon, and 
 Mercury in opposition to Jupiter, which occa- 
 sions high winds. The boat was sent on shore 
 to procure ajes for provision; they landed upon 
 a beach in the neighborhood, and found several 
 indians with bows and arrows : they entered into 
 conversation with them, purchased their arms, 
 and persuaded one of their number to accom- 
 pany them on board the caravel, to visit the Ad- 
 miral. This man was of a more unpleasing ap- 
 pearance than any that had yet been seen ; his 
 face was smutted all over with charcoal, though 
 in all parts they are accustomed to paint them- 
 selves with a variety of colours. His hair was 
 long, gathered and tied behind, and adorned with 
 parrot's feathers. He was totally naked. The 
 Admiral took him for one of the Caribes who 
 
198 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 were man-eaters, and believed that the gulf seen 
 yesterday was a separation between Espanola 
 and another island. He asked him for the Ca- 
 ribes, and he answered by signs that their land 
 was to the East in the neighborhood ; the Ad- 
 miral says he saw it the day previous, before 
 entering the bay. The indians informed him 
 that much gold existed there, and in masses as 
 big as the stern of the caravel. He called the 
 metal tuob, not understanding it by caona, as it 
 was called in the other part of the island, nor by 
 nozay, which was the name of it in San Salvador, 
 and the other islands. Copper, or base gold, was 
 called in Espanola tuob. The indian also spake 
 of the island of Matinino, which according to 
 his account, was peopled by women, without a 
 single man, and contained much tuob ; he describ- 
 ed it as situated East of Carib. Another island 
 containing gold he called Goanin* The Admiral 
 says he had been informed of these islands some 
 time before, and by several persons. In all the 
 islands they had visited, he declares that the in- 
 habitants entertained great fear of Carib, which 
 in some parts they called Caniba, but in Espa- 
 nola Carib. He thinks them to be a warlike 
 
 ■ Goanin, according to Las Casas, was the name given 
 bv the indians to a sort of inferior gold, which emitted an 
 odor, and was highly prized by them. Carib was the In- 
 dian name for the island of Porto Rico. 
 
©P COLUMBUS. 199 
 
 nation, as they make incursions upon the other 
 islands and devour the prisoners whom they take. 
 He understood some of the words which this in- 
 dian used, and by their help obtained the above 
 intelligence ; the indians on board understood 
 more, although there was a difference in their 
 dialects, occasioned by their countries being so 
 remote from one another. The indian above 
 mentioned, after having been feasted, was sent 
 away with a present of beads, and pieces of red 
 and green cloth, the Admiral requesting him to 
 bring back gold, if he possessed any, which was 
 suspected from some things he carried with him. 
 When the boat arrived at the land, they discov- 
 ered among the woods, fifty-five indians, armed 
 with bows; they were all naked, with coarse 
 hair, as long as the women wear it in Castile ; 
 the back part of their heads was adorned with 
 bunches of the feathers of parrots and other 
 birds. The indian in the boat, landing, joined 
 the others, and prevailed with them to lay down 
 their arms, which consisted of bows and arrows 
 with heavy wooden swords. They then came 
 to the boat, and the crew landed and went to 
 purchasing their arms, having been so ordered 
 by the iVdmiral. The indians having sold two 
 bows, refused to part with any more, but pre- 
 pared to attack the Spaniards, and running back 
 for their arms, returned bringing cords, for the 
 
200 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 purpose, as it seemed, of binding their prisoners. 
 The Spaniards finding themselves about to be 
 attacked, prepared for it, having many times 
 before been instructed by the Admiral to be 
 upon their guard, and as the indians were run- 
 ning to the assault, fell upon them, wounding 
 several in the breast with their cross-bows, and 
 one upon the posteriors with a sword. The in- 
 dians finding they were likely to have the worst 
 of the affray, although their enemies were but 
 seven, and they above fifty, took to flight every 
 one, leaving their weapons scattered here and 
 there. The Spaniards would have killed many, 
 but the v pilot who commanded them, would not 
 permit it. They then returned on board the 
 caravel, and informed the Admiral of the adven- 
 ture, who states that he regretted it on some ac- 
 counts, but was otherwise glad, because these 
 indians, whom he was now confident were Ca- 
 ribes, and a savage, man-eating race, would enter- 
 tain a dread of the Spaniards, and if the men 
 whom he had left at Navidad, should make a 
 voyage hither in their boat, the natives would be 
 cautious of offending them. Many smokes were 
 seen up in the country, as had been observed all 
 over the island. 
 
 Monday, Jan. 14th. The Admiral wishing to 
 make prisoners of some of the indians, intended 
 to dispatch the boat to land in the night, to visit 
 their house* for this purpose, but the wind blow- 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 201 
 
 ing strong from the E. and NE., occasioned a 
 rough sea which prevented it. When the day 
 came, a great many of the natives were seen on 
 shore, and the Admiral sent the boat well armed 
 to land. The indians all came crowding around 
 her, and among them the one who had visited 
 the caravel and received the presents the day 
 before. With these also came a king of the 
 country, who had dispatched this indian with some 
 beads to give the boat's crew in token of securi- 
 ty and peace. The king with three of his men, 
 entered the boat and went on board the caravel. 
 The Admiral treated them with biscuit and 
 honey, and gave the king, a red cap, some beads, 
 and red cloth ; to the others he presented pieces 
 of cloth, and dismissed them all highly pleased 
 to land, the king informing him that he would 
 bring him the next day a golden mask, and that 
 there was much of the metal at this place, as 
 well as in Carib and Matinino. The Admiral 
 here states that the caravels were very leaky 
 about the keels, and complains much of the 
 calkers at Palos, who did their work very badly, 
 and when this had been discovered by him, and 
 he endeavored to make them mend it, had ab- 
 sconded. But he says that in spite of the bad 
 state of his vessels he confides in our Lord, that as 
 he has brought him to these parts, so he will in 
 bis great mercy return him; for his Heavenly 
 25 
 
202 FIRST rOYAGE 
 
 Majesty knew what struggles it had cost him to 
 set on foot this enterprise, and that he alone had 
 favored him before the King and Queen, all 
 others in the most unreasonable manner opposing 
 him. He adds, ' these last have been the cause 
 that the royal crown of your Highnesses does not 
 possess at this day an hundred millions of reve- 
 nue more than when 1 entered your service, 
 from which time it will be seven years the twen- 
 tieth day of this month of January, without men- 
 tioning the increase to arrive hereafter. But Al- 
 mighty God will remedy all.' 
 
 Tuesday, Jan. 15th. The Admiral wished to 
 sail, as his stay could no longer be of any profit, 
 on account of the rupture with the indians. He 
 says he has discovered that most of the gold is in 
 the neighborhood of Villa de la JVavidad, and 
 that in the island of Carib, there is much copper, 
 as also in Matinino. To explore the first, he 
 thinks will be difficult, on account of the ferocity 
 of the inhabitants, and the last is stated to be 
 peopled solely by women. The island of Carib 
 was seen from this place, and he determined, as 
 they both lay in his route, to visit them and cap- 
 ture some of the natives. He sent the boat to 
 land, where they found that the king had not ar- 
 rived, his town being at a distance ; he, however, 
 sent his crown, which was of gold, as he had 
 promised the day before, and many of his men 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 203 
 
 came bringing cotton, bread and ajes, all armed 
 with bows and arrows. The traffic between 
 them being finished, there came four young indians 
 on board the caravel, where they gave so good an 
 account to the Admiral, of the island to the east? 
 which lay in his course homeward, that he deter- 
 mined to take them along wit!) him. Here he re- 
 lates that he had discovered no iron nor any oth- 
 er metal but those already mentioned, in these 
 quarters, although he acknowledges it impossible 
 to learn much of the country while they were 
 ignorant of the language, and were several days 
 in making the people understand a single thing. 
 The bows here, he describes as equal in size to 
 those of France and England, and the arrows just 
 like the javelins used by the inhabitants of the 
 other isles, which are made of stalks of the cane 
 while in seed; they are very straight, about a 
 yard and a half in length, and doubled, with a. 
 sharp piece of wood a span and a half long at 
 the end; at the point of this some affix a fishes 
 tooth, but the most of them, grass. These ar- 
 rows are shot in a manner which prevents their 
 doing much harm. A great deal of cotton was 
 found at this place very fine and long. Mastick 
 trees were in abundance, and the bows of the in- 
 dians appeared to be made of yew. The land 
 was found to produce much aji, which is the pep- 
 per of the inhabitants, and more valuable than 
 
204 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 the common sort ; they deem it very wholesome 
 and eat nothing without it. Fifty caravels might 
 be loaded every year with this commodity at 
 Espanola. The Admiral states that he found in 
 this bay a great deal of that sort of weed which 
 they met at sea upon their passage ; on which ac- 
 count he imagined there were islands extending 
 to the east as far as the place where they first 
 perceived it, as he held it for certain that this 
 weed grew in shoal water near the land. He 
 adds if the above be correct, these Indies 
 must be very near the Canary Isles, in his opin- 
 ion less than four hundred leagues distant. 
 
 Wednesday Jan. 16th. Three hours before 
 day they set sail from this gulf, which the Admi- 
 ral named Golfo de las Flechas* (the Gulf of Ar- 
 rows.) They had at first a land breeze, which 
 afterwards shifted to the west, when they steer- 
 ed east by north, for the island of Carib, which 
 contained the people of whom all the other in- 
 dians stood in terror, as they were accustomed to 
 scour all those seas with innumerable fleets of 
 canoes, and devour their prisoners. One of the 
 indians whom they had taken at the place last 
 quitted, directed them upon the route. After 
 sailing, as they judged sixty-four miles, the in- 
 dians signified to them that the island was to the 
 
 *Baye de Samana, 
 
or columbus. 205 
 
 SE.,* when they altered their course and pro- 
 ceeded in that direction, and having sailed a couple 
 of leagues, the wind freshened and blew very 
 favorably for their return to Spain. The crews 
 began to despond at leaving their course home- 
 ward, on account of the leaky state of the ves- 
 sels, there being no remedy for it but the help of 
 God, and the Admiral found himself constrained 
 to change his course anew, and steer directly for 
 Spain. He accordingly shaped his route NE. by 
 E., and sailed by sunset forty-eight miles or 
 twelve leagues. The indians informed him that 
 in this direction he would meet with the island 
 of Mcttinino, which was inhabited by women ; 
 the Admiral was very desirous to visit the place 
 and carry five or six of the inhabitants to Spain, 
 but doubted whether the indians knew the 
 course thither. Besides he was unwilling to be 
 detained any longer with his leaky vessels. He 
 says, however, that the fact respecting this island 
 is certain, and that the inhabitants are visited at 
 particular times of the year, by men from the isle 
 of Carib, which is about tenor a dozen leagues dis- 
 tant, and the male children which are born, they 
 send to that place, but keep the females them- 
 selves. The Admiral believed these islands to 
 be at the SE., and not more than fifteen or twen- 
 
 * Porto Rico 
 
206 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 ty leagues from the place whence they had sail- 
 ed, but he thought the indians were unable to 
 point out the way. Losing sij^ht of a cape in 
 Espanola, which he named San Theramo* and 
 which bore west, sixteen leagues distant, they sail- 
 ed twelve leagues E. by N. The weather was 
 very fine. 
 
 Thursday, Jan. 17th. At sunset yesterday, the 
 wind abated a little, and they sailed for fourteen 
 glasses, each of half an hour or a trifle less, till 
 the first watch, going four miles an hour, which 
 made twenty-eight miles. The wind then fresh- 
 ened and they sailed under it the whole watch, 
 which was ten glasses, and afterwards six more 
 till sunrise, at eight miles an hour, making in all 
 eighty-four miles or twenty-one leagues NE. by 
 E. By sunset they sailed forty-four miles or 
 eleven leagues further, in an easterly direction. 
 Here a pelican come on board the caravel, and 
 afterwards another. They saw much sea-weed.t 
 Friday, Jan. 18th. Kept on their course at 
 nio-ht E. by S., and sailed forty miles or ten 
 leagues. Afterwards steered SE. by E. till sun- 
 rise thirty miles, which are seven leagues and a 
 half. After sunrise sailed all day with light 
 
 * Cape Samana. 
 
 fThere is a shoal in this neigborhood, which they passed 
 four leagues to the south. 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 207 
 
 winds, from NE. and E., steering N. and 
 NE., going in the whole sixty miles or fifteen 
 leagues. But little sea-weed was seen, and the 
 Admiral says that yesterday and to-day the ocean 
 was covered with tunnies, which as he thinks 
 were accustomed to direct their course from 
 these parts, to the fisheries where the Spaniards 
 take them. A bird called a rabihorcado, which 
 flew about the caravel, and then went off to the 
 SE,. caused the Admiral to think there were 
 islands in that quarter.* 
 
 Saturday, Jan. 19th. In the night they sailed 
 fifty-six miles N. by E., and sixty-four NE. by N. 
 After sunrise the wind blew fresh from ESE., 
 and they stood NE. and afterward NE. by N., 
 going eighty-four miles, or twenty-one leagues. 
 The sea was covered with tunnies of a small size, 
 and they saw pelicans, tropic birds, and rabihor- 
 cadoes. 
 
 Sunday, Jan. 20th. The wind died away at 
 night, and afterwards blew in squalls ; they sail- 
 ed twenty-miles to the NE. After sunrise elev- 
 en miles to the SE., and then thirty-six miles or 
 nine leagues to the NNE. A vast number of small 
 tunnies were seen; the air was fresh and soft as 
 at Seville in April or May, and the sea 'many 
 thanks to God' says the Admiral, always smooth. 
 
 * The Antilles or windward islands lay in this direction. 
 
208 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 Rabihorcadoes, pardelas t and many other birds 
 appeared. 
 
 Monday, Jan. 21st. Yesterday, after sunset 
 they sailed N. by E., with the wind E. and NE., 
 going eight miles an hour till midnight, which 
 make fifty-six miles. Afterwards they steered 
 NNE., and sailed at the same rate through 
 out the night, making a hundred and four miles, 
 or twenty-six leagues. After sunrise kept on the 
 same course, with the wind at E., sometimes va- 
 rying their course to the NE., sailing in eleven 
 hours, eighty-eight miles or twenty-one leagues, 
 subtracting one which was lost in waiting to 
 speak with the Pinta. The air was found cool, 
 and this was expected to increase every day as 
 they advanced toward the north, and had longer 
 nights. A great many tropic birds, pardelas and 
 other fowl were seen, but not so great a multi- 
 tude of fish as before, which was thought to be 
 owing to the greater coolness of the water. 
 Weeds also in abundance. 
 
 Tuesday, Jan. 22d. After sunset last evening 
 they stood to the NNE., with the wind from E. 
 to SE., and sailed eight miles an hour for five 
 glasses, adding three which were sailed before 
 the watch, in all eight, which make seventy-two 
 miles or eighteen leagues. Afterwards sailed NE. 
 and N. six glasses, eighteen miles further. Then 
 four glasses of the second watch to the NE., six 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 20$ 
 
 miles an hour, which make three leagues. Then 
 till sunrise ENE., eleven glasses, six miles an hour, 
 making eight leagues and a quarter. Then 
 ENE. till eleven o'clock in the forenoon, thirty- 
 two miles, when it fell calm and thev made no 
 further progress. The indians went into the 
 sea to swim. Tropic birds and much weed were 
 seen. 
 
 Wednesday, Jan. 23d. Last night there were 
 many changes of the wind; making all the cus- 
 tomary calculations and allowances, they suppo- 
 sed their course had been eighty-four miles or 
 twenty-one leagues NE. by N. The Admiral 
 hove to many times for the Pinta, she sailing 
 badly upon the win<Jj having little aid from her 
 mizzen, as the mast was unsound. The Admiral 
 remarks that if the captain, Martin Alonzo Pinzon 
 had taken as much care to provide himself with 
 a new mast in the Indies, where there are so 
 many fine trees, as he had exerted in running 
 away from him in the hope of loading his vessel 
 with gold, they would not have laboured under 
 that inconvenience. They saw many tropic 
 birds and much weed ; the sky was totally over- 
 cast, but no rain: the sea all the time smooth as 
 a river, 'many thanks be to God' says the Admi- 
 ral. After sunrise they bore away to the NE., 
 and sailed thirty miles, or seven leagues and a 
 half; then ENE. as much further. 
 2fi 
 
210 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 Thursday, Jan. 24th. All last night the wind 
 kept shifting toward the NE., and they sailed 
 forty-four miles, or eleven leagues ; after sunrise 
 ENE. fourteen leagues. 
 
 Friday, Jan. 25th. At night, sailed ENE., 
 three glasses, nine leagues and a half, then NNE. 
 six miles further. After sunrise, the wind dying 
 away, they made no more than twenty-eight 
 miles, or seven leagues toward the ENE., till 
 night. The sailors took a tunny and a very 
 large shark, which was a seasonable supply of 
 food, for they had nothing to eat but bread and 
 ajes from India. 
 
 Saturday, Jan 26th. At night continued their 
 course East by South, fifty-six miles, or fourteen 
 leagues. After sunrise stood Southeasterly, and 
 sailed by eleven o'clock forty miles. Then hove 
 about and stood upon the wind twenty-four miles 
 or six leagues to the North. 
 
 Sundav, Jan. 27th. After sunset steered 
 NE. and N., sailing five miles an hour for thirteen 
 hours, which make sixty-five miles, or sixteen 
 leagues and a half. At sunrise sailed NE., 
 twenty-four miles, or six leagues, till noon, and 
 from that time till sunset, three leagues to the 
 ENE. 
 
 Monday, Jan. 28th. All night steered ENE, 
 thirty-six miles or nine leagues, and from sunrise 
 till night, twenty miles further in the same direc- 
 
 X 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 2 1 1 
 
 tion. The air was soft and mild. Saw tropic- 
 birds, pardehs, and much wee'd. 
 
 Tuesday, Jan. 29. Steered ENE. in the night, 
 with a Southerly wind, sailing thirty-nine miles or 
 nine leagues and a half. By day eight leagues 
 further. The air mild, as in Castile in April, and 
 the sea smooth. Many dories leaped on board. 
 
 Wednesday, Jan. 30th. At night sailed seven 
 leagues ENE. In the day, thirteen leagues and 
 a half South by East. Saw tropic-birds, and 
 abundance of tunnies and weed. 
 
 Thursday, Jan. 31st. Sailed in the night 
 thirty miles North by East, then NE., thirty-five 
 miles, in all sixteen leagues. From sunrise till 
 night, steered ENE., thirteen leagues and a half. 
 Tropic birds and pardelas were seen. 
 
 Friday, Feb. 1st. In the night sailed ENE., 
 sixteen leagues and a half; in the day, twenty- 
 nine leagues and a quarter, in the same direction. 
 The sea very smooth, ' thanks to God,' says the 
 Admiral. 
 
 Saturday, Feb. 2d. During the night sailed 
 ENE. forty miles or ten leagues. In the day, 
 with the same wind astern, sailed seven miles an 
 hour, going in eleven hours, seventy-seven miles, 
 which are nineteen leagues and a quarter. The 
 sea very smooth, thanks to God, and the air soft. 
 The sea was so covered with weeds that those 
 
212 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 unacquainted with them would have taken them 
 for shoals. Pardelas were seen. 
 
 Sunday, Feb. 3d. The wind astern at night, 
 and the sea smooth, thanks to God, they sailed 
 twenty-nine leagues. The polar star appeared 
 as high as at Cape St. Vincent, but the motion of 
 the vessel would not allow them to take its alti- 
 tude with the astrolabe or quadrant. In the day 
 continued their course ENE., sailing ten miles an 
 hour, going in eleven hours twenty-seven leagues. 
 
 Monday, Feb. 4th. At night, steered East by 
 North, going ten and eleven miles an hour ; sailed 
 a hundred and thirty miles, which are thirty-two 
 leagues and a half. The sky was very cloudy, 
 with rain, and the air began to grow cold, for 
 which reason the Admiral says he knew he had 
 not yet reached the Azores. After sunrise, altered 
 their course to the East. All day sailed seventy- 
 seven miles, which are nineteen leagues and a 
 quarter. 
 
 Tuesday, Feb. 5th. All night sailed East. 
 fifty-four miles, or thirteen leagues and a half; in 
 the day ten miles an hour, for eleven hours, mak- 
 ing a hundred and ten miles, or twenty-seven 
 leagues and a half. Saw pardelas and some small 
 sticks, a sign that they were near land. 
 
 Wednesday, Feb. 6th. In the night steered 
 East, eleven miles an hour, going a hundred and 
 forty-three miles, or thirty-five leagues and a 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 213 
 
 quarter, in thirteen hours. Saw many pardelas 
 and other birds. In the day sailed fourteen miles 
 an hour, making, day and ni<>'ht about seventy-four 
 leagues. Vincent Yanez said that this morning 
 the island of Flores bore North, and that of Ma- 
 deira, East. Roldan stated that the island of 
 Fayal or that of St. Gregory bore NE., and 
 Porto Santo, East. Many weeds were seen. 
 
 Thursday, Feb. 7th. All night sailed East, 
 ten miles an hour, making in thirteen hours, a 
 hundred and thirty miles, or thirty-two leagues 
 and a half. In the day, eight miles an hour, 
 eighty-eight miles or twenty-two leagues. This 
 morning the Admiral was by his reckoning, sev- 
 enty-five leagues south of the island of Flores. 
 The reckoning of Pedro Alonzo, the pilot, carri- 
 ed him as far North as a point between Tercera 
 and Santa Maria, and to the East, twelve leagues 
 beyond the meridian of Madeira. The sailors 
 saw a great deal of weed, different from that ob- 
 served before, and of that sort which abounds in 
 the Azores. Afterwards met with it of the for- 
 mer kind. 
 
 Friday, Feb. 8th. At night sailed three miles 
 an hour, to the E. for some time, then SE.; going 
 twelve leagues during the night. From sunrise 
 till noon, sailed twenty-seven miles, and from that 
 time to sunset, as much farther; in all, thirteen 
 leagues SSE. 
 
214 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 Saturday, Feb, 9th. Part of the night sailed 
 SSE. three leagues, then S. by E., afterwards 
 NE. five leagues till ten o'clock, thence till night, 
 nine leagues to the East. 
 
 Sunday, Feb. 10th. After sunset sailed E. all 
 night, going a hundred and thirty miles, or 
 thirty-two leagues and a half; from sunrise till 
 night sailed nine miles an hour, making ninety- 
 nine miles, or twenty four leagues and three 
 quarters. On board the Admiral's caravel, reck- 
 onings were kept by Vincent Yanez, the two 
 pilots, Sancho Ruiz and Pedro Alonzo Nino, and 
 Roldan. All these, by their own accounts were 
 far beyond the Azores to the E., and no one so 
 far north as Santa Maria, which is the most south- 
 erly of the group, so that their reckonings 
 brought them in the neighborhood of Madeira or 
 Porto Santo. The Admiral w 7 as much behind 
 them, finding himself that night S. of the island 
 of Flores, and in the latitude of Nafe in Africa. 
 Thus their accounts made them nearer to Spain 
 than his by an hundred and fifty leagues. He 
 remarks that by the grace of God they shall find 
 upon making land, who is the most correct. 
 He further observes that upon their passage 
 out they sailed two-hundred and sixty-three 
 leagues before they met with the weeds. 
 
 Monday, Feb. 11th. Kept on their course in 
 the night, twelve miles an hour, and sailed 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 215 
 
 thirty-nine leagues ; in the day, sixteen and a 
 half. Saw many birds, on which account they 
 thought themselves near land. 
 
 Tuesday, Feb. 12th. Sailed E. six miles an 
 hour through the night, going seventy-three 
 miles, or eighteen leagues and a quarter. Here 
 the wind began to blow furiously with a heavy 
 sea, and if the caravel had not been a good ves- 
 sel, and well prepared, they would have been in 
 danger of perishing. During the day they sailed 
 eleven or twelve leagues with much labour and 
 hazard. 
 
 Wednesday, Feb. 13th. From sunset till day, 
 they laboured exceedingly with a high wind and 
 furious sea ; it lightened three times in the NE., 
 which in the Admiral's opinion was a sign of a 
 violent tempest from that, or the opposite quar- 
 ter. They scudded under bare poles most of 
 the night, and afterwards set a little sail and 
 went fifty-two miles or thirteen leagues. In the 
 day the wind remitted somewhat, and then 
 sprung up with more violence ; the sea was 
 terrible, running cross and causing the vessel to 
 labour excessively. They made a progress of 
 fifty-five miles, or thirteen leagues and a half. 
 
 Thursday, Feb 14th. In the night the wind 
 increased, and the sea was most tremendous, the 
 waves crossing and dashing against one another, 
 so that the vessel was overwhelmed, and not able 
 
216 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 to get out from between them. The foresail 
 was set very low, in order to carry her somewhat 
 out of her dangerous situation; they stood under 
 it for three hours, going twenty miles, when the 
 wind and sea increasing, they began to drive be- 
 fore it, not having any other remedy. At the 
 same time, the Pinta, in which was Martin 
 Alonzo, began to scud likewise, and they soon 
 lost sight of her, although the two caravels made 
 signals to one another by lights, until from the 
 fury of the storm they were no longer percepti- 
 ble. The Admiral drove all night to the NE. by 
 E., going fifty-four miles or thirteen leagues. 
 At sunrise the wind still increased, and the cross 
 sea grew more and more terrible ; they set the 
 foresail again, low, to carry them out from be- 
 tween the waves, among which they expected to 
 be crushed. They kept to the ENE., and after- 
 wards to the NE. going in six hours thus, seven 
 leagues and a half. The Admiral ordered that 
 lots should be cast for one of them to go on a 
 pilgrimage to St. Mary of Guadalupe and carry 
 a wax taper of five pounds weight ; he caused 
 them all to take an oath that the one on whom 
 the lot fell, should perform the pilgrimage. For 
 this purpose as many peas were selected as 
 there wore persons on board, one of them 
 was marked with a cross, and the whole shaken 
 together in a cap. The first who put his hand 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 217 
 
 in, was the Admiral, and he drew the crossed 
 pea. So the lot fell upon him, and he looked 
 upon himself as bound to accomplish the pil- 
 grimage. Another lot was taken for a pilgrim- 
 age to St. Mary of Loretto, in the marc of Anco- 
 na, territory of the pope, which is the house 
 where Our Lady has performed so many mira- 
 cles, this fell upon a sailor of Puerto de Santa 
 Maria, called Pedro de Villa; the Admiral 
 promised to furnish him with money for his ex- 
 penses. A third lot was determined upon, for 
 the selection of a person who should watch a 
 whole night in St. Clara de Moguer, and have a 
 mass said there ; it fell again upon the Admiral. 
 After this, he and all the crew made a vow to 
 go in procession, clothed in penitential garments, 
 to the first church dedicated to Our Lady 
 which they should meet with on arriving at land, 
 and there pay their devotions. 
 
 Besides these general vows, every individual 
 made his private one, all expecting to be lost, so fu- 
 rious was the rage of the hurricane. Their danger 
 was increased by the want of ballast in the vessel, 
 as their provisions were mostly consumed, and their 
 wine and water gone, which deficiencies the Ad- 
 miral had neglected to supply among the islands, 
 because he wished to husband his time in making 
 discoveries, and expected to take in ballast at the 
 isle of the women, which he intended to visit, 
 27 
 
218 
 
 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 All the remedy they could devise in the present 
 extremity was to fill with sea-water such empty 
 casks as they could get at, and in this manner 
 they obtained some relief. 
 
 Here the Admiral states the circumstances 
 which caused him to fear that our Lord would 
 suffer them to perish, and others which gave 
 him hope that he would bring them safe to 
 land, and not allow the important information 
 they were carrying to the King and Queen to 
 be lost. He seems to have felt the most anxious 
 desire to have his great discovery known, so that 
 the world might be convinced the assertions made 
 by him had been correct, and that he had accom- 
 plished what he professed himself abie to do ; 
 the thought of this not being done, gave him the 
 greatest inquietude, and he was perpetually in ap- 
 prehensions as the smallest trifle miglit defeat 
 his whole undertaking.* He ascribes this to his 
 want of faith and confidence in the Divine Provi- 
 dence, but comforts himself in reflecting upon the 
 many mercies God had shown him in having ena- 
 bled him to conquerall his adversities and hindran- 
 ces in Castile, and accomplish his great discovery. 
 And as he had made the service of God the aim 
 and business of his undertaking, and he had hith- 
 erto favoured him in granting all his desire, he 
 indulges a hope that he will continue that favour, 
 
 * Cada mosquito le podia perturbar y impediar. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 219 
 
 and secure him a safe arrival. Especially he re- 
 •flected that he had delivered him when he had 
 much greater reason for fear, upon the outward 
 voyage, at which time the crew rose up against 
 him, and with an unanimous and threatening voice, 
 resolved to return back, but the eternal God 
 gave him spirit and valour against them all. 
 With these thoughts and the consideration of 
 other wonderful favors he had experienced, he 
 says he ought not to be in fear of the tempest ; 
 but he adds that his apprehensions and the an- 
 guish of his mind would not allow him to rest ; 
 besides, he continues, his anxiety was increased 
 in reflecting upon the state of his two sons whom 
 he had left at their studies in Cordova, these 
 would be left orphans in a foreign land, and 
 the King and Queen being ignorant of the ser- 
 vices he had rendered them by the voyage, 
 would not feel any inclination to provide for 
 them. On this account, and that their High- 
 nesses might be informed that our Lord had 
 granted success to the enterprise in the discov- 
 ery of the Indies, and might know that storms 
 did not prevail in those quarters,* (which was 
 apparent from the plants and trees growing 
 
 * It was a very fortunate circumstance for Columbus 
 that he arrived in the West Indies so late in the year. 
 The hurricane season was just past, and had he reached 
 there a month sooner, it is probable one of those dreadful 
 tempests would have destroyed his whole fleet. 
 
220 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 down to the very brink of the sea,) he devised 
 a method of acquainting them with the circum- 
 stances of the voyage in case they should perish 
 in the storm ; this he performed by writing upon 
 parchment an account of it, as full as possible, 
 and earnestly entreating the finder to carry it to 
 the King and Queen of Spain. The parchment 
 was rolled up in a waxed cloth, and well tied ; a 
 large wooden cask being then produced, he plac- 
 ed it within, and threw it into the sea, none of the 
 crew knowing what it was, but all taking it for 
 some act of devotion. Violent showers of rain 
 followed, and the wind shifted to the West, when 
 they scudded before it under the foresail five 
 hours, with a tremendous sea, going two leagues 
 and a half to the NE. The mainsail was taken 
 in, lest the sea should carry it away altogether. 
 Friday, Feb. 15th. After sunset last night, 
 the sky began to grow clear in the West, and the 
 wind inclined to that quarter. The bonnet v as 
 set upon the mainsail. The sea was high, but 
 abating. They steered ENE. four miles an 
 hour, and during the night w 7 ent thirteen leagues. 
 At sunrise they discovered land ahead, which some 
 thought to be Madeira, and others the rock of 
 Cintra near Lisbon. The land being about five 
 leagues distant, the wind suddenly came round to 
 the ENE., directly ahead. According to the 
 Admiral's reckoning they were near the Azores^ 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 221 
 
 and he took this for one of those islands. The 
 others were by their calculation near Spain. 
 
 Saturday, Feb. 16th. All night they beat 
 against the wind for the land, which was found to 
 be an island. They stood to the NE. and NNE. 
 till sunrise, when they hove about for the South, 
 in quest of the island, which was hidden from 
 them by clouds, and discovered another island 
 astern, at the distance of eight leagues. From 
 sunrise till night they continued beating for the 
 island, against a violent wind and heavy sea. At 
 the time of saying the salve which is in the be- 
 ginning of the night, a light was seen by some of 
 the crew to leeward, which appeared to be the 
 island first seen yesterday. All night they kept 
 plying to windward, to discover, if possible, the 
 islands by sunrise. The Admiral took a little 
 rest, having since Wednesday, neither slept nor 
 been able to do so; he found himself exceeding- 
 ly lame from exposure to the cold and waves, 
 and the little food which he had taken. They 
 steered SSW., and at night espied an island, 
 which, by reason of the clouds, they did not re- 
 cognise. 
 
 Monday, Feb. 18th. After sunset last night 
 they sailed round the island to find an anchor- 
 age and communicate with those on shore. An 
 anchor was dropped which they quickly lost, and 
 were obliged to put to sea again, beating to 
 
222 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 windward all night. At sunrise they stood to- 
 ward the North part of the island, where ^hey 
 once more cast anchor, and sending the boat to 
 land, ascertained that it was the island of St. 
 Mary, one of the Azores. The inhabitants di- 
 rected them to a harbour for the caravel, and 
 declared that they had never witnessed a storm 
 like that which had endured for fifteen days 
 past, and wondered how the Spaniards had es- 
 caped. The islanders returned thanks to God, 
 and rejoiced much to hear that the Aamiral 
 had discovered the Indies. He says that his 
 reckoning had been very true, for which he gave 
 many thanks to our Lord. And although.it ap- 
 parently run a little beyond their true situation, 
 yet he had held it for certain that they were 
 in the neighborhood of the Azores, one of which 
 isles he thought this to be, upon the discovery 
 of it. He adds that he suffered his reckoning to 
 run ahead of their true progress for the pur- 
 pose of humoring the pilots and others who 
 made calculations, these having manifested great 
 dissatisfaction at finding his accounts differing 
 from their own. 
 
 Tuesday, Feb. 19th. After sunset, three men 
 came down to the shore and called out to them. 
 The boat was sent, and they came on board 
 bringing fowls and new bread with other things, 
 it being shrove-tide ; these were sent by the 
 Captain of the island, who was named Juan de 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 223 
 
 Castaneda, and stated that he was well acquaint- 
 ed with the Admiral, but could not visit him on 
 account of the night. He promised to come on 
 board in the morning with other refreshments, 
 and bring with him the three Spaniards who had 
 been sent on shore, and whom as he declared, 
 he detained for the great pleasure of hearing 
 them relate the particulars of the voyage. The 
 Admiral ordered every respect to be shown 
 towards the messengers of the Captain, and 
 assigned them beds for sleeping on board, as it 
 was late and the town distant. And remember- 
 ing the vow they had made during the storm, to 
 go in penitential garments to the first church 
 dedicated to Our Lady, which they should meet 
 on coming to land, he directed that one half the 
 crew should go and fulfil their vow at a hermit- 
 age near the shore, and himself with the other 
 half afterwards. Not seeing any thing to fear on 
 the land, and confiding in the offers of the Cap- 
 tain, and the amity which subsisted between Por- 
 tugal and astile, he requested the three island- 
 ers to go to the town and send him an ecclesi- 
 astic for the purpose of reciting a mass. The 
 crew being at the hermitage at their devo- 
 tions in accomplishment of the vow, the whole 
 population attacked them with horse and foot, 
 the Captain at their head, and took them all 
 prisoners. Meantime the Admiral continued 
 
224 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 waiting without any suspicion, for the return 
 of the boat, that he might go with the rest of 
 the crew in their turn. About eleven o'clock in 
 the forenoon, seeing nothing of his men, he be- 
 gan to suspect that the Portuguese had detained 
 them, or the boat was wrecked, the shore being 
 high and rocky. Nothing could be discovered 
 on land, as the hermitage was situated behind a 
 point. He ordered the anchor to be weighed, 
 and they made sail till they came off against the 
 place, when they discovered many persons on 
 horseback, who alighted and entering the boat 
 with their arms, came off towards the caravel 
 for the purpose of capturing the Admiral. The 
 captain stood up in the boat and demanded a se- 
 curity of the Admiral, who replied that he would 
 grant the request, but wished to know why none 
 of the Spaniards were in the boat ; he invited 
 him on board the caravel, promising to satisfy 
 all his demands ; this he did in order to make a 
 prisoner of him and recover his crew, but the 
 Captain finding he was unlikely to succeed in 
 his attempt, did not dare come on board. The 
 Admiral seeing that he could not entice him into 
 his hands, demanded to be informed, why he 
 detained his men, and how they had offend- 
 ed the king of Portugal, adding that in the 
 dominions of the King and Queen of Castile, the 
 Portuguese were treated with every respect and 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 225 
 
 were as free and safe as at Lisbon. He further 
 informed him that his sovereigns had given him 
 letters of recommendation to all Princes, Sove- 
 reigns and commanders in the world, which he 
 was ready to exhibit if desired ; and that he was 
 their Admiral of the Sea and Viceroy of the In- 
 dies, which then belonged to their Highnesses. 
 The commission to this effect, signed and sealed 
 by their hands he displayed to the captain who 
 remained at a distance. To these representa- 
 tions he subjoined others relating to the amity 
 which subsisted between the King and Queen of 
 Castile and the King of Portugal, and the or- 
 ders which had been given by the former to 
 treat with respect all Portuguese ships. If 
 notwithstanding these considerations, he refus- 
 ed to release his crew, he stated that he should 
 not be hindered from proceeding to Castile, as he 
 had men enough left to navigate his vessel to 
 Seville, and the Captain and his followers would 
 be severely punished for the injury they had 
 done him. HL he Captain and others in the boat 
 replied that they knew nothing there of the 
 King and Queen of Castile, or their commissions, 
 nor cared for them, but would make the Span- 
 iards learn what the Portuguese were, expecting 
 to intimidate the Admiral. This gave him much 
 anxiety, suspecting that some difference had 
 arisen between the two kingdoms since his de- 
 28 
 
226 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 parture, and he could not refrain from answering 
 the Captain in such a manner as his conduct mer- 
 ited. The Captain stood up again in the boat 
 and ordered him to proceed with the caravel 
 to the harbour, adding that all he had done was 
 by order of the king, his master. The Admiral 
 ordered all on board his vessel to bear witness 
 to these transactions, and called out to the Cap- 
 tain and those with him, vowing that he would 
 not leave the caravel till he had carried a hun- 
 dred of the Portuguese to Castile, and depopu- 
 lated the island. He then returned to his an- 
 chorage in the harbour, as the wind and weather 
 did not admit of taking any other course. 
 
 Wednesday, Feb. 20th. The Admiral ordered 
 the vessel to be set in order, and the casks to be 
 filled from the sea for ballast, as the harbour 
 was very bad, and he feared the rocky bottom 
 would cut the cables, which in fact happened, 
 and they put to sea toward the island of St. Mi- 
 chael. There was no harbour in all the Azores, 
 which was safe from the weather which then 
 prevailed, and the only remedy was to stand off 
 to sea. 
 
 Thursday, Feb. 21st. They left the island of 
 St. Mary last night for that of St. Michael, in 
 search of a harbour against the bad weather, the 
 wind being high with a heavy sea. They sailed 
 all night without seeing any land, by reason of the 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 227 
 
 clouds, and the obscurity which the wind and sea 
 caused. The Admiral says, he was under some 
 concern, having but three experienced sailors on 
 board, the remainder being ignorant of maritime 
 affairs. They kept lying to with much labour 
 and danger from the violence of the storm. In 
 one respect Our Lord showed his mercy, the sea 
 and wind came in one direction, had they been 
 cross, the damage suffered would have been 
 much greater. At sunrise, not seeing the island 
 of St. Michael, the Admiral resolved to return 
 to St. Mary's, and attempt the recovery of his 
 crew, with the boat and anchors which had been 
 lost. 
 
 He expresses his astonishment at the furious 
 storms among these islands, having sailed in the 
 Indies all the winter without being forced to 
 anchor by the weather, and not having for a single 
 hour witnessed the sea unfit to navigate. He 
 remarks that he met with stormy weather upon 
 the passage outward till his arrival at the Ca- 
 naries, but after that, had always a smooth sea 
 and fine wind. He draws the conclusion that 
 the theologians and learned philosophers had 
 very justly placed the terrestrial paradise at the 
 extremity of the East, the climate there being 
 exceedingly mild. This is the region, he says, 
 that he has discovered. 
 
228 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 Friday, Feb. 22d. Yesterday they anchored 
 at the island of St. Mary, in the place they had 
 o3cupied before, and presently a man came clam- 
 bering down the rocky shore opposite them, and 
 called out for them not to leave the place. 
 Shortly after, came the boat with five sailors, 
 two ecclesiastics, and a notary. They demanded 
 a security, which being given by the Admiral, 
 they came on board, and it being night slept 
 there, he showing them every respect in his 
 power. In the morning they requested to see 
 his commissions from the King and Queen ol Cas- 
 tile, that they might be satisfied he had made the 
 voyage by their order. The Admiral was sen- 
 sible that they did this by way of a colour for 
 their previous conduct, wishing to get free from 
 the affair as well as they could, having failed in 
 the attempt to seize him. It appeared that 
 they were apprehensive he would carry his 
 threat into effect. The Admiral in order to 
 regain his men, thought fit to show them the 
 King and Queen's letters, and his other commis- 
 sions, he then treated them with such things as he 
 had, and dismissed them contented ashore. The 
 crew in the island were then released, and came 
 on board in the boat ; from them the Admiral 
 learned that had the Portuguese succeeded in 
 taking him, he would never have got free, for 
 as the Captain stated, the King his master had 
 o-iven orders to that effect. 
 
OF COLUMBUS, 229 
 
 Saturday, Feb. 23d. Yesterday the weather 
 began to grow favourable ; they weighed an- 
 chor, and sailed round the island, searching for 
 a good anchorage, to take in wood, and stone for 
 ballast. Could not succeed till evening. 
 
 Sunday, Feb. 24th. Came to anchor last eve- 
 ning, but the sea being high, the boat was not 
 able to land. At the first watch of the night, 
 the wind began to blow from the W. and SW. 
 and the Admiral ordered the sails to be set; 
 as it was dangerous in those islands to lie at an- 
 chor with a Southerly wind, and from the SW. 
 it quickly shifts to S. Seeing that it blew fa- 
 vorably for the passage to Castile, he resolved 
 not to wait for the wood and ballast, and ordered 
 to steer to the E., in which direction they sailed 
 till sunrise, for the space of six hours and a half, 
 seven miles an hour, going forty-five miles and a 
 half. From sunrise till sunset they sailed six 
 miles an hour, going sixty-six miles, in all twenty- 
 eight leagues. 
 
 Monday, Feb. 25th. After sunset last night 
 they kept on their course E., five miles an hour 
 till sunset, sailing sixty-five miles or sixteen 
 leagues and a quarter. From thence till sunrise 
 the next morning, sixteen leagues and a half, the 
 sea smooth, thanks to God. There came to the 
 vessel a very large bird like an eagle. 
 
 Tuesday, Feb. 26th. Continued their course 
 
230 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 E., after sunset, the sea smooth, thanks to God. 
 For the most of the night sailed eight miles an 
 hour, going a hundred miles, or twenty-five 
 leagues. After sunrise the wind grew light with 
 showers. Went about eight leagues to the ENE. 
 
 Wednesday, Feb. 27th. Last night and all 
 this day they were driven out of their course 
 by the contrary wind and heavy sea. The Ad- 
 miral found himself by his reckoning, one hun- 
 dred and twenty-five leagues from Cape St. Vin- 
 cent, eighty from the island of Madeira, and one 
 hundred and six from that of St. Mary. He 
 was much afflicted at meeting with such a storm 
 so near home. 
 
 Thursday, Feb. 28th. Kept on in the same 
 manner through the night, the wind varying 
 from S. to SE. and NE. the same through the 
 day. 
 
 Friday, March 1st. In the night sailed E. by 
 N., twelve leagues ; in the day, twenty-three 
 leagues and a half in the same direction. 
 
 Saturday, March 2d. At night kept on their 
 course E. by N., sailing twenty-eight leagues ; by 
 day, twenty more. 
 
 Sunday, March 3d. After sunset continued 
 their course E. A violent squall struck the 
 vessel and split all the sails. They were in im- 
 minent danger, but God saw fit to deliver them. 
 A lot was ordered for the choice of one to go on 
 a pilgrimage in penitential garments to St. Mary 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 231 
 
 de la Cinta, in Huelba, and the lot fell again upon 
 the Admiral. They all made a vow to fast upon 
 bread and water the first Saturday after their 
 arrival. Sixty miles had been sailed before the 
 sails were split, afterwards they drove under 
 bare poles, with a furious tempest and cross sea. 
 Signs of land were seen, and all judged them- 
 selves near Lisbon. 
 
 Monday, March 4th. In the night they la- 
 boured with a terrible storm, and were near 
 meeting with destruction from the cross sea, the 
 fury of the wind, which seemed to carry them 
 up to the skies, and the violent showers 
 and lightning from many parts, but it pleased 
 our Lord to sustain them, and they drove before 
 the storm till the first watch, when the sailors 
 discovered land, and in order not to approach 
 too near it before discovering a harbour or place 
 of shelter, they set the foresail and stood off to 
 sea, although with great danger, but there was 
 no other course. God preserved them till day, 
 but as the Admiral says, with infinite labour and 
 apprehension on their part. When the day ar- 
 rived they found the land to be the Rock of 
 Cintra, near Lisbon, where the Admiral deter- 
 mined to enter, as he could do no better, the 
 violence of the storm not allowing him to remain 
 at Cascaes,near the mouth of the river. He 
 states that the people of the town were all the 
 
232 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 morning offering up prayers for the safety of the 
 vessel, and upon her arrival within the river ran 
 in crowds to see the Spaniards, wondering at 
 their escape. At three o'clock they arrived at 
 Rastelo upon the Tagus, and were informed by 
 the mariners of the place that such a stormy 
 winter had never been known, twenty-five ships 
 being lost in Flanders, and others had been de- 
 tained four months without being able to put to 
 sea. The Admiral immediately wrote to the 
 King of Portugal, who was nine leagues from 
 that place, and informed him that the King and 
 Queen of Castile had directed him to enter the 
 ports of his Highness to purchase necessaries, 
 and that he had come not from Guinea, but the 
 Indies. He requested permission for the cara- 
 vel to proceed to Lisbon, by reason that some 
 avaricious persons, imagining that the vessel con- 
 tained much gold, might in that lonely place at- 
 tempt some deed of violence. 
 
 Tuesday, March 5th. This day Bartolome 
 Diaz de Lisboa the Patron of the principal Por- 
 tuguese ship which lay at anchor at Rastelo, 
 came in an armed boat to the caravel, and signi- 
 fied to the Admiral that he must go with them 
 and give an account of himself to the stewards of 
 the king, and the Captain of the abovementioned 
 ship; he replied that he was Admiral of the 
 King and Queen of Castile, and gave no accounts 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 
 
 233 
 
 to any such persons, adding that he should not 
 leave his vessel except by force of arms. The 
 Patron then said he might send the master of 
 the caravel, to which the Admiral answered that 
 neither the master nor any other person should 
 go unless compelled by violence, for he looked 
 upon it to be the same as going himself, and it 
 was the custom of the Castilian Admirals rather 
 to die than deliver up either themselves or their 
 men. The Patron then grew moderate and said 
 he might do as he pleased, seeing he held such 
 a resolution, but requested to see the letters of 
 the King and Queen of Castile, which the Admi- 
 ral thought best to show him, when he returned 
 to the ship, and related the circumstance to the 
 Captain, whose name was Alvaro Da ma. The 
 captain came on board the Admiral in great 
 pomp with drums, trumpets and pipes, oifering to 
 serve him in any way he desired. 
 
 Wednesday, March 6th. The news of the 
 Admiral's arrival from the Indies being known at 
 Lisbon, there came a vast multitude from the city 
 to visit him, and see the Indians ; it was a matter 
 of admiration to behold the crowds, and the 
 wonder which they manifested, giving thanks to 
 Our Lord, and declaring that for the great faith, 
 and desire to serve God which the King and 
 Queen of Castile displayed, the Almighty had 
 granted them all this. 
 29 
 
234 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 Thursday, March 7th. This day came an in- 
 finite multitude of people to the caravel, and 
 among them many knights, and the two royal 
 stewards ; all gave unbounded thanks to our 
 Lord for the great profit and increase of Christi- 
 anity thus secured to the Sovereigns of Castile, 
 which they attributed to the zeal of these Princ- 
 es for the advancement of the christian religion. 
 
 Friday, March 8th. This day the Admiral 
 received by the hands of Martin de Noronha, a 
 letter from the King of Portugal, requesting him 
 to pay him a visit, as the weather did not permit 
 him to sail : The Admiral thought proper to 
 comply, in order not to show mistrust, although 
 he disliked it. He set out upon the journey and 
 slept at Sacanben. The King ordered his stew- 
 ards to furnish him and his crew with every 
 thing they stood in need of, free of cost, and to 
 perform every wish of the Admiral. 
 
 Saturday, March 9th. He left Sacanben to 
 meet the king, who was at Val do Paraiso, nine 
 leagues from Lisbon ; he did not reach the place 
 till night on account of the rain. The king caus- 
 ed him to be received in the most honorable 
 manner by the principal persons of his house- 
 hold, and conducted into his presence, where he 
 treated him with the greatest respect, causing 
 him to be seated. He then entered into con- 
 versation with him, and offered to perform every 
 thin 0, which coukl be for his service or that of 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 235 
 
 the King and Queen of Castile. He expressed 
 the highest pleasure at the success of the voyage? 
 but remarked that he understood, according to 
 the capitulation between him and those sove- 
 reigns, that this acquisition belonged to him. The 
 Admiral replied that he had not seen the capitu- 
 lation, nor was acquainted with any other cir- 
 cumstance respecting the matter, except that his 
 orders had been not to go to the mine, nor to 
 any part of Guinea, and that this had been pub- 
 lished in all the ports of Andalusia before the 
 voyage. The King graciously answered that he 
 was certain no vouchers for that fact were ne- 
 necessary. He ordered the Prior of Crato to 
 entertain him,who was the person of the highest 
 distinction in the place. This man treated him 
 with every honour and attention. 
 
 Sunday, March 10th. After mass, the King 
 repeated to him that he would furnish him with 
 any thing he desired. Much arguing arose 
 between them about the voyage; the king al- 
 ways desiring him to be seated and doing him 
 much honour.* 
 
 Monday, March 1 lib. The Admiral took 
 leave of the King, who entrusted him with a 
 message to the King and Queen of Castile ; and 
 dismissed him with many marks of affection. He 
 
 * See Note III. 
 
236 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 set out after dinner, attended by Don Martin 
 de Noronha, and all the knights, who by the 
 King's direction escorted him some distance. 
 Arriving at a monastery of St. Anthony near 
 Villafranca, where the Queen resided, he went 
 to pay his respects and kiss her hands, she hav- 
 ing requested him not to depart without paying 
 her a visit. She received him very honorably 
 in presence of the Duke and Marquis. He left 
 her at night, and went to sleep at Llandra. 
 
 Tuesday, March 12th. On the point of set- 
 ting out from Llandra, there arrived a gentle- 
 man from the King, informing him that if he 
 wished to go to Castile by land, he was ready to 
 attend him for the purpose of providing convey- 
 ances and lodgings upon the road, and any other 
 thing which might be necessary. When the 
 Admiral took leave of him, he ordered him a 
 mule, and another for the pilot, to whom as the 
 Admiral learnt, he also presented twenty cspa- 
 dims* He mentions this, as he says, that the 
 King and Queen might know it. He arrived 
 on board the caravel at night. 
 
 Wednesday, March 13th. At eight o'clock, 
 weighed anchor and put to sea for Seville, with 
 a Northwest wind and heavy sea. 
 
 Thursday, March 14th. After sunset last 
 
 * Gold coin. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 237 
 
 night, steered South, and before morning found 
 themselves off Cape St. Vincent. They then 
 stood to the East for Salles, and sailed with a 
 light wind till night, when they were off Furon. 
 Friday, March 15th. After sunset continued 
 their course with little wind, and at sunrise found 
 themselves offSaltes. At noon they crossed the 
 bar with the flood tide, and arrived within the 
 port, from whence they had sailed on the third 
 of August, the preceeding year. And here, the 
 Admiral says, this relation ends, but that he pur- 
 poses to go to Barcelona by sea, being informed 
 that their Highnesses are in that city, there to 
 give them an account of his voyage, in which 
 our Lord had directed and enlightened him. 
 For although he believed without scruple that 
 the Almighty created all things good, that all is 
 excellent but sin, and that nothing can be done 
 without his permission, 'yet' he observes,' it has 
 been most wonderfully manifested in the circum- 
 stances of this voyage, as may be seen by consid- 
 ering the many signal miracles performed through- 
 out, as well as the fortune which has attended my- 
 self, who passed so long a time at the court of vour 
 Highnesses, and met with the opposition of so 
 many of the principal persons of your household, 
 who were all against me, and ridiculed my pro- 
 ject. The which I hope in Our Lord will prove 
 
238 FIRST VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS. 
 
 the greatest honour to Christianity ever accom- 
 plished with such ease.' These are the final 
 words of the Admiral Don Christopher Colum- 
 bus, in the relation of his first voyage and dis- 
 covery of the Indies. 
 
LETTER 
 
 COLUMBUS TO RAFAEL SANCHEZ. 
 
 The following summary account of the voy- 
 age was written by our navigator on his arrival 
 at Lisbon. It was translated into semi-barbarous 
 Latin by Leandro Cosco and published at Rome 
 in 1493. It appears to have been reprinted, 
 but the work is rarely to be met with, and the 
 copies very imperfect. According to the state- 
 ment of Munoz, the greater part of the original 
 text has been preserved in an unpublished his- 
 tory of the Catholic Kings written by Andreo 
 Bernaldez the Court Chaplain. Don Francisco 
 Antonio Gonzalez the royal Librarian has col- 
 lated the different copies of this work, and trans- 
 lated it into Spanish for the collection of Navar- 
 rete. It is subjoined here with the title prefixed 
 to the first edition. 
 
240 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 Letter 'of Christopher Columbus, the great Benefactor of the 
 present age, concerning the newly discovered islands of India 
 upon the Ganges, upon which enterprise he was despatched eight 
 months since by the invincible Sovereigns of Spain, Ferdinand 
 and Isabela ; directed to Don Ilafael Sanchez, Treasurer of 
 their most Serene Highnesses. Translated from the Spanish 
 into Latin by Leandro de Cosco, April 25th, 1493, first year 
 of the pontificate of Alexander VI. 
 
 As I know you will take pleasure in hearing 
 of the success of my undertaking, I have deter- 
 mined to send you an account of the occurrences 
 of my voyage and discoveries. Thirty-three 
 days after my departure from Cadiz I arrived in 
 the sea of India, where I discovered many islands, 
 inhabited by innumerable people. Of these I 
 took possession in the name of our fortunate 
 monarch, with public proclamation and colors 
 flying, no one offering any resistance. I named 
 the first of these islands San Salvador, thus be- 
 stowing upon it the name of our holy Saviour, 
 under whose protection I made the discovery. 
 The indians call it Guanahanyn. I gave also 
 a new name to the others, calling the second 
 Santa Maria de la Conception, the third, Fernan- 
 dina, the fourth Isabela, the fifth Juana. In the 
 same manner I named the rest. Arriving- at the 
 one last mentioned, I sailed along its coast, tow- 
 ard the West, discovering so great an extent of 
 land that I could not imagine it to be an island 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 241 
 
 but the continent of Cathay. I did not however 
 discover upon the coast any large cities, all we 
 saw being a few villages and farms, with the in- 
 habitants of which we could not obtain any com- 
 munication, they all flying at our approach. 1 
 continued my course, still expecting to meet with 
 some town or city, but after having gone a great 
 distance, and not meeting with any, and finding 
 myself proceeding towards the North, which I 
 was desirous to avoid on account of the cold, and 
 moreover meeting with a contrary wind, I de- 
 termined to return to the South, and therefore 
 put about and sailed back to a harbour which I 
 had before observed. 
 
 At this place I sent two men into the country 
 to see if the King or any cities were to be found. 
 These returned in three days, having discovered 
 a great number of the towns, but all of them 
 small, and without any government. In the mean 
 time I had learned from certain indians whom I 
 had taken here, that this country was an island. 
 I returned along the coast to the East, a distance 
 of three hundred and twenty-two miles, which 
 brought me to the extremity of the island. 
 Here I discovered to the East, another island, 
 fifty-four miles from Juana. I gave it the name 
 of Espanola, and coasted along the island to the 
 30 
 
242 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 North as at Juana I had proceeded to the East,* 
 a distance of five hundred and sixty-four miles/]" 
 All these islands are very fertile. That of Juana 
 abounds in safe and capacious harbours, which sur- 
 pass in excellence all 1 have everseen elsewhere. 
 It is watered by a great number of large and 
 pleasant rivers, and contains many high moun- 
 tains. 
 
 These islands are of a beautiful appearance 
 and present a great diversity of views. They 
 may be traversed in any part, and are adorned 
 with a great variety of exceedingly lofty trees, 
 which to appearance never lose their foliage, for 
 I saw them as verdant and flourishing as they 
 exist in Spain in the month of May, some covered 
 with flowers, others loaded with fruit, accoidmg 
 to their different species and their season of bear- 
 ing, the whole offering a spectacle of great beau- 
 ty. The nightingale and countless other birds 
 were singing, although it was the month of No- 
 vember when 1 visited this delightful region. 
 There are in the island of Juana six or eight 
 sorts of palm trees, superior to those of our land 
 
 * Both the Latin and Spanish copies offer this state- 
 ment, but it is evident that the words North and East should 
 interchange their situations in the text. 
 
 f The course sailed by Columbus along both the islands 
 is about equal to this extent. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 243 
 
 in height and beauty, and this superiority is like- 
 wise observable in the other trees as well as in 
 the herbs and fruits. Here are to be seen the 
 most beautiful pine trees, and the most exten- 
 sive fields and pastures, a great variety of birds, 
 several sorts of honey, and many kinds of metal, 
 with the exception of iron. In the island named 
 Espanola, there are lofty and beautiful mountains, 
 large cultivated tracts, woods, fertile fields, and 
 every thing adapted to the purposes of agricul- 
 ture, the pasturage of cattle, and the erection of 
 houses. The' excellence of the harbours here, 
 and the abundance of the streams which contri- 
 bute to the salubrity of the climate, exceed im- 
 agination. There is a considerable difference 
 between the trees, fruits and fields of this island 
 and those of Juana, but here are found divers 
 sorts of precious drugs, gold and metals. The 
 inhabitants of both sexes, in Espanola and all the 
 other islands which 1 saw or heard of, go naked 
 as they were born, all except a few females who 
 wear at the waist a green leaf, a portion of cot- 
 ton, or bit of silk which they manufacture for 
 this purpose. 
 
 As 1 before remarked, they possess no iron, and 
 they neither use nor are acquainted with wea- 
 pons, to the exercise of which indeed they are 
 not at all adapted, not by reason of anv corporal 
 
244 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 deficiency, as they are very well shaped, but on 
 account of their great timidity. Instead of arms 
 they have canes dried in the sun, to the largest 
 ends of which they fix a piece of wood sharpened 
 at the end ; of these however, they have not 
 the courage to make much use. I have in many 
 instances sent two or three of my men to their 
 towns to communicate with the inhabitants, when 
 the indians would tumultuously rush out, and see- 
 ing our people drawing near, run away with such 
 haste that the father would abandon his child, 
 and the child his father. This timidity was not 
 owing to any violence or injury we offered them, 
 as I was in the practice of making presents of cloth 
 and other things to all the natives whom 1 met, 
 but arose from their natural mildness and want 
 of courage. Notwithstanding this, as soon as 
 they have thrown aside their fear, and consider 
 themselves in safety, they are very ingenuous 
 and honest, and display great liberality with 
 whatever they possess. 
 
 They never refuse to give any thing away 
 which is demanded of them, and will e.en them- 
 selves entreat an acceptance of their property. 
 They exhibit a great friendship towards every 
 one, and will give whatever they have for a tri- 
 fle or nothing at all. 1 forbade my men to pur- 
 chase any thing of them with such worthless ar- 
 ticles as bits of earthenware, fragments of plat- 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 245 
 
 ters, broken glass, nails, and thongs of leather, al- 
 though when they got possession of any such 
 thing they valued it as highly as the most preci- 
 ous jewel in the world. In this manner of bar- 
 tering, a sailor has acquired for a leather strap 
 or piece of rope, gold to the amount of three 
 sueldos. Others have obtained as much for a 
 matter of still lower value. For new Spanish 
 coins they would give any thing asked of them, 
 as an ounce and a half or two ounces of gold, or 
 thirty or forty pounds of cotton. Thus they would 
 trade away their cotton and gold like idiots, for 
 broken hoops, platters and glass. I prohibited 
 their traffic on account of its injustice, and made 
 them many presents of useful things which 1 had 
 carried with me, for the purpose of gaining their 
 affection, in order that they may receive the 
 faith of Jesus Christ, be well disposed towards 
 us, and inclined to submit to the King and Queen 
 our Princes, and all the Spaniards, and further- 
 more that they may furnish us with the commod- 
 ities which abound among them and we are in 
 want of. 
 
 They are not idolators, but believe that all 
 power and goodness is in heaven, and that 1 had 
 proceeded from that place with my ships and 
 men ; under this notion they received me at my 
 first arrival as soon as they had banished their 
 
246 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 fear. They are not stupid and indolent, but 
 acute and sagacious. Those of them who nav- 
 igate the seas among those islands, give singular 
 accounts of what thej have observed upon 
 their voyages, but have never seen people 
 who wear clothes, nor any ships similar to ours. 
 On my arrival 1 took by force from the first 
 island, a few of the indians, in order that we 
 might become acquainted with one another's 
 language, and to gain a knowledge of what their 
 country contained. These were of singular use 
 to us, as we came to understand each other in a 
 short time by the help of words and signs. I 
 have them still with me, and they continue in 
 the belief that we have come from heaven. 
 This information they published wherever we 
 arrived, exclaiming in a loud voice, 'Come! 
 Come! and see the celestial people.' Upon this 
 call, the natives would come thronging to us, 
 after having banished the fear which seized 
 them at first, men women and children, old and 
 young, crowding the roads and bringing us vic- 
 tuals and drink, with the utmost affection and 
 reverence. 
 
 In every one of these islands there are a great 
 number of canoes, each one made of a solid log, of 
 a nairow shape, somewhat resembling our fustas, 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 247 
 
 but swifter in the water ; they are navigated 
 solely by oars. They are of different sizes, the 
 most of them containing seats for eighteen rowers. 
 With these they carry on a commerce among 
 these islands which are innumerable. I saw some 
 of these canoes with seventy or eighty rowers. 
 Throughout these islands there is no diversity 
 in the appearance of the people, their manners 
 or language, all the inhabitants understanding 
 one another, a very favorable circumstance in 
 my opinion, to the design which I have no doubt 
 is entertained by our king, namely to convert 
 them to the holy christian faith, to which as far 
 as I can perceive they are well disposed. I 
 have said that I sailed from W. toE. three hun- 
 dred and twenty two miles along the island of 
 Juana ; from the length of this course I am con- 
 fident that this island is larger than England and 
 Scotland together, for besides the extent which 
 I coasted there are two other provinces to the 
 West which 1 did not survey. One of these is 
 named by the indians Anam, and contains inhab- 
 itants with tails. These tracts extend to the 
 distance of a hundred and eighty miles, as I have 
 learnt from the indians with me, who are well 
 acquainted with them. 
 
 The island of Espanola is as large as that part 
 of Spain which extends from Catalonia to Fon- 
 
248 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 tarabia, which I infer from the extent of that 
 side of it which I sailed along, being five hun- 
 dred and forty miles in length. I took possess- 
 ion of this fine island, as I had done of the others, 
 in the name of our invincible king ; and fixed upon 
 a spot for a large city here, as 1 judged it the 
 most favorable place. I called it Navidad, and 
 ordered the construction of a fortress here, 
 which is by this time finished. At this place I 
 left a sufficient number of men, with all sorts of 
 arms, and a sufficiency of provisions for above a 
 year. I also left them a caravel and expert 
 workmen, after having secured them the friend- 
 ship of the king of this part of the country. 
 These people are a friendly and amiable race, 
 and the king took a pride in calling himself my 
 brother. Even if their sentiments should change, 
 and they should become hostile towards us, they 
 will not be able to effect any injury to those who 
 remain at the fortress, as they are destitute of 
 weapons, go naked, and are very cowardly : so 
 that those whom I have left there will be able 
 to retain the whole island in subjection without 
 any danger, if they adhere to the regulations 
 with which I charged them. 
 
 Each of the natives, as far as I can under- 
 stand, has one wife, with the exception of the 
 King and Princes, who are permitted to have as 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 249 
 
 many as twenty. The women appear to do 
 more labour than the men. Whether there ex- 
 ists any such thing here as private property I have 
 not been able to ascertain, as I have observed 
 that an individual has been set to distribute to 
 the others, in particular, food and such things. I 
 found no ferocious sanguinary people in these 
 parts, as some seem to have imagined the peo- 
 ple here to be, but they are a very mild and 
 friendly race. Their colour is not black like 
 that of the Ethiopians. Their hair is lank and 
 and hanging down. They do not inhabit those 
 parts where the sun's rays are very powerful, 
 as the heat is excessive here, the latitude being 
 apparently twenty-six degrees. On the summits 
 of the mountains the cold is great, but they do 
 not suffer any incommodity from it, by being ac- 
 customed to the climate, and by the use of hot 
 meats and drinks which they consume very pro- 
 digally. 
 
 People of a monstrous description I saw none 
 nor heard of any, except those of the island 
 named Caris which is the second on the course 
 from Espanola to India : this island is ; nhabited 
 by people who are regarded by their neighbours 
 as exceedingly ferocious ; they feed upon human 
 flesh. These people have many sorts of canoes 
 with which they make incursions upon all the 
 31 
 
250 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 isles of India, robbing and plundering wherever 
 they go. Their difference from the others con- 
 sists in their wearing long hair like that of the 
 women, and in using bows and arrows of cane, 
 these last constructed as I have already related* 
 by fixing a piece of sharpened wood at the larger 
 end. On this account they are deemed very 
 ferocious by the other indians, and are much 
 feared by them ; I think however, these men are 
 precisely like the others. These are the na- 
 tives who go to visit the females who are *he 
 sole inhabitants of the island of Matenin, which 
 is the first on the route from Espanola to India. 
 These women exercise none of the common oc- 
 cupations of their sex, but manage the bow and 
 dart, as we are told of the ancients. They wear 
 armour made of plates of copper, of which metal 
 they have great abundance. 
 
 I am assured by the indians that there is 
 another island, larger than Espanola, whose in- 
 habitants are without hair, and who possess a 
 greater quantity of gold than the others. From 
 this island, as well as the others, I have taken 
 some of the inhabitants to confirm the accounts 
 which I give. 
 
 Finally to sum up the whole, and state briefly 
 the great profits of this voyage, I am enabled to 
 promise the acquisition, by a trifling assistance 
 
OP COLUMBUS. 251 
 
 from their majesties, of any quantity of gold, 
 drugs, cotton, and mastick, which last article is 
 found only in the island of Scio ; also any quanti- 
 ty of aloe, and as many slaves for the service of 
 the marine, as their Majesties may stand in need 
 of. The same may be said of rhubarb and a 
 great variety of other things which I have no 
 doubt will be discovered by those I have left at 
 the fort, as I did not stop long at any single 
 place, unless obliged to do so by the weather, 
 with the exception of the city of Navidad where 
 we made some stay to build the fort and provide 
 the necessary securities for the place. 
 
 Although the discoveries actually accom- 
 plished appear great and surprising, yet I should 
 have effected much more had I been furnish- 
 ed with a proper fleet. Nevertheless the great 
 success of this enterprise is not to be ascrib- 
 ed to my own merits, but to the holy Catholic 
 faith and the piety of our Sovereigns, the 
 Lord often granting to men what they never 
 imagine themselves capable of effecting, as 
 he is accustomed to hear the prayers of his ser- 
 vants and those who love his commandments, 
 even in that which appears impossible; in this 
 manner has it happened to me who have suc- 
 ceeded in an undertaking never before accom- 
 plished by man. For although some persons 
 have written or spoken of the existence of these 
 
,.' 
 
 252 FIRST VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS. 
 
 islands, they have all rested their assertions upon 
 conjecture, no one having ever affirmed that he 
 saw them, on which account their existence has 
 been deemed iabulous. 
 
 And now ought the King, Queen, Princes, 
 and all their dominions, as well as the whole of 
 Christendom, to give thanks to our Saviour 
 Jesus Christ who has granted us such a vic- 
 tory and great success. Let processions be or- 
 dered, let solemn festivals be celebrated, let the 
 temples be filled with boughs and flowers. Let 
 Christ rejoice upon earth as he does in heaven, 
 to witness the coming salvation of so many peo- 
 ple, heretofore given over to perdition. Let us 
 rejoice for the exaltation of our faith, as well as 
 for the augmentation of our temporal prosperity, 
 in which not only Spain but all Christendom shall 
 participate. — Such are the events which I have 
 described to you with brevity. Adieu. 
 
 Lisbon, March 14th. 
 
 CHRISTOPHER COLUMBUS, 
 
 Admiral of iht Armada of the Ocean, 
 
LETTER OF COLUMBUS 
 
 TO 
 
 LUIS DE SANTANGEL, 
 
 Comptroller of the Treasury of the King and Queen, 
 giving a summary relation of the voyage.* 
 
 Senor, 
 
 Knowing the pleasure you will re- 
 ceive in hearing of the great victory which Our 
 Lord has granted me in my voyage, I hasten to 
 inform you, that after a passage of seventy-one 
 days, I arrived at the Indies, with the fleet 
 which the most illustrious King and Queen our 
 sovereigns committed to my charge, where I 
 discovered many islands inhabited by people 
 without number, and of which I took possession 
 for their Highnesses by proclamation with the 
 royal banner displayed, no one offering any con- 
 tradiction. The first which I discovered, 1 
 named San Salvador, in commemoration of our 
 Holy Saviour, who has, in a wonderful manner, 
 granted all our success. The indians call it 
 Guanahani. To the second, I gave the name of 
 Santa Maria de Conception, to the third, that of 
 Fernandina, to the fourth, that of Isabela, to the 
 
 * Found in the archives of Simancas 
 
254 
 
 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 fifth, that of Juana, thus giving each island a new 
 name. 1 coasted along the island of Juana to the 
 West, and found it of such extent, that I took it 
 for a continent, and imagined it must be the 
 country of Cathay. Villages were seen near the 
 sea-coast, but as 1 discovered no large cities, and 
 could not obtain any communication with the in- 
 habitants, who all fled at our approach, I con- 
 tinued on West, thinking I should not fail in the 
 end, to meet with great towns and cities, but 
 having gone many leagues without such success, 
 and finding that the coast carried me to the N v 
 whither I disliked to proceed, on account of the 
 impending winter, I resolved to return to the 
 S., and accordingly put about, and arrived at an 
 excellent harbour in the island, where I dispatch- 
 ed two men into the country to ascertain whe- 
 ther the King, or any large cities were in the 
 neighborhood. They travelled three days, and 
 met with innumerable settlements of the natives, 
 of a small size, but did not succeed in finding any 
 sovereign of the territory, and so returned. I 
 made out to learn from some indians which I 
 had before taken, that this was an island, and 
 proceeded along the coast to the East, an hundred 
 and seven leagues, till I reached the extremity. 
 I then discovered another island, E. of this, eigh- 
 teen leagues distant, which I named Espanola, 
 and followed its northern coast, as I did that of 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 255 
 
 Juana, for the space of an hundred and seventy- 
 eight leagues to the E. All these countries are 
 of surpassing excellence, and in particular Juana, 
 which contains abundance of fine harbours, ex- 
 celling any in Christendom, as also many large and 
 beautiful rivers. The land is high and exhibits 
 chains of tall mountains which seem to reach to 
 the skies, and surpass beyond comparison the isle 
 of Cetrefrey. These display themselves in all 
 manner of beautiful shapes. They are accessi- 
 ble in every part, and covered with a vast va- 
 riety of lofty trees, which it appears to me, 
 never lose their foliage, as we found them fair 
 and verdant as in May in Spain. Some were 
 covered with blossoms, some with fruit, and 
 others in different stages, according to their na- 
 ture. The nightingale and a thousand other 
 sorts of birds were singing in the month of No- 
 vember wherever I went. There are palm- 
 trees in these countries, of six or eight sorts, 
 which are surprising to see, on account of their 
 diversity from ours, but indeed, this is the case 
 with respect to the other trees, as well as the 
 fruits and weeds. Beautiful forests of pines are 
 likewise found, and fields of vast extent. Here 
 is also honey, and fruits of a thousand sorts, and 
 birds of every variety. The lands contain mines 
 of metals, and inhabitants without number. The 
 island of Espanola is pre-eminent in beauty and 
 
256 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 excellence, offering to the sight the most en- 
 chanting view of mountains, plains, rich fields for 
 cultivation, and pastures for flocks of all sorts, 
 with situations for towns and settlements. Its 
 harbours are of such excellence, that their de- 
 scription would not gain belief, and the like may 
 be said of its abundance of large and fine rivers, 
 the most of which abound in gold. The trees, 
 fruits and plants of this island differ considerably 
 from those of Juana, and the place contains a 
 great deal of spicery and extensive mines of gold 
 and other metals. The people of this island, 
 and of all the others which I have become ac- 
 quainted with, go naked as they were born, al- 
 though some of the women wear at the loins, a 
 leaf, or bit of cotton cloth which they prepare 
 for that purpose. They do not possess iron, 
 steel, or weapons, and seem to have no inclination 
 for the latter, being timorous to the last degree. 
 They have an instrument consisting of a cane, 
 taken while in seed, and headed with a sharp stick, 
 but they never venture to use it. Many times I 
 have sent two or three men to one of their vil- 
 lages, when whole multitudes have taken to flight 
 at the sight of them, and this was not by reason 
 of any injury we ever wrought them, for at 
 every place where 1 have made any stay, and 
 obtained communication with them, I have made 
 them presents of cloth and such other things as 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 257 
 
 I possessed, without demanding any thing in re- 
 turn. After they have shaken off their fear of 
 us, they display a frankness and liberality in 
 their behaviour which no one would believe 
 without witnessing it. No request of anything 
 from them is ever refused, but they rather invite 
 acceptance of what they possess, and manifest 
 such a generosity that they would give away 
 their own hearts. Let the article be of great or 
 small value, they offer it readily, and receive 
 anything which is tendered in return with per- 
 fect content. I forbade my men to purchase 
 their goods with such worthless things as bits of 
 platters and broken glass, or thongs of leather, 
 although when they got possession of one of 
 these, they estimated it as highly as the greatest 
 jewel in the world. The sailors would buy of 
 them for a scrap of leather, pieces of gold, 
 weighing two castdlanos and a half, and even 
 more of this metal for something still less in 
 value. The whole of an indian's property 
 might be purchased of him for a few blancas, 
 this would amount to two or three castellanos' 
 value of gold, or the same of cotton thread. 
 Even the pieces of broken hoops from the casks 
 they would receive in barter for their ar- 
 ticles, with the greatest simplicity. I thought 
 such traffic unjust, and therefore forbade it. I 
 presented them with a variety of things, in or- 
 32 
 
258 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 der to secure their affection, and that they may 
 become christians, and enter into the service of 
 their Highnesses and the Castilian nation, and 
 also aid us in procuring such things as they pos- 
 sess, and we stand in need of. They are not 
 idolators, nor have they any sort of religion, ex- 
 cept believing that power and goodness are in 
 heaven, from which place, they entertained a 
 firm persuasion that I had come with my ships 
 and men. On this account, wherever we met 
 them, they showed us the greatest reverence 
 after they had overcome their fear. Such con- 
 duct cannot be ascribed to their want of under- 
 standing, for they are a people of much ingenui- 
 ty, and navigate all those seas, giving a remarka- 
 bly good account of every part, but do not state 
 that they have met with people in clothes, or 
 ships like ours. On my arrival at the Indies I 
 took by force from the first island I came to, a 
 few of the inhabitants, in order that they might 
 learn our language and assist us in our discove- 
 ries. We succeeded ere long, in understanding 
 one another, by signs and words, and 1 have 
 them now with me, still thinking we have come 
 from heaven, as I learn by much conversation 
 which I have had with them. This, they were 
 the first to proclaim wherever we went, and the 
 other natives would run from house to house, 
 and from village to village, crying out i come and 
 
OP COLUMBUS. ^59 
 
 see the men from heaven] so that all the inhabi- 
 tants, both men and women, having gathered 
 confidence, hastened towards us, bringing victuals 
 and drink, which they presented to us with a 
 surprising good will. In all the islands they pos- 
 sess a vast number of canoes, which are of va- 
 rious sizes, each one constructed of a single log, 
 and shaped like a fusta. Some of these are as 
 large as & fusta of eighteen oars, although nar- 
 row, on account of the material. I have seen 
 sixty or eighty men in one of these canoes, and 
 each man with his paddle. They are rowed 
 with a swiftness which no boat can equal, and 
 serve the purpose of transporting goods among 
 these innumerable islands. I did not observe 
 any great diversity in the appearance of the in- 
 habitants in the different parts of these coun- 
 tries, nor in their customs nor language, for sin- 
 gularly enough in this last respect, they all un- 
 derstand one another; on which account I hope 
 their Highnesses will exert themselves for the 
 conversion of these people to our holy faith, in 
 which undertaking they will be found very 
 tractable. I have already related that I pro- 
 ceeded along the coast of Juana, for an hundred 
 and seven leagues from W. to E., from which, I 
 dare affirm this island to be larger than England 
 and Scotland together; for besides the extent of 
 it which I coasted, there are two unexplored 
 
260 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 provinces to the W., in one of which, called 
 Cibaa, are people with tails. These districts 
 cannot be less than fifty or sixty leagues in ex- 
 tent, according as I learn from my indians, who 
 are acquainted with all these islands. The other 
 island, called Espanola, is more extensive than 
 the division of Spain from Corunna to Fonta- 
 rabia, as I traversed one side of it for the dis- 
 tance of an hundred and thirty-eight leagues from 
 VV. to E. This is a most beautiful island, and 
 although I have taken possession of them all, in 
 the name of their Highnesses, and every one 
 remains in their power, and as much at their 
 disposal as the kingdoms of Castile, and although 
 they are all furnished with every thing that can 
 be desired, yet the preference must be given to 
 Espanola, on account of the mines of gold which 
 it possesses, and the facilities it offers for trade 
 with the continent, and countries this side, and 
 beyond that of the Great Can, which traffic will 
 be great and profitable. I have accordingly 
 taken possession of a place, which I named Villa 
 de Navidad, and built there a fortress, which is 
 at present complete, and furnished with a suf- 
 ficiency of men for the enterprise; with these I 
 have left arms, ammunition and provisions for 
 more than a year, a boat, and expert men in all 
 necessary arts. The king of the country has 
 shown great friendship toward us, and held 
 
OF COLUMBUS, 261 
 
 himself a brother to me. Even should their 
 friendly inclinations change, and become hostile, 
 yet nothing can be feared from them as they 
 are totally ignorant of weapons, and the most 
 timorous people in the world. The small 
 number of men whom I have left there would 
 be sufficient to ravage the whole territory, 
 and they may remain there with perfect 
 safety, taking proper care of themselves. In 
 all the islands, as far as I could observe, the men 
 are content with a single wife each, except that 
 a chief or king has as many as twenty. The 
 women appear to do more work than the men, 
 and as to their property, I have been unable to 
 learn that they have any private possessions, but 
 apparently all things are in common among them, 
 especially provisions. In none of the islands 
 hitherto visited, have I found any people of 
 monstrous appearance, according to the expec- 
 tation of some, but the inhabitants are all of very 
 pleasing aspect, not resembling the blacks of 
 Guinea, as their hair is straight, and their colour 
 lighter. The rays of the sun are here very pow- 
 erful, although the latitude is twenty-six degrees, 
 but in the islands where there are high moun- 
 tains, the winter is cold, which the inhabitants 
 endure from habit, and the use of hot spices with 
 their food. An island situated in the second 
 strait at the entrance to the Indies, is peopled 
 
262 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 with inhabitants who eat live flesh, and are es- 
 teemed very ferocious in all the other parts. 
 They possess many canoes with which they 
 scour all the islands of India, robbing and captur- 
 ing all they meet. They are not of a more de- 
 formed appearance than the others, except that 
 they wear their hair long like women, and use 
 bows and arrows, which last are made of cane 
 and pointed with a stick, for want of iron, which 
 they do not possess. They exchange their 
 wives, and although these are esteemed a fierce 
 people among the neighboring islands, yet I do 
 not regard them more than the others, as the 
 most of the inhabitants of these regions are very 
 great cowards. One of these islands is peopled 
 solely by women, who practise no feminine oc- 
 cupations, but exercise the bow and arrow, and 
 cover themselves with plates of copper, which 
 metal they have in abundance. There is anoth- 
 er island, as I am assured, larger than Espanola, 
 in which the inhabitants are without hair, and 
 which contains a great abundance of gold. In 
 confirmation of these, and other accounts I have 
 brought the indians along with me for testimo- 
 nies. In conclusion, and to speak only of what I 
 have performed ; this voyage, so hastily dispatch- 
 ed, will, as their Highnesses may see, enable any 
 desirable quantity of gold to be obtained, by a 
 very small assistance afforded me on their part. 
 
OF COLUMBUS. 263 
 
 At present there are within reach, spices and 
 cotton to as great an amount as they can desire, 
 aloe in as agreat bundance, and equal store of mas- 
 tick, a production nowhere else found except in 
 Greece and the island of Scio, where it is sold 
 at such a price as the possessors choose. To 
 these may be added slaves, as numerous as may 
 be wished for. Besides I have as I think, dis- 
 covered rhubarb and cinnamon, and expect 
 countless other things of value will be found by 
 the men w r hom 1 have left there, as I made it 
 a point not to stay in any one place, while the 
 wind enabled me to proceed upon the voyage, 
 except at Villa de Navidad, where I left them, 
 well established. I should have accomplished 
 much more, had those in the other vessels done 
 their duty. This is ever certain, that God grants 
 to those that walk in his ways, the performance 
 of things which seem impossible, and this enter- 
 prize might in a signal manner have been consid- 
 ered so, for although many have talked of these 
 countries, yet it has been nothing more than con- 
 jecture. Our Saviour having vouchsafed this 
 victory to our most illustrious King and Queen 
 and their kingdoms, famous for so eminent a deed, 
 all Christendom should rejoice, and give solemn 
 thanks to the holy Trinity for the addition of 
 so many people to our holy faith, and also for the 
 
264 FIRST VOYAGE 
 
 temporal profit accruing not only to Spain, but to 
 all christians. 
 
 Onboard the Caravel, off the Azores, February Uith, 1493. 
 
 P. S. After writing the above, being at sea 
 near Castile, the wind rose with such fury from 
 the S. and SE., that I was obliged to bear away, 
 and run into the port of Lisbon, where I escaped 
 by the greatest miracle in the world. From 
 this place I shall write to their Highnesses. 
 Throughout the Indies I always found the wea- 
 ther like May. I made the passage thither in 
 seventy-one days, and back in forty-eight, during 
 thirteen of which number I was driven about by 
 storms. The seamen here inform me that there 
 was never known a winter, in which so many 
 ships were lost. 
 
 March 4th. 
 
NOTES. 
 
 33 
 
NOTES. 
 
 NOTE I. 
 
 Letter of Paul Toscanelli,* a Florentine physician, and celebrated as- 
 tronomer to Columbus, dated June 25th, 1474, eighteen years before 
 his first voyage. 
 
 As this letter, according to the statement of 
 Don Fernando Columbus in his biography of his 
 father, had a great effect in causing Columbus to 
 undertake the voyage, it has been thought de- 
 serving of a place here, more especially as it 
 serves to illustrate several passages in the nar- 
 rative. The immediate occasion of it was this : 
 While Columbus was at Lisbon, a correspon- 
 dence was maintained between Toscanelli, and 
 Fernando Martinez, a prebendary of that place, 
 respecting the commerce of the Portuguese to 
 the coast of Guinea, and the navigation of the 
 ocean to the W. This came to the knowledge 
 of Columbus, who at that time entertained 
 
 * For an account of this person see Tiraboschi Storia 
 della Letteratura Italiana. Tom. 6. Lib. 2. Cap. 38. 
 
268 NOTES. 
 
 thoughts of his future enterprise. He thereupon 
 dispatched by an Italian then at Lisbon, a letter 
 to the Florentine, informing him of his project. 
 He received the following answer written in 
 Latin. 
 
 To Dow Christopher Columbcs, greeting. 
 
 T have become acquainted with the great and 
 noble wish entertained by you, to visit the coun- 
 try of spices, on which account I send in an- 
 swer to your letter, the copy of one directed by 
 me, a few days since, to one of my friends, in the 
 service of the King of Portugal before the wars 
 of Castile ; he having written to me, by order 
 of his Highness, upon the same subject. I also 
 send you a nautical chart, similar to one which I 
 likewise presented to him; these may perhaps 
 satisfy your inquiries. The copy of my letter is 
 as follows. 
 
 To Fernando Martinez, prebendary of Lisbon, 
 greeting — I feel a great pleasure in hearing of 
 the intimacy between you and the Most Serene 
 and Magnificent King. Although I have spoken 
 many times concerning the short passage by sea 
 from hence to the Indies, where the spices are 
 produced, which course, in my opinion is shorter 
 than that to Guinea, yet you inform me that his 
 Highness wishes for some declaration or demon- 
 
NOTES. 269 
 
 stration on my part, whereby he may more fully 
 understand the matter. This I could do to his 
 satisfaction, with the help of a terrestrial globe, 
 instructing him how the parts of the earth are 
 disposed. But for greater facility and precision, 
 I have determined to mark down the route in 
 question upon a marine chart, which I herewith 
 send to his Majesty, drawn and painted by my 
 hand. In this is represented the whole extremi- 
 ty of the W., from Ireland, S. to Guinea, with 
 all the islands in the whole extent. Opposite, in 
 the W. is the commencement of the Indies, with 
 the isles and accessible parts, and the space be- 
 tween the North pole and the Equinoctial line. 
 In this manner will be perceived the number of 
 leagues necessary to proceed in order to reach 
 those fertile countries which abound in spices 
 and precious stones. Let it not create wonder 
 that a westerly region is assigned for the country 
 of spices, which have always been understood to 
 grow in the E. ; for those who sail W. will find 
 those lands in the W., and those who travel E., 
 will find the same places in the E. The straight 
 lines, which run lengthwise upon the chart, show 
 the distance from W. to E. The oblique ones, 
 the distance from N. to S. I have also marked 
 down many places among the Indies, which may 
 be reached by the occurrence of some casual 
 event, such as contrary winds, or unlooked for 
 
270 NOTES. 
 
 accident of that sort. And in order that you 
 may be made fully acquainted with whatever 
 relates to this subject, [ will give you the result 
 of my investigations. The islands I have spoken 
 of, are inhabited by merchants who carry on their 
 trade among many nations ; their ports contain a 
 greater number of foreign vessels, than those of 
 any other part of the world. The single port of 
 Zaiton, which is one of the finest and most famous 
 throughout the E., sends forth annually, more 
 than a hundred ships laden with pepper, not to 
 mention others, which return with cargoes of all 
 sorts of spices. The whole territory is very 
 extensive and populous, containing many pro- 
 vinces and kingdoms, under the dominion of a 
 prince called Great Can, which signifies King of 
 King's. The common residence of this sovereign 
 is in Cathay. His predecessors were desirous of 
 an intercourse with the Christians, and two hun- 
 dred years since, dispatched ambassadors to the 
 Pope, requesting instructors to teach them our 
 holy faith. These, however, were unable, from 
 the obstacles they encountered upon their jour- 
 nev, to reach Rome, and were forced to return 
 back. In the time of Pope Eugenius IV. there 
 came an ambassador, who gave him assurances 
 of the affection which was entertained for the 
 Catholics by the princes and people of his coun- 
 try. I was a great deal in his company, and he 
 
NOTES. 271 
 
 gave me descriptions of the magnificence of his 
 king, and of the immense rivers in that territory, 
 which contained, as he stated, two hundred cities 
 with marble bridges, upon the banks of a single 
 stream. This is a noble country, and ought to 
 be explored by us, on account of its great riches, 
 and the quantity of gold, silver, and precious 
 stones, which might be obtained there. For their 
 governors, they choose the wisest men, without 
 regard to rank or riches. You will perceive by 
 the map, that the distance from Lisbon, to the 
 famous city of Quisay, is three thousand nine 
 hundred miles, going exactly W. This city is 
 thirty-five leagues in circuit, and its name signifies 
 City of Heaven. Its situation is in the province 
 of Mango near Cathay, and it contains ten large 
 marble bridges built upon immense columns, of 
 singular magnificence. From the island of An- 
 tilla to that of Cipango, is a distance of two 
 hundred and twenty-five leagues. This island 
 possesses such an abundance of precious stones 
 and metals that the temples and royal palaces 
 are covered with plates of gold. I might add 
 many things here, but as I have formerly given 
 you a relation of them, I trust to your wisdom 
 and good judgement, without making any fur- 
 ther addition to this statement. I hope my let- 
 ter will satisfy his Highness, and I beg you will 
 
272 NOTES. 
 
 assure him, that I shall be always ready to exe- 
 cute his commands. 
 
 Florence, June 25/A, 1474. 
 
 ANOTHER LETTER FROM THE SAME TO COLUMBUS. 
 
 1 have received your letter with its accom- 
 paniment, for which I return you my thanks. 
 I applaud your design of sailing to the West, and 
 am persuaded, as you will have seen by my 
 chart, that the voyage you intend to undertake, 
 has none of the difficulties ascribed to it. The 
 passage, in my opinion, will be found easy and 
 safe, in the quarters which 1 have pointed out. 
 You would entertain no doubt upon this matter, 
 had you conversed with the many persons from 
 those countries, whom 1 have seen. You may 
 be certain of meeting with extensive kingdoms, 
 populous cities, and rich provinces, abounding in 
 all sorts of precious stones, and your visit will 
 cause great rejoicing to the King and Princes of 
 those distant lands, besides opening a way for a 
 communication between them and the Christians, 
 and the instruction of them in the catholic lelig- 
 ion and the arts we possess. For whic 1 easons, 
 and many others which might be mentioned, I 
 
NOTES. 273 
 
 am not surprised at the courage and resolution 
 manifested by you, and the whole Portuguese 
 nation, which has never been deficient in eminent 
 men. 
 
 NOTE II. 
 
 It may be interesting to subjoin a few speci- 
 mens of the accounts, both probable and improb- 
 able, which contributed at that time to the pop- 
 ular belief of the existence of countries in the 
 West. The following are from the biography 
 of Don Fernando : 
 
 * Martin Vincent, Pilot of the King of Portugal, 
 related, that four hundred and fifty leagues West 
 of Cape St. Vincent, he had picked up a log, 
 perfectly wrought, but not with iron, and which 
 had been brought thither by a westerly wind, 
 from this circumstance he concluded that there 
 were indubitably, undiscovered islands in that 
 quarter. 
 
 Pedro Correa, brother-in-law of Columbus, in- 
 formed him that he had seen near the island of 
 Porto Santo, a fragment of wood similar to the 
 former, and which came from the West. He 
 34 
 
274 N0TE9. 
 
 also learned from the King of Portugal, that in 
 the same parts there had been found canes of 
 such bigness that a single joint would contain 
 nine garrafas of wine. 
 
 The inhabitants of the Azores related to him 
 that after a course of westerly winds, the sea 
 coast upon the shores of those islands, and espe- 
 cially those of Graciosa, and Fayal, pine trees, 
 which were not the growth of those parts, and 
 that in the island of Flores, the bodies of two 
 men had been washed ashore, whose complexion 
 and features were different from those of any peo- 
 ple in that neighborhood. Others informed him 
 that they had seen covered boats, filled with 
 people of an uncommon description. 
 
 Antonio Leme, a resident in the island of Ma- 
 deira, told the Admiral, that having sailed far to 
 the West, he discovered three islands. Pedro 
 de Velasco, a native of Palos, related to him that 
 sailing an hundred and fifty leagues toward the 
 West, he discovered the island of Flores by fol- 
 lowing the flight of some birds, and that after- 
 wards he sailed to the NE as far as the latitude 
 of Cape Clear in Ireland, where he met with 
 strong winds from the West with a smooth sea ; 
 this, he thought, could be explained only by 
 supposing the existence of land in that direction. 
 
NOTES. 275 
 
 which kept the sea from rising. It being late 
 in the season, he did not venture to undertake 
 the discovery of it. This happened above forty 
 years before the discovery of the Indies. 
 
 Another pilot informed him in the port of 
 Santa Maria, that upon a voyage to Ireland, he 
 descried a country, which he took for a part of 
 Tartary. It extended toward the W., but he 
 could not reach it on account of the unfavorable 
 state of the weather. This was probably the 
 land now called Bacalaos* Another Pedro de 
 Velasco, a Galician, gave him the same account 
 in the city of Murcia, saying that on his passage 
 towards Ireland he discovered a country in the 
 West, which he believed to be that which Fer- 
 nan Dolmos attempted to reach.' Hist, del Al- 
 mirante, Cap. 8. 
 
 4 The mother-in-law of the Admiral perceiv- 
 ing what pleasure he took in hearing the ac- 
 counts of these voyages, presented him with the 
 writings and charts which had belonged to her 
 
 * Bacaleo, or Bucalieu, an island on the East coast of 
 Newfoundland. 
 
276 NOTES. 
 
 husband ; the perusal of these increased the zeal 
 of the Admiral, and he undertook many inquiries 
 concerning the navigation of the Portuguese to 
 the Mine and the coast of Guinea, and took great 
 interest in conversation with those who had fre- 
 quented those parts. I have not been able to 
 ascertain whether during this matrimonial con- 
 nection he made any voyages to the Mine or to 
 Guinea; be that however, as it will, he began 
 very naturally to reflect, while in Portugal, that 
 as the Portuguese had sailed such a distance S., 
 it was also possible to sail in a Westerly direc- 
 tion, and find land in that quarter. In order to cor- 
 roborate this opinion, he examined anew those ge- 
 ographical writers which he had studied at a for- 
 mer period, and endeavoured to find what astro- 
 nomical reasons would confirm the notion. He 
 was careful to treasure up whatever information 
 relating to this matter he could collect from trav- 
 ellers or seamen. In this manner he came to a 
 firm persuasion that to the West of the Canaries 
 and Cape Verd there were islands which might be 
 reached by sailing in that direction. But to un- 
 derstand more fully the reasons which led to this 
 conclusion, and to satisfy the curiosity of many 
 who are desirous of knowing distinctly the argu- 
 ments and motives upon which the Admiral 
 founded his great undertaking, I will relate what 
 
NOTES. 277 
 
 I have been able to find among his papers to this 
 effect. 
 
 The causes which induced the Admiral to 
 conceive the idea of discovering the Indies were 
 three, namely, — Reasons drawn from a consider- 
 ation of the figure of the earth ; The authority 
 of writers ; and the relations of seamen. 
 
 With respect to the first, he considered that 
 as the land and water of which the earth is 
 composed formed a sphere, it might be sailed 
 round from East to West, till men came to stand 
 (eet to feet on the two opposite sides of the 
 earth. 
 
 With regard to the second, he judged from 
 creditable authors that the greater part of this 
 sphere had been explored, and that there re- 
 mained undiscovered only that portion comprised 
 between the eastern extremity of India, known 
 to Ptolemy and Marinus, and the Azores and 
 Cape Verd Islands, which then were the farthest 
 West of any known territory. 
 
 As to the third, he was of opinion that the 
 space contained within these limits was not above 
 a third part of the circumference of the earth, 
 inasmuch as the above-mentioned Marinus had 
 
278 NOTES. 
 
 travelled to the East a distance of fifteen twen- 
 ty-fourths of this circumference, so that their re- 
 mained but nine twenty-fourths from the East of 
 India to the Cape Verd Islands. 
 
 Furthermore he considered that the territo- 
 ries described in the Cosmography of Marinus, 
 although extending the distance above specified, 
 did not reach the extremity of the continent, 
 and therefore the distance from that to the 
 West of Europe must be still smaller. If this 
 space were sea, he judged it might be sailed 
 over in a short time ; if it were land it might 
 be discovered still sooner by going to the West, 
 as it must necessarily lie very near the Cape 
 Verd Islands. These opinions were strengthened 
 by what is stated in Strabo's fifth book of Geo- 
 graphy, that no army has ever readied the east- 
 ern limit of India, which is a country as large, 
 according to Ctesias, as all the rest of Asia, and 
 agreeably to the assertion of Onesicritus is equal 
 to a third part of the globe, and the like is affirm- 
 ed by Pliny. Lib. 6. Cap. 17. to which may be 
 added the statement of Nearchus, that it is four 
 months' journey in extent ; from all which con- 
 siderations he came to an opinion that its immense 
 size must bring it near to Spain in the West. 
 
 Another reason which induced him to believe 
 that the distance from the West of Europe to 
 
NOTES. 279 
 
 India was small, was the opinion of Alfraganus 
 and his followers, who assign a much smaller ex- 
 tent to the circumference of the earth than other 
 writers, allowing but fifty-six miles and two thirds 
 to a degree, which diminishing the extent of the 
 earth's surface, would also diminish the space 
 between India and Europe which was unknown 
 to Marinus. On this account he judged that 
 whatever lands were discovered in the West 
 must necessarily be a part of India, and for the 
 same reason we may pronounce as unwarranta- 
 able the censures cast upon the Admiral bv Rod- 
 rigo, Archdeacon of Seville and some of his 
 party for bestowing the name of India upon 
 these countries, which appellation they assert is 
 not appropriate. Now the Admiral did not call 
 them Indies as being the identical lands known 
 by that name, but as being a part of that India 
 beyond the Ganges which no geographer has set 
 limits to by any other territory, but which has 
 been regarded as extending to the ocean. These 
 therefore being lands at the eastern limits of 
 India, not designated by any particular name, it 
 was judged most proper to bestow upon them 
 that of the nearest country; they were thus 
 called the West Indies on account of the known 
 riches of the country of India. In this manner 
 he extended an invitation to the Catholic Kin°-s 
 who were doubtful of the enterprise, to aid him 
 in discovering the Indies by the way of the West. 
 
280 NOTES. 
 
 The Admiral was further incited to his under- 
 taking, and supported in the opinion that the 
 lands to the West were a part of India, by the 
 authority of many learned men who affirmed 
 that a passage might be made from the West of 
 Africa and Spain, to the Eastern part of India by 
 following a Westerly course, and that the ocean 
 which separated these countries was not of great 
 extent. This is averred by Aristotle, Lib. 2. de 
 Ccelo et Mundo. where he states that one might 
 pass from India to Cadiz in a tew days. The 
 same is confirmed by a remark of Averrhoes 
 upon this passage. And Seneca, Nat. Quaest. 
 Lib. 1. regarding the learning of this world as 
 nothing when compared to the knowledge which 
 may be obtained in another life, observes that a 
 ship may sail with a fair wind from the Western 
 part of Spain to India in a few days. And if as 
 some assure us, Seneca was the author of the 
 tragedies which go by his name, we may be cer- 
 tain that he refers to this fact in the chorus 
 
 to Medea. 
 
 Venient annis 
 
 Secula seris, quibus Oceanus 
 
 Vincula rerum laxet, et ingens 
 
 Pateat tellus, Tiphisque novos 
 
 Detegat orbes, nee sit Terris 
 
 Ultima ThuJe 
 
NOTES. 28 1 
 
 " In the last days there will come an age in which 
 Ocean shall loosen the bonds of things; a great 
 country will be discovered; another Tiphis shall 
 make known new worlds, and Thule shall no longer 
 be the extremity of the earth.' 9 This prediction 
 may assuredly be considered as accomplished in 
 the person of the Admiral. 
 
 Strabo, in the first book of his Geography, 
 says the Ocean encompasses the whole earth, 
 that it washes India on the East, and on the 
 West, Spain and Mauritania, and but for its 
 vast extent, one might sail directly from the one 
 of these countries to the other; the same he 
 repeats in the second book. 
 
 Pliny, in his Natural History, L. 2. Cap. 3. 
 states that the Ocean surrounds the earth, ex- 
 tending from India to Cadiz ; the same in Cap. 
 31. Lib. C. 
 
 Solinus, Cap. 48. says that from the Gorgonean 
 Islands, by which we are to understand those of 
 Cape Verd, there are fortv days sail across the 
 Atlantic Ocean to the Isles of the Hespcrides ; 
 these the Admiral held for certain were the 
 Indies. 
 
 Marco Polo and Sir John Mandeville assert 
 in their Travels into the East, that they 
 went far beyond the countries described by 
 35 
 
282 
 
 NOTES. 
 
 Ptolemy and Marinus ; and although these trav- 
 ellers do not speak of the Eastern Ocean, yet it 
 may be inferred from their description of the 
 Oriental territories, that India is not far distant 
 from Africa and Spain. 
 
 It is also affirmed by Petrus Heliacus, in his 
 treatise De imagine mundi, Cap. 8. de quantitate 
 terrce habitabilis, and by Julius Capitolinus, De 
 locis habitabilibus, and in other treatises that 
 Spain is near to India in the West. This last 
 author in the 19th chapter of his Geography 
 has these words. ' According to Pliny and the 
 Philosophers, the ocean lying between Spain and 
 Western Africa on one side, and the extremity 
 of India on the other, is not of great extent, and 
 without doubt may be crossed with a favorable 
 wind in a few days ; the Eastern part of India 
 therefore is not very distant from the West of 
 Africa.'' Hist, del Almirante, Cap. V. et seq. 
 
 NOTE III. 
 
 The reception of Columbus at the Portuguese 
 court is related by Barros with every feeling of 
 national prejudice. ' The king being in Val do 
 Paraiso. at the monastery of Nossa Senhora das 
 
NOTES. 
 
 283 
 
 Virtudes, in Santarem, on account of the pesti- 
 lence which raged at that time, there came ac- 
 counts from Lisbon, that one Christopher Colum- 
 bus had arrived there, stating that he had come 
 from the island of Cipango, with much gold and 
 riches of that country. The king having some 
 acquaintance with this Columbus, and knowing 
 that he had been sent upon the discovery by Don 
 Ferdinand, King of Castile, requested him to pay 
 him a visit, that he might learn the events of his 
 voyage. This he readily complied with, not so 
 much from a wish to oblige the King, as to mor- 
 tify him with his presence, for before he went to 
 Castile, he had applied to this same King Dun 
 John, entreating to be sent by him upon the en- 
 terprise. This the King had refused, for rea- 
 sons which I shall hereafter relate. Columbus 
 was received very respectfully by the King, but 
 the latter was much concerned on perceiving 
 that the natives of the newly discovered coun- 
 tries, which he had brought along with him, were 
 not black and woolly-headed, like those of Guin- 
 ea, but similar in features, complexion, and hair to 
 the people of India, where he was engaged in such 
 important undertakings. Columbus in discours- 
 ing of those countries and extolling their charac- 
 ter to an extravagant degree, used so great a free- 
 dom of language, chiding and censuring the King 
 for not having taken up with his oiFer, that many 
 
284 NOTES. 
 
 of the nobles stung to resentment by the license 
 of his tongue, as well as vexed that the King had 
 lost the benefits of the enterprise, offered to pre- 
 vent his return to Castile by assassinating him. 
 For to all appearance, his arrival was likely to be 
 very prejudicial to this kingdom, and cause great 
 trouble to his Highness on account of the grants 
 made by the popes, from the limits comprised in 
 which, it appeared to be manifest that these na- 
 tives were taken by Columbus. The King re- 
 jected these offers, and like a Catholic Prince, 
 rebuked the nobles who made them, although 
 the business gave him some concern.' Asia de 
 Joam de Barros. Dec. 1. Liv. III. C. XI. See 
 also Lafitau. Hist, des Decouvertes et Conquetes 
 des Portugais. i Colomb etoit si fier dusucces de 
 son voyage, il en parloit avec tant d'emphase et 
 d'exageration, entremelant a ce qui'il disoit, des 
 reproches qu'il fit au Roi sur le peu de confiance 
 qu'il avoit eu en lui, et sur la perte qu'il s'etoit 
 causee par-la a lui-mcme, qu'il parut n'etre ven- 
 ue dans ses ports que pour lui faire insulte.' etc. 
 Liv. I. Bouterwek is so much impressed with 
 the acrimony of expression, prompted by the na- 
 tional feeling of the Portuguese writers on this 
 occasion, as to ask 'war dcr Entdecker von Jimeri- 
 ka etica wirklich em GrossprahkrP Gesch. der 
 Portiiff. Poesie u. Bereds. B. 2. C. 2. 
 
NOTES. 285 
 
 The testimony however, of other historians 
 acquits him of any such superciliousness of be- 
 haviour on the occasion referred to. ' L'on fut 
 surpris de voir que ce Pilote que, quelques an- 
 nees auparavant on avoit regarde comme un hom- 
 me de neant, et qui se repaissoit de chimeres, re- 
 pondoit a tout avec la dignite d'un Amiral & d' 
 un Vice-Roi, et parloit toujours fort sensement.' 
 Charlevoix. Hist, de St. Domingue, Liv. II. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 Stipulation between Columbus and the King and Queen of Spain, re- 
 specting the voyage. 
 
 The conditions which your Highnesses shall 
 grant to Don Christopher Columbus in recom- 
 pense of the discoveries which he may make 
 upon the seas in the voyage now about, by the 
 help of God, to be undertaken for the service of 
 your Highnesses are the following. 
 
 First, your Highnesses in virtue of your do- 
 minion over the said seas, shall constitute from 
 this time forth, the said Don Christopher Co- 
 lumbus your Admiral in all the islands and ter- 
 ritories which he may discover or acquire in the 
 said seas, this power to continue in him during 
 his life, and at his death to descend to his heirs 
 and successors from one to another perpetually, 
 with all the dignities and prerogatives appertain- 
 36 
 
290 APPENDtX. 
 
 ing to the said office, and according to the man- 
 ner in which this dignity has been held by Don 
 Alonzo Henriquez, your High Admiral of Cas- 
 tile, and by the other Admirals in their several 
 districts. 
 
 Granted by their Highnesses, 
 
 JUAJN DE COLOMA, 
 
 Furthermore, your Highnesses shall constitute 
 the said Don Christopher Columbus your Vice- 
 roy and Governor General in all the said islands 
 and territories to be discovered as abovesaid in 
 the said seas ; and for the government of each 
 place three persons shall be named by him, out 
 of which number your Highnesses shall select one 
 to hold the office in question. 
 
 Granted by their Highnesses, 
 
 JUAN DE COLOMA. 
 
 Furthermore, in the acquisition by trade, dis- 
 covery, or any other method, of all goods, mer- 
 chandise, pearls, precious stones, gold, silver, 
 spices and all other articles, within the limits of 
 the said Admiralty, the tenth part of their value 
 shall be the property of the said Don Christo- 
 pher Columbus, after deducting the amount ex- 
 
APPENDIX. 29 1 
 
 pended in obtaining them, and the other nine 
 tenths shall be the property of your Highnesses. 
 
 Granted by their Highnesses. 
 
 JUAN DE COLOMA. 
 
 Furthermore, if any controversy or law-suit 
 should arise in these territories relating to the 
 goods which he may obtain there, or relating to 
 any goods which others may obtain by trade in 
 the same places, the jurisdiction in the said cases 
 shall by virtue of his office of Admiral, pertain to 
 him alone or his Deputy. 
 
 Granted by their Highnesses, provided the 
 said prerogative belong to the office of 
 Admiral, according as that dignity has 
 been held by the abovementioned Admi- 
 ral Don Alonzo Henriquez, and the others 
 of that rank in their several districts, and 
 provided the said regulation be just. 
 
 JUAN DE COLOMA. 
 
 Furthermore, in the fitting out of any fleets 
 for the purpose of trade in the said territories, 
 the said Don Christopher Columbus shall on 
 every such occasion, be allowed the privilege 
 of furnishing one eighth of the expenses of the 
 
 * 
 
292 APPENDIX. 
 
 expedition, and shall at such times receive an 
 eighth part of the profits arising therefrom. 
 
 Granted by their Highnesses. 
 
 JUAN DE COLOMA. 
 
 Agreed and stipulated, with the answers of 
 their Highnesses to each article of the contract, 
 in the city of Granada, on the seventeenth day 
 of April, in the year of our Saviour Jesus Christ, 
 one thousand four hundred and ninety-two. 
 
 I THE KING, 
 I THE QUEEN. 
 By order of the King and Queen. 
 
 JUAN DE COLOMA. 
 
 Registered. 
 
 Calcena. 
 
 Commission of Admiral, Viceroy and Governor in (he isles and territo- 
 ries which may be discovered, granted by the King and Queen to 
 Christopher Columbus. 
 
 Don Ferdinand and Dona Isabel, by the grace 
 of God, King and Queen of Castile, Leon, Arra- 
 gon, &c. Inasmuch as you Christopher Colum- 
 bus are about to depart by our orders, and with 
 certain of our ships and men, for the discovery 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 293 
 
 of sundry islands and territories in the ocean, 
 and it is hoped, with the help of God, that you 
 will effect the discovery and acquisition of some 
 of the said islands and territories, and considering 
 that as you encounter the said hazards for our 
 service, it is just and reasonable you should re- 
 ceive a proper remuneration, therefore, with a 
 desire to grant the necessary honors and rewards 
 for the above consideration, it is our will and 
 pleasure that you, the said Christopher Colum- 
 bus, having discovered and acquired the said is- 
 lands and territories or any part of them, shall 
 be our Admiral, Viceroy, and Governor in those 
 places, and that you thenceforth entitle youself 
 Don Christopher Columbus, and that your sons 
 and successors in the said charge and office, also 
 entitle themselves Don and Admiral, Viceroy and 
 Governor in those places ; and that you exercise 
 the said office of Admiral, Viceroy and Governor 
 in the islands and territories which may be discov- 
 ered and acquired by you and your Lieutenants 
 and Deputies ; and that you hear and decide all 
 suits and causes, both civil and criminal, which 
 pertain to the said office of Admiral, Viceroy 
 and Governor, according to the just extent of 
 the power of that office, and according to the 
 privileges of the Admirals of our dominions ; and 
 that you have power to execute all necessary 
 punishments ; and that you exercise all the func- 
 
294 APPENDIX. 
 
 tions properly belonging to the said office of Ad- 
 miral, Viceroy and Governor, as also your Dep- 
 uties; and that you enjoy all the privileges and 
 salaries appertaining to the abovementioned 
 offices as they are accustomed to be held by 
 our High Admiral of Castile, and the Viceroys 
 and Governors throughout our dominions. 
 
 And we signify by this commission, to the 
 Prince Don Juan, our well-beloved son, and to 
 the Infantas, Dukes, &c. &c, Judges, Chancellors, 
 &c. &c, Magistrates, &c. &c. throughout our 
 kingdoms, and thoughout the territories which 
 may be acquired by you, and to the Captains, 
 Officers, &c, our subjects at sea, for the present 
 and future time — to all and each one of them, 
 that the said islands and territories being dis- 
 covered and acquired by you in the said ocean, 
 and the customary and requisite declarations and 
 solemnities having been published by you or your 
 Deputy — they are thenceforth to acknowledge 
 and regard you as our Admiral of the said Ocean, 
 and as Viceroy and Governor of the said islands 
 and territories which you the said Don Christo- 
 pher Columbus shall have discovered and ac- 
 quired; and that they acknowledge and regard 
 you as such during your life, and afterwards your 
 son and successor, and so on from successor to 
 successor forever; and that they acknowledge 
 and regard as the same whomsoever you shajl 
 
APPENDIX. 295 
 
 constitute your Deputy or Lieutenant ; and that 
 they grant to you all the salaries, duties, and 
 other privileges belonging to the said office ; and 
 they extend to you all the honors, dignities, im- 
 munities, liberties, powers, &c. which justly be- 
 long to the abovementioned office of Admiral, 
 Viceroy and Governor, in such a manner that no 
 deficiency or limitation e\ist in that respect, and 
 that you encounter no hindrance or restriction in 
 the exercise of the said office. We therefore 
 by this commission confer upon you the office of 
 Admiral, Viceroy and Governor, to be held in 
 hereditary possession forever with all the privi- 
 leges and salaries pertaining thereto, &c. &c. 
 
 To which end we hereby order, (if the same 
 be necessary and requested by you) our Chancel- 
 lor, Notaries, and other officers to whom this 
 matter pertains, that they furnish you with a 
 power to this effect, signed, sealed and attested 
 in the fullest and most authentic manner; this or- 
 der to be complied with as they value our favour, 
 and under a penalty of ten thousand maravedis 
 for any disobedience thereof. And whoever in 
 such a case shall exhibit this our commission, shall 
 be authorised to summon the said persons to ap- 
 pear before us, at our court, wherever that may 
 happen to be, within fifteen days from the date 
 of the summons, under the abovementioned 
 
296 APPENDIX. 
 
 penalty ; for the verification of which act we 
 hereby command whatever public notary shall 
 be applied to for that purpose, to furnish the 
 necessary attestations signed by his hand, in 
 order that we may be assured of the due 
 performance of our orders. 
 
 Given in our city of Granada on the ~\ J TJJE KING. 
 thirtieth day of April in the year of F 
 
 our Saviour Jesus Christ, one thou f j TOT? i"kTTr , T7'\r 
 
 sand four hundred and ninety-two. ) ' 1 tlH* Jq£U JiilliiN. 
 
 By order of the King and Queen. 
 
 JUAN DE COLOMA, Secretary. 
 
 Executed in due form, 
 
 RODERICUS, Doctor. 
 
 Registered, 
 
 SEBASTIAN DE OLANO, 
 FRANCISCO DE MADRID, 
 
 Chancellor. 
 
APPENDIX. 297 
 
 REQUISITION UPON THE INHABITANTS OF PALOS FOR TWO 
 OF THE VESSELS COMPOSING THE FLEET. 
 
 Don Ferdinand and Dona Isabel, by the grace of 
 God, King and Queen ofCastile, Leon, Arragon 
 &c. &c. to you Diego Rodriguez Prieto, and to 
 all other persons inhabitants of the town of Pa- 
 los, greeting. You are well aware that in con- 
 sequence of some offence which we received at 
 your hands, you were condemned by our council 
 to render us the service of two caravels armed at 
 your own expense for the space of twelve months, 
 whenever and wherever it should be our pleas- 
 ure to demand the same, this service to be ren- 
 dered under certain penalties, as stated more at 
 large in the sentence given against you. 
 
 And inasmuch as we have ordered Christopher 
 Columbus to proceed with a fleet of three cara- 
 vels, as our Captain, to certain parts of the ocean 
 upon a matter connected with our service, and 
 we desire that the two caravels, the service of 
 which you owe us as abovesaid, should be placed 
 at his disposal — we hereby order that within ten 
 days from the sight of this letter, without delay 
 or waiting for any further directions, you have 
 in complete readiness the said two armed cara- 
 vels for the service of the above-mentioned 
 37 
 
298 APPENDIX. 
 
 Christopher Columbus in the enterprise upon 
 which we have dispatched him, and that they be 
 placed at his command from that time forth ; 
 and for the crews of the said two caravels we 
 order him to pay you forthwith four months' 
 wages at the same rate with which the crew of 
 the other caravel is paid, being the common al- 
 lowance for ships of war. 
 
 The vessels thus placed under his direction shall 
 follow the route ordered by him on our part, ai d 
 obey him in all other orders, provided that nei- 
 ther you nor the said Christopher Columbus, nor 
 any other persons belonging to the said caravels 
 shall proceed to the mine, nor to the countries in 
 that neighborhood occupied by the King of Portu- 
 gal our brother, as it is our desire to adhere to the 
 agreement existing between us and the said King 
 of Portugal upon that head. 
 
 And having received a certificate from the 
 said Captain, that he has received the said two 
 caravels from you, and is satisfied with the same, 
 we shall consider you as having discharged the 
 obligation imposed upon you by our Council as 
 abovesaid,and we hereby declare you thenceforth 
 free from the same; but in the event of the non- 
 fulfilment or procrastination of the above order, 
 we shall forthwith command the execution of the 
 
APPENDIX. 299 
 
 penalties contained in the aforesaid sentence, 
 upon each one of you and jour goods. 
 
 The above requisition is to be complied with 
 throughout, under pain of our displeasure and a 
 penalty of ten thousand maravedis for the non- 
 performance of any part thereof, to which end 
 we herebj order under the said penalty, what- 
 ever public notary may be called upon for that 
 purpose, to furnish you with the proper signed 
 attestations, that we may be assured of the fulfil- 
 ment of our orders. 
 
 Given in the city of Granada, on \ I TfJE KING 
 on the thirtieth day of April, in F 
 the year of our Lord Jesus Christ /■ 
 
 one thousand four hundred and V f T^HE QUEEN 
 ninety-two. * " 
 
 JUAN DE COLOMA, Secretary 
 
 of the King and Queen, Sfc. fyc. 
 
 Done in due form, 
 
 RODERICUS, Doctor. 
 
 Registered, 
 
 SEBASTIAN DE OLANO, 
 FRANCISCO DE MADRID, 
 
 Chancellor. 
 
300 APPENDIX. 
 
 Charter of Immunity, granted by the King and Queen, exempting 
 the crew of the fleet from arrest or detention by the civil au- 
 thority. 
 
 Don Ferdinand and Dona Isabel, by the grace 
 of God, King and Queen of Castile, Leon, Arra- 
 gon, &c. &c. &c. — To the members of our Coun- 
 cil, Oidors of our Court of Audience, Corregi- 
 dores, Asistentes, Alcaldes, Alguacils, Merinos, 
 and all other magistrates whatsoever of all the 
 cities, towns and villages of our kingdoms and 
 dominions, to every one who shall see this writ- 
 ing or a copy of the same attested by a public 
 notary — greeting. 
 
 Be it known to you that we have ordered 
 Christopher Columbus to proceed to sea for the 
 accomplishment of certain business for our ser- 
 vice, and as we are informed by him that in or- 
 der to man the fleet which he is to command 
 for the execution of this purpose, it is necessary 
 to grant a security to the persons composing the 
 crew of the same, who would be otherwise un- 
 willing to embark, and being requested by him 
 to give the necessary orders for this measure, we 
 have determined to grant what is demanded by 
 him relating to this matter. 
 
APPENDIX. 301 
 
 We therefore hereby grant a security to each 
 and every person belonging to the crews of the 
 fleet of the said Christopher Columbus, in the 
 voyage by sea which he is about to undertake 
 by our command, exempting them from all hind- 
 rance or incommodity either in their persons 
 or goods ; and we declare them privileged from 
 arrest or detention on account of any offence or 
 crime which may have been committed by therfi 
 up to the date of this instrument, and during the 
 time they may be upon the voyage, and for two 
 months after their return to their homes. 
 
 And we hereby command you, all and each 
 one, in your several districts and jurisdictions, 
 that you abstain from trying any criminal cause 
 touching the persons of the crews under the 
 command of the said C-^istopher Columbus, dur- 
 ing the time above specified, it being our will and 
 pleasure that every matter of this sort remain 
 suspended. This order is to be complied with 
 as you value our favour, and under a penalty of 
 ten thousand maravedis for any infringement of 
 the same. 
 
 And we hereby furthermore command every 
 public notary who shall be applied to for any 
 purpose connected with the above mentioned 
 mandate, that he furnish all the proper signed 
 
302 APPENDIX. 
 
 attestations which are necessary in the case, in 
 order that we may be assured of the due per- 
 formance of our orders. 
 
 Given in our city of Granada, the \ \ THE KING. 
 
 thirtieth day of April, in the year f 
 
 of our Saviour Jesus Christ, one / 
 
 thousand four hundred and nine- % J THE QUEEN 
 
 ty-two. J ^ 
 
 JUAN DE COLOMA, Secretary. 
 
 Executed in due form, 
 
 RODERICUS, Doctor. 
 FRANCISCO DE MADRID. 
 
 Chancellor. 
 
 LETTER OF THE KING AND C EEN TO COLUMBUS UPON 
 HIS RETURN FROM THE DISCOVERY. 
 
 The King and Queen to Don Christopher Co- 
 lumbus our Admiral of the Ocean, and Viceroy 
 and Governor of the Islands discovered in the 
 Indies : — We have seen your letters and receiv- 
 ed much pleasure from their contents. We are 
 rejoiced that God has granted so fortunate an is- 
 sue to your enterprise, which will redound much 
 to his service and to the profit of ourselves and 
 
APPENDIX. 303 
 
 our dominions. For these great services we hope 
 to reward you in a manner suitable to your mer- 
 its ; and as it is our wish that the undertaking 
 which has been begun by you, be with the help 
 of God, carried on and accomplished, and as we 
 desire to see you immediately, we request there- 
 fore that you will use all possible speed in hast- 
 ening to us, that all necessary preparations may be 
 made without delay. And as the season is early, 
 and favorable for your return to the countries 
 you have discovered, we wish you to ascertain 
 whether measures cannot be taken at Seville or 
 other places, necessary to that end. We request 
 you to write by the courier who brings you this, 
 .and who returns immediately, that the whole 
 may be arranged by the time you return thither 
 from us. 
 
 Barcelorm, March 30/A, 1493. 
 
 I THE KING. 
 I THE QUEEN. 
 
 By order of the King and Queen, 
 
 FERNAND ALVAREZ. 
 

 ' „ 
 
 ^> v ■> 'V s * 
 
 ^ <^ x *£»<£> 
 
 z - < 
 
 - ^j 
 
 *>* ^ 
 o 
 
 
 
 O. 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 ■-ir. 
 
 '' ^ A x 
 
 •c o x : . - ^ v : 
 
 .^ X ^ * : ■ "^, *,,!- ^ 
 
 C- V 
 
 ^ *•■ >» / »♦, e.. '°/. *..-** \ x> 
 
 <* \' X ""^ ' 
 
 \d. xy < ■' o * v. * a 
 
 G - x >->;-, ' V .: " X 
 
 
 
 k v 
 
 '%/ 
 
 ■/■ 
 

 ^ < 
 
 rP v s 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 
 
 -IE 'TO 7 ! BOUND TO PLEASE 
 
 JedmM ftudwfmc 
 
 Sr tfAl 
 
 ^NP' N. MANCHESTER, 
 ksk^U INDIANA